POSTOUi 


ERSi 


PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  SEMINARY 

I   OCT     ?I9P7    I 

\1d7 


HISTORICAL  NOTES  J 


The  Apostolic  Leaders 


BY 

Professor   FRANK   K.  SANDERS.    D.D. 

PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL  SEMINARY 

jHB        OCT    21997 

' 

BIBLE    STUDY  PUBLISHING   COMPANY  ; 

BOSTON  i 


Copyright,  1907, 
by 
Bible  Study  Publishing  Company. 


PREFACE 

These  notes  were  written  to  accompany  the  Bible  Study 
Union  biographical  lessons  on  the  Apostolic  Leaders.  They 
were  originally  published  in  various  weekly  papers,  and  were 
found  so  valuable  as  to  warrant  their  issue  in  book  form  for 
permanent  use. 

The  notes  follow  the  lessons  chapter  by  chapter,  but  present 
an  interpretation  of  the  origin  and  development  of  the 
Apostolic  Church  as  seen  in  the  lives  of  its  principal  founders, 
rather  tnan  an  account  of  its  details.  They  trace  the  progress 
of  the  church  from  its  beginnings  in  Jerusalem  after  the 
ascension  of  Christ  through  its  extension  to  Samaria,  through- 
out Palestine  and  into  Asia  Minor,  Greece,  and  Rome.  In 
doing  this  they  place  its  principal  incidents  and  the  principal 
apostolic  teachings  in  their  proper  historical  environment, 
and  reveal  their  larger  meaning.  This  enables  the  reader 
to  gain  a  true  historical  perspective  of  these  exceedingly 
interesting  events,  and  thus  to  understand  each  lesson  in  the 
light  of  its  relation  to  the  development  of  the  apostolic 
church  as  a  whole.  The  notes  also  suggest  with  more  or 
less  fulness  the  practical  application  of  the  lesson  truths  to 
the  life  of  to-day. 

Considerably  more  than  one  half  of  the  entire  volume, 
chapters  14-48  inclusive,  is  devoted  to  the  life  of  the  great 
apostle  Paul.  These  chapters  present  an  exceedingly  in- 
teresting and  valuable  outline  of  his  life  and  work.  Each 
epistle  is  introduced  in  its  proper  historical  connections, 
and  an  outline  of  its  principal  contents  is  given.  In  this 
way  a  flood  of  light  is  thrown  upon  the  meaning  of  the 
epistles,  and  also  upon  the  general  historical  development  of 
the  chtu"ch. 

Dr.  Sanders'  high  reputation  as  a  Biblical  scholar  guar- 
antees that  these  notes  will  be  found  a  great  aid  toward  the 
correct  understanding  and  best  use  of  the  Scripture  narrative. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

1.  The  Humble  Beginnings  of  the  ApostoHc  Church    .        1 

2.  The  Training  of  the  ApostoHc  Band       ...        4 

3.  The  Ideas  of  the  Apostles  Clarified         ...       8 

4.  The  Day  of  Pentecost U 

5.  The  First  Manifestation  of  Friendly  Power    .  .      16 

6.  The  Boldness  of  Peter  and  John  .  .          .          .20 

7.  The  Unity  and  Constancy  of  the  Church        .  .     24 

8.  The  Martyrdom  of  Stephen  .          .          .          .27 

9.  The  Successful  Evangelism  of  Philip     .          .  .30 

10.  Peter's  Vision.     Christianity's  Forward  Step  .     35 

11.  Peter  at  the  House  of  Cornelius    .  .          .39 

12.  Peter's  Imprisonment,  Deliverance  and  Departure.      43 

13.  The  Developing  Church :      A  Review     .  .          .47 


14.  The  Conversion  of  Saul         .  ,          .          .          .50 

15.  The  Training  of  Saul 54 

16.  Paul's  First  Missionary  Journey    .  .          .          .58 

17.  Paul  and  Barnabas  in  Galatia       .  .          .          .62 

18.  The  Council  at  Jerusalem 66 

19.  Paul  in  Troas  and  Philippi  .          .          .          .70 

20.  Paul  at  Philippi 74 

21.  Paul  at  Thessalonica  and  Beroea  .          .          .78 

22.  Paul's  Address  at  Athens 82 

23.  Paul's  Long  Stay  at  Corinth         .  .          .-        .87 

24.  Paul's  Letters  to  the  Church  at  Thessalonica  .     91 

25.  Paul's  Letter  to  the  Churches  in  Galatia  95 

26.  The  Planting  of  the  Gentile  Churches  in  Galatia, 

Macedonia  and  Greece :     A  Review    .  .  .99 


Introduction 

CHAPTER  PAOB 

27.  Paul  at  Ephesus  .          .          .          .          .          .103 

28.  The  Riot  at  Ephesus 107 

29  The  Primitive  Church  at  School  .           .          .          .112 

30.  The  Supreme  Gift 116 

31.  The  Great  Collection 121 

32.  Paul's  Tender  Appeal  to  the  Church  at  Corinth        .    125 

33.  Paul's  Defense  of  his  Apostolic  Authority      .  .128 

34.  Paul's  Letter  to  the  Church  at  Rome    .  .          .132 

35.  The  Assurance  of  the  Christian  Believer         .  .136 

36.  The  Last  Journey  to  Jerusalem    ....    140 

37.  Paul's  Disappointing  Visit  to  Jerusalem  .  .    144 

38.  Paul's  Removal  to  Cassarea  .          .                    .148 

39.  Paul's    Grappling    with    Paganism    and    Judaism 

Alike:      A  Review 152 

40.  Paul's  Appeal  to  Caesar        .  .          .          .          .156 

41.  Paul's  Defense  before  Agrippa      .  .          .          .159 

42.  The  Voyage  to  Rome 164 

43.  Paul  a  Prisoner  at  Rome 168 

44.  Paul's  Letter  to  the  Church  at  Philippi  .          .172 

45.  Paul's  Plea  to  Philemon  on  Behalf  of  Onesimus     .    176 

46.  Paul's  Letters  to  the  Churches  of  Asia  .          .180 

47.  Paul's  Missionary  Career,  as  Told  by  Himself  .    184 

48.  The  Close  of  Paul's  Career 188 

49.  The  Last  Words  of  Peter  on  Behalf  of  the  Church.    192 

50.  The  Apocalyptic  Vision  of  the  Triumphant  Christ   .    196 

51.  The  Last  Messages  of  the  Apostolic  Age  .          .201 

52.  The  Later  Apostolic  Age :     A  Review  .  .         .  205 


in 


THE  APOSTOLIC  LEADERS 


Chapter  1.     The  Humble  Beginnings  of  the  Apostolic 
Church.    Scattered  References  A.  D.  27,  28. 

The  earliest  Christian  assemblies  centered  around  the 
apostles.  Without  the  wise  and  fearless  leadership  of 
these  men  they  could  not  have  been  maintained.  Their 
personal  testimony  gave  reality  to  the  new  faith;  their 
self-sacrifice  and  indomitable  persistence  gave  it 
strength;  their  noble  personalities  Lifted  it  into  dignity 
and  impressiveness  and  independence.  It  is  conse- 
quently appropriate  that  the  historian  of  the  Christian 
Church  should  begin  his  narrative  by  tracing  the  steps 
by  which  the  several  apostles  were  first  brought  into  con- 
tinuous personal  contact  with  their  beloved  Master,  to 
whose  friendship,  instruction  and  foresight  they  attrib- 
uted every  element  of  greatness  ever  manifested  by 
them. 

It  is  interesting  to  notice  that  Jesus  laid  hold  of  them 
strongly  at  the  very  first.  There  was  something  about 
Him  when  He  came  from  Nazareth  to  be  baptized  which 
attracted  men  of  earnest  mind.  It  is  far  easier  to  recog- 
nize fine  and  noble  character  than  to  explain  the  process 
of  recognition.  The  little  group  of  men  who  transferred 
their  attention  from  John  the  Baptist  to  Jesus  on  His 
petum  from  His  sojourn  in  the  wilderness  may  not  have 
been  able  to  explain  the  impulse  which  they  obeyed  to 
follow  the  One  whom  their  master  had  extolled,  but 
they  knew  Him  at  a  glance  as  One  of  commanding  spir- 
itual presence,  a  natural  Leader  of  serious  men.  He 
quickly  revealed  Himself  that  day  as  all  conversed  to- 
gether. Their  convictions  answered  to  the  testimony  of 
John.  They  believed  Him  to  be  the  long-awaited 
Messiah. 

That  afternoon  witnessed  the  real  beginning  of  Chris- 
tianity.    In  these  ardent  yet  thoughtful  Jewish  patriots 


2  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

who  had  rallied  to  the  summons  of  the  prophet  of  the 
wilderness,  hoping  that  he  would  show  them  what  part 
to  take  in  the  work  of  preparation  for  the  expected 
Messiah,  Jesus  found  promptly  the  responsiveness  and 
the  quality  which  gave  Him  encouragement  and  confi- 
dence.   No  longer  did  He  stand  virtually  alone.    He 


From  a  photograph. 

The  River  Jordan,  near  Jericio. 

The  place  where  Peter  and  John  are  supposed  to  have  first  met  Jesus. 

became  the  self-reliant,  resourceful,  energetic,  far- 
sighted  Leader  of  men. 

No  less  revolutionary  a  change  came  over  the  little 
group  that  followed  Him  from  the  Jordan  to  Galilee. 
Their  relations  with  Him  rapidly  became  more  than 
casual,  and  although  not  yet  permanent,  were  yet  signifi- 
cantly close,  affording  to  these  simple,  strong  natures  an 
assurance  of  greater  revelations  through  their  continued 
fellowship.     The  note  of  expectancy  at  least  was  struck. 

The  leaders  of  this  group  did  not  fail  to  appear  at  the 
very  outset.  Peter's  rugged  strength  was  unmistakable ; 
John  and  Andrew  were  prominent  as  disciples  of  the 
Baptist.  It  is  useless  to  try  to  sketch  what  the  Evangel- 
ists have  failed  to  record  in  any  way.  These  disciples 
were  for  some  time  with  Jesus.  Probably  He  saw  them 
often  at  Capernaum  before  they  were  taken  from  their 
daily  toil  to  follow  Him. 

One  day,  however,  crowds  so  pressed  upon  Him  as  He 
walked  along  the  shore  of  the  lake  that  He  stepped  into 
a  boat  belonging  to  Peter  and  from  it  taught  the  multi- 
tude.    When  the  sermon  was  finished  and  the  throng  had 


Chapter  1.     Beginnings  of  the  Church  S 

dispersed,  Jesus  directed  His  familiar  friends  to  try 
their  fortune  in  the  lake.  With  a  protest  against  the 
useless  labor,  they  do  so  and  are  astonished  to  find  a 
whole  boat  load  of  fish.  So  evidently  was  this  both  a 
testing  and  a  bid  for  confidence  that  Peter,  the  out- 
spoken, put  into  words  their  feeling  of  awe  and  fealty. 
They  recognized  the  great  difference,  as  well  as  the  gen- 
uine sympathy,  between  Him  and  themselves.  But  He 
with  gracious  and  winning  tenderness  explained  the  par- 
abolic meaning  of  His  action.  With  His  help  they  were 
to  enter  promptly  into  a  higher  sphere  of  activity.  They 
had  been  catchers  of  fish;  they  should  become  skilful 
fishers  for  men. 

This  was  a  new  and  larger  definition  of  the  purpose  of 
life.  The  Jew  was  not  a  natural  evangelist,  except  as  he 
sought  to  raise  his  fellow-countrymen  to  a  sense  of  their 
manifest  duty  and  opportunity.  But  Jesus  from  the 
outset  took  the  ground  that  repentance,  forgiveness  and 
renewed  life  were  terms  which  applied  in  full  force  to 
His  contemporaries  in  Judea  as  well  as  elsewhere.  The 
great  purpose  of  His  followers  would  be  to  co-operate 
with  Him  in  the  forming  of  character  and  the  training 
of  personality. 

The  quick  and  unreserved  response  of  these  men  to  the 
call  of  Jesus  shows  that  they  had  long  since  contemplated 
the  possibility  of  such  a  summons,  and  had  made  up  their 
minds  regarding  Him.  The  words  of  the  Gospels  can 
hardly  lead  to  any  other  conclusion.  They  had  been 
prepared  in  some  way  for  self-surrender  and  for  the 
cheerful  exchange  of  the  old  set  of  duties  for  the  new. 
It  was  a  momentous  chana^e.  Henceforth  their  life  was 
lived  for  the  kingdom.     The  church  had  truly  begun. 

The  invitation  of  Jesus  is  no  less  for  us  than  it  was 
for  them.  These  earliest  members  of  the  Christian 
church  to  be  represented  distinct  types  of  personality. 
Peter,  Andrew  and  John  stood  for  three  sorts  of  temper- 
ament. It  is  well  that  they  did.  They  represented 
more  strength  and  resourcefulness  and  perseverance 
than  three  Peters  or  three  Johns  could  have  assured. 


4  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

The  strength  of  the  church  of  Christ  continues  to  lie  in 
the  fact  that  it  welcomes  and  uses  every  sort  of  value. 
We  can  trace  an  unbroken  chain  of  development  from 
the  twentieth  century  back  to  that  first  day  on  the  banks 
of  the  Jordan.  Several  men  merely  followed  their  con- 
victions and  yielded  to  the  influence  of  the  noblest  per- 
sonality they  had  yet  known.  It  could  not  have  seemed 
of  far-reaching  importance  to  them,  but  the  whole  history 
of  Christianity  began  in  their  spontaneous  loyalty  to 
Jesus.  Its  continued  progress  is  equally  dependent  on 
the  fidelity  of  each  Christian  to  such  opportunities. 


Chapter  2«    The  Training  of  the  Apostolic  Band.    Scat- 
tered References.    A.  D.  28-30. 

The  varied  influences  which  helped  to  mould  the 
Twelve  into  far-seeing,  courageous,  persistent  men  of 
settled  convictions  and  sacrificial  spirit,  true  representa- 
tives of  Jesus,  are  in  a  measure  suggested  by  the  nar- 
rative of  each  Gospel  regarding  their  call  to  permanent 
service.  Jesus  had  been  quietly  testing  the  band  of  fol- 
lowers who  had  gathered  around  Him,  and  had  settled 
in  His  own  mind  whom  He  would  summon.  The  Gospel 
of  Mark  in  relating  the  call  lays  emphasis  upon  the  need 
of  companionship  and  service,  "that  they  might  be  with 
Him  and  that  He  might  send  them  forth  to  preach." 
The  two  belong  together.  Their  intimacy  with  Him  crave 
them  that  stronsj  sense  of  hopefulness  which  enabled 
them  to  spread  abroad  His  message  with  enthusiasm  and 
conviction. 

The  first  Gospel  laVi?  stress  upon  the  neerl  of  appi<5tfince 
in  widespread  evangelism.  Jesus  (Mt.  9:35  ff.)  had 
been  mflkin^  an  extensive  joumeving  throusrhout  Gali- 
lee, teaching,  preaching  and  healinsr.  He  had  met  mul- 
titudes everywhere  in  bitter  need,  for  whom  the  national 


Chapter  2.     Trainvng  of  the  Ayotilhs 


leaders  seemed  to  have  no  care,  "sheep  not  having  a 
shepherd/'  He  longed  to  give  them  the  helpful  message 
of  divine  love  and  human  friendliness,  and  seemed  to  call 
the  Twelve  around  Him  that  this  might  be  quickly  and 
widely  achieved.  No  doubt  that  at  this  early  day  the 
Twelve  began  to  realize  the  opportunities  and  the  possi- 


View  on  tlie  Sea  of  Galilee. 


From  a  photograplt. 


bilities  of  such  work.  They  gained  that  sympathy  for 
men  and  women  in  spiritual  darkness  that  heartened 
them  for  steady  serviceableness. 

Luke  says  little  about  the  motive  of  the  call,  but  he 
emphasizes  its  importance.  Before  Jesus  made  His  mo- 
mentous choice  He  spent  the  whole  night  in  prayer  for 
God's  guidance.  He  realized  the  significance  of  this 
appointment  and  the  greatness  of  the  service  to  be 
exacted.  The  apostles  were  to  become  transformed  into 
His  likeness,  guided  by  His  ideals,  fitted  to  continue  His 
work  of  soul  building. 

We  thus  are  impressed  with  the  varied  and  important 
outlook  before  these  twelve  men.  Had  they  realized  at 
the  time  what  a  response  to  His  invitation  meant,  some 
of  them  might  have  been  hesitant.  His  personality 
charmed  them ;  His  prosram  attracted  them  and  roused 
their  enthusiasm;  His  devntedness  kindled  their  spirit 
of  sacrifice.     They  responded  unreservedly. 

There  is  a  Ions:  road  to  be  traversed  before  a  disciple 
becomes  a  genuine  apostle.  The  apoatle  is  a  leader; 
the  disciple  a  follower.     The  apostle  assumes  responsi- 


6  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

bility  and  marks  out  new  lines  of  progress;  the  disciple 
is  faithful  to  the  work  made  clear  to  him.  The  apostle 
embodies  Christlikeness ;  the  disciple  seeks  it.  The 
Twelve  were  not  at  once  prepared  to  assume  the  responsi- 
bilities germane  to  their  position.  They  had  first  of  all 
to  come  to  know  Him  as  more  than  a  gracious  and 
beloved  Teacher,  to  have  absolute  confidence  in  Him  as 
the  Messiah  who  was  to  redeem  Israel.  It  would  seem 
that  they  acquired  this  partly  by  association,  in  part  by 
contrasting  Him  with  the  leaders  of  Judaism  and  again 
by  His  own  words,  so  wise,  significant  and  satisfying. 
They  then  needed  to  grasp  the  real  meaning  of  Messiah- 
ship,  so  different  from  their  inherited  conception.  Along 
with  it  they  needed  to  understand  discipleship,  particu- 
larly divorcing  it  from  any  other  meaning  than  humble 
serviceableness.  A  year  of  activity  and  a  year  of  in- 
struction barely  sufficed  for  these  impressions. 

Above  all  other  schooling  in  value  was  the  continuous 
fellowship  with  Jesus.  He  was  the  embodiment  and 
illustration  of  all  that  He  taught.  In  the  light  of  His 
presence  all  perplexities  were  made  plain,  all  unworthi- 
ness  revealed,  all  noble  impulses  glorified.  By  contact 
with  His  unfailing  goodness  and  gentleness  and  great- 
ness they  became  friends  of  all  the  world,  helpers  of 
every  type  of  need,  men  of  spiritual  vision,  of  unflag- 
ging enthusiasm,  of  unquenchable  ronfirlpnce. 

Peter  and  John  by  nature  excelled  the  rest.  Peter 
would  have  been  a  leader  in  any  asre  or  place.  His 
strong,  rugged  character,  his  fiery  enthusiasm  and  his 
deep  sincerity  made  him  one  whom  men  would  love  and 
follow.  He  readilv  assumed  responsibility  and  brou^fht 
things  to  pass.  The  Gospels  depict  Peter  as  a  man  of 
vast  possibilities  of  development,  needing  a  broadening 
of  vision,  a  steadying  of  purpose,  a  development  of  un- 
faltering confidence  in  his  Master  and  a  shaking  of 
confidence  in  himself.  He  needed  the  severest  sort  of 
discipline  in  order  that  he  might  become  the  srreat 
leader  of  the  primitive  church.  His  greatest  weakness 
was  his  self-confidence.     When  he  had  substituted  for  it 


Chapter  2.     Training  of  the  Apodles  7 

an  absolute  and  irreversible  confidence  in  God,  he  became 
the  natural  leader  of  the  apostolic  band.  Peter's  experi- 
ence of  discipline  was  keen  and  sweetening.  He  had  an 
unselfish  spirit  and  a  noble  personality.  The  love  of 
Jesus  filled  his  soul  and  made  his  transformation  sure. 

John,  the  much-loved  companion,  with  whom  Jesus 
had  much  in  common,  was  a  vastly  different  but  equally 
noble  man.  He  made  fewer  mistakes  than  Peter  because 
he  was  naturally  more  thoughtful.  They  found 
mutual  helpfulness  in  each  other,  and  were  inseparable. 
John  clung  close  to  the  Master.  Capable  of  being  a 
^'son  of  thunder,"  as  he  not  infrequently  showed,  yet  he 
ripened  in  the  close  companionship  of  Jesus  into  a 
beautiful,  well-balanced,  impressive  personality,  keen  of 
spiritual  insight,  brave  in  timea  of  peril,  strong  in  con- 
viction of  the  truth,  yet  gentle  and  persuasive  in  its  dec- 
laration. We  can  readily  infer  the  general  effect  of  a 
long-continued  intimacy  with  Jesus  upon  his  contempla- 
tive mind.  He  had  become  the  bosom  friend  of  the 
noblest  and  most  perfect  person  that  ever  lived,  enjoying 
His  confidence,  entering  into  His  inner  life.  It  elimi- 
nated almost  unconsciously  those  convictions  and  ideals 
which  were  not  in  accord  with  those  of  his  Master. 

It  is  instructive  to  note  that  a  group  as  diverse  as  the 
apostles  could  really  ^et  together  for  great  ends.  Each 
maintained  his  individuality  yet  each  became  Christlike. 
Throuafh  loyalty  to  Him  their  diversitv  of  temperament 
and  of  gifts  became  available  toward  the  achievement  of 
a  common  purpose.  There  is  a  continuous  value  in 
individuality,  provided  it  be  consecrated,  unselfish,  and 
co-operative.  The  more  of  such  men  to-day  the  better. 
We  may  become  one  in  g^eneral  purpose,  in  service,  and 
in  sympathy  without  doing  identical  things. 

One  great  quality  of  these  men  was  their  responsive- 
ness to  influences.  Their  experiences  trained  them  into 
Christlikeness  because  they  were  livins:  at  their  highest 
level  and  in  their  larsrest  way.  All  life  experiences  may 
be  made  as  fruitful  for  those  of  us  who  deliberately  do 
our  best  to  follow  His  lead. 


8  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

Chapter  3.— The  Ideas  of  the  Apostles  Clarified.     Scat- 
tered References.    A.  D.  30. 

Of  all  the  periods  during  which  the  apostles  were  in 
living  contact  with  Jesus  the  most  important  was  that 
which  connected  the  Last  Supper  with  the  ascension. 
Not  until  then  did  Jesus  have  completely  intelligent  and 
sympathetic  hearers.  His  death  and  resurrection  made 
significant  much  instruction  that  otherwise  would  have 
fallen  on  unheeding  ears.  For  the  first  time  the  Twelve 
were  enabled  to  take  an  unprejudiced  survey  of  the  past 
and  future  and  to  receive  in  all  its  fullness  the  teaching 
of  the  Matter. 

The  evening  of  sacred  fellowship  in  the  upper  room 
did  much  to  prepare  them  for  this  later  comprehension 
of  the  truth.  There  around  the  table  in  familiar  inter- 
course Jesus  unveiled  His  soul.  Telling  them  explicitly 
that  there  were  many  things  yet  in  His  mind  for  them 
of  which  He  could  not  speak  at  the  time,  since  they  were 
not  prepared  to  understand,  He  talked  of  the  separation 
that  would  soon  take  place,  of  the  close  and  permanent 
union  which  it  would  make  possible,  of  the  continuing 
sense  of  His  abiding  presence  filling  them  with  confi- 
dence and  power,  of  the  peacefulness  of  spirit  which 
should  be  the  normal  expression  of  their  sense  of  fellow- 
ship, of  the  conquests  they  would  make  in  their  own 
hearts  and  in  the  world  through  the  power  of  prayer,  of 
their  realization  of  the  presence  of  a  Helper  at  all  times 
of  need,  and  of  His  work  in  educating  them  to  a  knowl- 
edge of  the  truth,  and  in  supplementing  and  sustain- 
ing tlieir  faith.  He  dwelt  upon  the  love  He  had  mani- 
fested for  them  and  had  received  from  them,  and 
urged  its  continuance  as  the  secret  of  enduring,  sacri- 
ficial service  in  the  years  to  come.  Such  friendship 
needed  not  to  cease;' it  was  rather  destined  to  abide 
and  deepen  and  become  more  fruitful.  He  and  they 
were  as  truly  one  as  the  vine  and  the  branches.  He 
was  their  beloved  Master,  but  a  deeper  bond  of  associa- 
tion had  developed.  They  were  His  real  friends,  worthy 
of  sacred   confidences,  to  whom   truth   would   not   be 


Chaptir  S.    Apostolic  Idem  Clarified  0 

doled  out  as  to  dependents,  but  revealed  as  to  sympa- 
thizing supporters  and  coadjutors.  This  unreserved, 
uncalculating  friendliness  they  must  make  a  part  of 
their  own  personality,  manifesting  it  to  one  another,  as 
they  held  Him  in  affectionate  and  loyal  remembrance. 

Not  only  were  they  thus  to  reproduce  His  personality 
as  they  continued  to  move  about  among  men.  They 
were  to  await  the  Holy  Spirit,  the  Helper,  who  would 
enter  genuinely  into  their  experience  to  direct,  to  influ- 


Prom  a  photograph. 

So-called  House  of  tlie  Bigh  Priest,  Calaphas. 

ence,  to  enlighten.  Thus  they  would  be  far  from  help- 
less, when  He,  their  Friend,  had  apparently  disappeared. 
A  heavy  responsibility  would  rest  upon  them,  but  along 
with  it  would  be  provided  the  assistance  which  would 
make  their  lives  fruitful. 

The  disciples  could  hardly  have  realized  the  full 
significance  of  these  declarations,  yet  they  made  a  deep 
impression. 

The  experiences  which  followed  in  quick  succession 
were  salutary.  Every  one  forsook  Him  that  night  when 
He  was  seized  by  the  soldiers.  There  was  not  one  who 
could  say  that  he  had  not  flinched  in  the  time  of  trial. 
John  and  Peter  recovered  quickly  from  their  panic  and 
followed  the  procession  to  the  palace  where  the  high 
priest  dwelt.  Possihlv  neither  of  them  dreamed  that 
there  could  be  a  fatal  ending  to  this  disasrreeable  epi- 
sode. As  they  remained  near  their  beloved  Master  and 
the  bitterness -of  spirit  manifested  by  the  rulers  devel- 


10  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

oped  and  the  danger  not  alone  to  Him  but  to  all  who 
were  identified  with  Him  became  clearer,  the  testing 
time  came  for  them.  So  far  as  evidence  goes  John 
played  the  part  consistently  of  a  brave  man.  There 
was  nothing  that  he  could  do  to  actually  aid  his  Mas- 
ter. He  could  only  presume  upon  his  acquaintance 
with  those  at  the  palace  to  enable  him  and  his  friend  to 
enter  with  the  rest  of  the  throng  and  then  give  Him  the 
support  of  his  presence  and  sympathy.  Even  so  much 
called  for  courage  and  determination.  John  may  have 
been  accosted  very  much  in  the  same  way  as  Peter,  but 
without  causing  him  to  swerve  from  his  purpose. 

Peter  in  the  crowd  without  in  the  court,  hardly 
knowing  in  the  excitement  of  the  moment  what  he  did, 
thrice  denied  that  he  was  one  of  the  followers  of  Jesus. 
At  the  third  denial  His  Master  turned  and  looked  upon 
him  with  a  tender,  penetrating,  sorrowful  glance  that 
brought  the  prediction  of  a  few  hours  before  to  Peter's 
remembrance,  as  well  as  his  indignant  denial.  Heart- 
broken he  rushed  away  to  grieve  over  his  disloyalty  to 
the  One  he  tenderly  and  loyally  loved.  That  experi- 
ence was  the  making  of  Peter  the  apostle.  It  forever 
convinced  him  of  his  weakness  when  dependent  upon 
himself  and  sent  him  in  humility  to  his  knees. 

The  spectacle  of  the  cross  made  a  deep  impression 
upon  the  disciple's.  Not  its  cruelty,  not  the  suffering, 
not  the  hideous  mockery  of  this  cruel  execution  of  the 
best  man  that  thev  had  ever  known,  impressive  as  were 
these  phases  of  the  trasfedy,  influenced  them  so  much 
as  the  commanding  fortitude,  the  unforj^ettable  dignity, 
the  resolute  self-sacrifice,  the  glorious  heavenly-minded- 
ness  exhibited  by  Jesus  upon  the  cross.  A  last  unef- 
faceable  impression  of  what  truly  God-like  character 
was,  He  made  that  day  upon  their  souls. 

The  resurrection  momins:  was  for  them  the  beginning 
of  a  new  life,  one  which  had  no  ending,  whose  signifi- 
cance had  no  bounds.  Their  Master  was  back  among 
them;  they  were  assured  of  His  identity;  yet  He  was 
not  the  same.     He  spoke  as  their  Lord  with  a  note  of 


Chapter  4.     The  Day  of  Pentecost.  11 

authority  and  finality  not  sounded  before.  He  tenderly 
forgave  their  sudden  abandonment  and  knit  them  to 
Him  by  more  enduring  bonds.  He  explained  to  them 
more  fully  the  work  tliey  were  to  do,  and  made  clear 
the  visions  of  the  past  in  regard  to  Himself. 

Our  Lord  is  being  placed  on  trial  constantly  to-day. 
Must  we,  in  order  to  become  His  reliably  loyal  disciples 
undergo  the  experience  of  a  Peter?  While  it  was  worth 
all  it  cost  to  have  such  a  man  emerge  as  leader,  yet  his 
fall  was  due  to  his  blind  self-confidence  and  was  wholly 
unnecessary.  The  royal  road  to  high  service  for  Christ 
is  not  by  way  of  sin  and  recovery,  but  by  constant  and 
earnest  holy  living. 

When  the  disciples  fully  yielded  themselves  to  their 
Lord,  He  made  a  sudden  and  surprising  transformation 
in  them.  With  such  complete  obedience  His  work  will 
always  be  achieved. 


Chapter  4.    The  Day  •!  Pentecost. 

Acts  1 :  12—2 :  42.    A.  D.  30. 

Luke  commences  his  notable  history  of  the  rise  and 
progress  of  the  Christian  Church  by  relating  in  terse  but 
telling  fashion  the  story  of  the  period  which  followed 
the  resurrection  and  of  the  last  day  spent  together  by 
the  Lord  and  His  disciples.  He  implies  that  it  was  a 
busy  interval,  a  time  of  apostolic  instruction,  of  teach- 
ing which  so  definitely  centered  upon  the  kingdom  that 
was  to  be  that  the  eager  disciples  longed  to  be  given 
more  definite  information  regarding  its  realization. 
Jesus  gently  rebuked  their  eagerness  as  inappropriate 
and  declared  such  tidings  to  be  unimportant.  Their 
work  was  clearly  defined  by  Him.  It  was  to  be  a  bearing 
of  witness  to  their  fellow  men  of  all  that  they  had  been 
privileged  to  know  and  see  and  comprehend.     For  this 


12 


Th&  Apostolic  Leaders 


service  He  and  they  knew  that  they  would  need  re- 
sourcefulness in  abundance.  This  He  told  them  they 
would  realize,  gaining  a  great  access  of  power,  wisdom 
and  self-conlidence,  when  the  Holy  Spirit  was  given  to 
them.  Until  it  was  given  they  should  not  leave  Jeru- 
salem. Already  they  had  given  evidence  of  earnest 
discipleship ;  they  had  expressed  their  consecration  in 
the  rite  oi  baptism ;  they  were  now  to  wait  for  the  bap- 
tism by  the  Holy  Spirit,  which  would  endue  them  with 
heavenly  power  for  the  adequate  performance  of  the 
vast  responsibilities  about  to  be  laid  upon  them.  After 
its  manifestation  they  were  to  go  forth  fearlessly  to 
disciple  all  nations,  remembering  that  their  Lord,  the 
source  of  all  authority  in  heaven  and  on  earth,  would  be 
with  them  until  the  consummation  of  their  hopes. 

It  was  a  stirring  program.  We  may  well  picture  the 
eagerness  and  absorption  with  which  the  little  circle,  af- 
ter their  return  to  the  seclusion  of  the  upper  chamber  in 

the  sacred  city  gave  them- 
selves by  way  of  prepara- 
tion to  unceasing  prayei 
and  consideration  of  the 
program  they  should  fol- 
low. One  item  in  the  work 
of  careful  preparation  was 
the  choice  of  an  apostle  to 
take  the  place  made  va- 
cant by  the  defection  of 
Judas.  They  were  im- 
pelled to  this  action  by 
a  desire  to  maintain  the 
representative  number  of 
their  circle  as  well  as  by 
the  urgent  need  of  the 
full  number  of  acknowl- 
That  witness-bearing  was  the  func- 
tion they  had  prominently  in  mind  is  suggested 
by    the     roqnirenionts     formnlnted     by     Peter     which 


The  Upper  Chamber. 

The  traditional  place  of  the  Last  Supper, 
and  of  the  cV-scoTit  of  the  Spirit  at  Peiitccoit 
(lee  cut  on  page  14). 

edged    leaders. 


Chapter  Jf.     The  Day  of  Pentecost.  13 

had  to  be  met.  How  many  of  the  larger  company 
were  eligible  is  not  mentioned.  So  thoroughly  do  the 
Gospels  center  attention  upon  the  Twelve  that  one  is 
apt  to  suppose  that  no  greater  number  attended  Jesus 
closely.  At  least  a  few  others,  however,  had  partici- 
pated in  the  experiences  of  discipleship  from  the  very 
beginning.  Matthias  was  quite  as  well  able  as  the 
Eleven  to  give  his  testimony  concerning  the  unique 
personality  and  life  of  Jesus. 

We  have  no  evidence  that  the  Twelve  were  unwilling 
to  recognize  the  leadership  of  others  than  themselves. 
James  the  Lord's  brother,  Barnabas,  and  Saul  of  Tar- 
sus were  eminent  examples  of  the  pre-eminence  which 
goes  by  heritage  and  by  natural  fitness.  They  were 
made  welcome  and  given  the  honor  which  was  their  due. 

The  Book  of  Acts,  like  other  historical  portions  of  the 
Bible,  seems  to  follow  a  personal  clue.  It  is  the  story 
of  the  triumphs  of  the  Gospel  as  preached  by  Peter  and 
John  and  by  Paul.  It  may  be  analyzed  geographically 
as  the  story  of  the  widening  influence  of  the  early 
Christian  Church  from  Jerusalem  to  Samaria,  to 
Caesarea,  to  Antioch,  to  Asia  Minor,  to  Macedonia,  to 
Greece,  and  finally  to  distant  Kome  herself.  Probably 
that  analysis  is  most  satisfactory  which  m.akes  the  aim 
of  Luke  the  telling  of  Paul's  share  in  making  Christ 
known  to  the  world.  To  the  author  of  the  book,  with  his 
broad  sympathies,  the  most  glorious  fact  regarding 
Christianity  was  its  extension  beyond  the  walls  of 
Jerusalem  or  the  borders  of  Palestine,  and  its  welcome  to 
every  human  being  without  distinction  of  race.  For  this 
broadening  it  was  chiefly  indebted  to  Paul.  With  great 
skill  Luke  marshalled  his  facts,  portraying  first  the 
establishment  of  the  church  at  Jerusalem,  its  'success,  the 
boldness  of  its  leaders  and  the  consequent  persecution; 
then,  indicating  the  fourfold  outcome  of  this  persecu- 
tion, the  conversion  of  Saul,  the  'scattering  of  believers, 
v'ho  became  self-appointed  evangelists,  far  and  wide,  the 
founding  of  a  church  at  Antioch,  and  the  enlightening  of 
Peter;  then  following  with  faithfulness  the  history  of 


14 


Th^  Apcetolic  Leaders 


the  evangelization  for  which  Saul  was  commissioned  by 
the  Antioch  church.  Until  Saul  accepted  this  commis- 
sion, Peter,  John  and  James  were  the  three  acknowl- 
edged leaders  of  the  Church ;  within  two  years  the  young 
evangelist  had  won  an  ungrudging  admittance  of  his 
unquestionable  mission  to  the  cultured  Greeks  of  Asia 
and  Europe.  Within  five  years  he  had  become  the  fore- 
most figure  in  the  Church,  alike  beloved  and  hated  as  few 
others  could  be. 

The  starting-point  of  this  thrilling  story  of  the  his- 
tory of  Christianity  was  the  outpouring  of  the  Spirit 
on  the  day  of  Pentecost.     Expectant  as  the  disciples 


Toml^  of  David. 

The  room  shown  ai  the  cenaculum  or  "  upper  chamber  "  is  in  this 
building  at  the  point  marked  X  (see  cut  on  page  12). 

were,  their  forecasts  were  vague.  It  is  not  likely  that 
they  realized  how  great  a  task  lay  before  them.  They 
had  no  idea  of  abandoning  Judaism,  but  cherished  the 
hope  of  making  every  Jew  a  believer  in  Jesus  as  the 
promised  Messiah.  To  them  on  the  day  of  pentecost 
came  a  signal  and  unmistakable  token  of  a  divine  com- 
mission. It  gave  them  a  sense  of  power  akin  to  that 
felt  by  their  Master  after  His  baptismal  vision.  The 
form  of  expression  which  this  experience  took  was  sur- 
prising alike  to  them  and  to  those  who  saw  them  on  that 


Chapter  Jf.     The  Day  of  Fcniecod  Id 

day.  No  one  can  satisfactorily  explain  the  "speaking 
with  other  tongues."  !No  one,  however,  can  possibly 
deny  that  on  that  **great  and  notable"  day  a  new  factor 
was  introduced  into  the  religious  life  of  the  followers  of 
Jesus.  The  gift  they  received  was  one  of  which  the 
"speaking"  was  but  a  symptom. 

Peter's  splendid  address,  of  which  the  words  quoted 
in  the  second  chapter  of  Acts  are  only  an  abstract,  re- 
veals his  power  of  leadership.  Explaining  the  phe- 
nomena of  the  day  as  a  fulfilment  of  familiar  prophetic 
expectation,  he  declared  that  Jesus  of  Nazareth,  whose 
character  they  had  known,  had  been  raised  from  the  dead 
after  His  crucifixion,  as  the  Psalmist  had  declared  would 
be  the  case,  and  as  His  disciples  were  prepared  to  testify. 
This  Jesus  by  the  gift  of  the  Holy  Spirit  was  now 
revealed  as  the  divine  Messiah. 

The  day  of  Pentecost  was  not  the  date  when  the  Spirit 
of  God  was  first  manifested  to  the  world.  Yet  on  that 
day  the  era  of  the  Holy  Spirit  may  be  said  to  have 
begun.  Jesus  had  said  that  He  must  depart  in  order 
that  the  Helper  should  come  to  His  disciples  to  aid  them 
in  dealing  with  a  world  of  moral  beings.  Since  Pente- 
cost His  disciples  have  been  able  to  definitely  realize  the 
presence  and  help  of  the  Spirit  of  God  and  to  expect  it  as 
a  factor  in  their  every-day  lives. 

The  most  glorious  aspect  of  this  era  of  the  Spirit  is 
its  universality.  The  history  of  the  Church  quickly 
nave  evidence  that  any  one  could  receive  spiritual 
];lessings. 


10  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

Chapter  5.    The  First  rianifestatioii  of  Friendly  Power. 
Acts  ch.  3.    About  A.  D.  31. 

The  effect  produced  -upon  those  who  listened  to  the 
impassioned  yet  powerful  appeal  of  Peter  on  the  day 
of  Pentecost  was  truly  remarkable.  We  need  not  explain 
their  yielding  to  his  exhortation  as  a  miracle.  To  a  cer- 
tain extent  many  of  them  may  have  been  prepared  for 
just  such  a  crisis.  They  had  known  of  Jesus;  they  had 
witnessed  the  loving-kindness  and  the  truth  of  His  life 
among  men ;  their  sober  thought  was  in  His  favor.  When 
the  apostle,  Spirit-filled  like  his  Master,  drove  home  to 
their  consciousness  the  significance  of  His  life  and  death 
and  resurrection,  they  were  immediately  convinced  that 
he  spoke  words  of  soberness  and  truth,  and  responded  to 
his  appeal  for  repentance  and  baptism.  The  number 
of  those  who  were  thus  responsive  was  very  great. 

They  formed  a  marked  body,  distinguished  as  enthusi- 
astic disciples,  filled  with  the  spirit  of  fellowship,  hold- 
ing regularly  a  service  which  commemorated  their  Lord, 
and  engaging  constantly  in  prayer.  They  were  faithful 
to  the  routine  of  Judaism,  too,  and  seemed  to  be  held  in 
favor  by  all  classes.  The  rulers  did  not  fear  them  and 
had  no  desire  to  give  them  trouble.  The  Judaism  of  that 
day  was  very  tolerant  of  the  personal  opinions  of  those 
who  outwardly  respected  the  usages  and  rules  of  the  Jew- 
ish religion.  There  were  in  Jerusalem  numerous  syna- 
gogues maintained  by  men  who  had  some  specific  article 
of  faith  or  peculiarity  of  birth  which  led  them  to  wish  to 
assemble  together  (Acts  6:9).  The  early  Church 
may  have  been  regarded  as  forming  only  one  more  of 
these  permissible  gatherings.  Its  oneness  of  spirit,  its 
fratemalism,  its  splendid  generosity,  its  devotedness  in 
all  matters  of  religious  activity,  the  happiness  which 
characterized  its  members  and  the  lofty  character  of 
their  ideals  gave  it  favor  among  those  whose  judo^nent 
was  of  value,  and  were  potent  to  attract  a  steady  addition 
of  members. 

How  long  this  idyllic  state  continued  we  have  no 
means  of  determining.     Some  time  may  have  passed 


Chapter  d.     Apostolic  Power  Manifested        17 


before  the  incident  occurred  which  embroiled  them  with 
the  authorities.  We  may  well  suppose  that  the  instruc- 
tion of  the  large  addition  to  their  number  would  for  a 
long  period  have  taxed  the  energies  of  the  apostles  and 
their  immediate  circle  of  matured  believers.  Such  won- 
derful experiences  as  came  to  them  might  have  been 
confined  to  the  circle  of  sympathizers,  and  occasioned 
no  remark  or  objection. 

One  day,  however,  the  two  leaders  of  the  church, 
Peter  and  John,  were  about  to  enter  the  temple  to  join 
with  the  great  throng  of  worshipers  in  the  afternoon 
service  of  prayer  and  sacrifice.  Like  many  other  devout 
Jews,  they  loved  to  witness  the  beautiful  symbolism  of 
this  uplifting  service,  and  to  give  both  silent  and  open 
expression  to  the  thoughts  of  reverence,  praise  and  grat- 
itude which  filled  their  hearts.  The  great  majority  of 
the  Christians  were  probably  present  at  that  time. 

The  two  apostles  were  passing  from  the  great  outer 
court  of  the  temple  through  the  magnificent  entrance 
which  was  fittingly  termed  the  'beautiful  Gate''  into 
the  inner  courts,  when  a 
poor  cripple  of  middle 
age,  placed  daily  on  the 
steps  of  the  ascent  that 
he  might  solicit  alms 
from  those  who  were 
benevolent,  besought  them 
to  help  him.  Something 
about  the  man  or  in  his 
eager  gaze  aroused  the 
responding  sympathy  of 
Peter.  To  be  thus  solic- 
ited was  surely  no  nov- 
elty, since  it  had  long 
been  customary  for  beg- 
gars to  make  this  en- 
trance their  place  of  re- 
sort. The  beggar  may 
at    a    time    when 


The  Beautiful  Gate,  Restored. 


have     made     his     appeal 
Peter  was    prepared    to    deal    more 


18  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

aggressively  with  the  people  at  large  than  before,  or  he 
may  have  shown  an  expectancy  which  was  based  on  the 
habit  of  goodness  on  the  part  of  these  apostles.  At  all 
events  Peter  took  a  quick  resolution.  Looking  at  the 
cripple  with  a  piercing  gaze  which  conveyed  decision  and 
encouragement,  he  bade  him  give  attention,  promised 
him  healing  in  the  name  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Nazareth, 
and  lifted  him  to  his  feet.  To  the  cripple's  unbounded 
wonder  and  delight,  he  could  both  stand  alone  and  walk. 
Accompanying  the  apostles  he  attended  the  solemn 
service  in  the  manner  of  other  men  for  the  first  time  in 
his  life.  Like  an  Oriental,  he  could  not  refrain  from 
extravagant  demonstrations  of  joy.  Being  so  well 
known  to  all  who  were  wont  to  enter  the  temple,  he  was 
readily  identified  as  the  long-time  cripple,  and  his 
evident  healing  made  a  profound  impression  upon  all  the 
people. 

The  service  over,  he  would  not  let  his  new-found 
friends  escape.  The  throng,  desiring  to  have  the  mar- 
vel explained,  gathered,  as  usual,  in  the  portico  known  as 
Solomon's,  whioh  extended  along  the  inner  side  of  the 
eastern  wall  of  the  temple  area,  the  popular  forum  in 
Jerusalem.  Here  Peter  addressed  them  at  length  in  a 
discourse  of  wliich  we  have  an  abstract  in  Acts  3 :  12-26. 
Denying  that  he  or  his  companion  were  able  to  achieve 
this  "work  of  healing,  he  declared  that  the  God  of  their 
fathers  through  the  power  of  Jesus,  the  Holy  and 
Riffh toons  One,  wickedly  crucified  by  the  people,  but 
raised  frnin  the  dend  and  glorified,  had  wrought  the 
cure.  Since  they  acted  ijmorantly,  and  inasmuch  as 
this  experience  was  needful  for  Him  who  was  to  become 
the  Saviour  of  men,  they  could  by  repentance  and  obedi- 
ence obtain  full  forgiveness  and  hasten  the  Messiah's 
reappearance.  Jesus  had  been  that  Prophet  who  was  to 
instrnct  the  people.  Fatal  indeed  would  be  the  ignor- 
ing of  His  words.  As  men  of  Israel  and  heirs  of  the 
promise  given  to  Abraham,  it  was  fitting  that  they 
should  he  foremost  to  accept  God's  Messenger,  the  long- 
expected  Messiah,  and  to  give  Him  obedience. 


Chapter  5.    Apostolic  Power  Manifested        W 

These  were  bold  words  and  of  great  significance. 
They  aflBrmed  in  unequivocal  terms  the  Messiahship  of 
Jesus  of  Nazareth  and  his  continuing  Lordship,  as 
proven  by  His  resurrection  from  the  dead.  To  give  them 
utterance  called  for  great  courage  and  clear-headedness. 
Nothing  could  give  stronger  testimony  to  the  change 
which  had  been  already  wrought  in  Peter. 

How  interesting  an  illustration  this  narrative  affords 
of  the  value  of  the  co-operation  of  good  people !  Taken 
singly  they  have  small  chance  to  forward  the  ideals  which 
they  approve.  United  they  command  any  situation  and 
may  uphold  their  principles  with  success.  The  imity  of 
the  early  Church  was  one  secret  of  its  power. 

The  other  cause  of  its  a^^essive  power  was  its  loy- 
alty to  Christ.  He  seemed  very  real  and  near  to  every 
Christian,  therefore  they  had  confidence  and  courage. 
The  nearer  the  Church  of  any  age  can  keep  to  Him,  the 
more  assured  its  power. 


20  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

Chapter  6.    The  Boldness  of  Peter  and  John,    Acts  4  :  !• 
31.    A.  O.  31. 

The  bold  and  definite  words  of  Peter,  who  did  not 
hesitate  to  denoviiice  the  people  to  their  face  as  mur- 
derers of  Jesus,  came  to  the  ears  of  those  in  control  of 
the  temple.  Perhaps  they  would  have  overlooked  his 
utterances  with  that  tolerance  born  of  entire  confi- 
dence in  their  own  strength  which  was  characteristic  of 
the  official  Jew  in  dealing  with  his  excitable  countrymen, 
but  he  had  definitely  declared  that  Jesus  had  risen  from 
the  dead.  That  this  abhorred  belief  should  be  spread 
abroad  from  their  own  precincts  was  too  much  for  the 
Sadducean  priests.  They  sent  the  temple  officer  and  his 
soldiers  to  arrest  the  bold  speakers  and  place  them  in 
detention  for  the  morrow.  It  was  too  late  to  spoil  the 
effect  of  Peter's  stirring  address.  Many  more  enrolled 
themselves  among  the  number  of  acknowledged 
believers. 

We  can  only  conjecture  the  feelings  of  the  two  im- 
prisoned men  that  night,  liable  to  cruel  punishment  on 
the  following  morning.  To  be  under  the  ban  of  the 
haughty  hierarchy  was  no  trifling  matter.  It  might 
mean  continued  confinement  or  severe  scourging  or  any 
other  discipline  which  these  arrogant  rulers  might 
devise.  Yet  we  may  be  sure  that  their  courage  was 
undaunted  and  their  purpose  unchanged.  Heretofore 
their  work  had  gone  on  unchallenged  by  the  authorities. 
Now  they  were  certain  of  an  examination,  perhaps  of 
a  condemnation.  From  Peter's  words  we  can  infer  that 
their  thoughts  were  not  so  much  on  such  consequences 
as  on  the  notable  opportunity  of  witnessino:  which  they 
would  have  in  the  presence  of  the  Sanhedrin. 

Two  men  brought  up  as  they  had  been  might  well 
stand  in  awe  of  the  council  and  dread  its  displeasure. 
From  infancy  they  had  been  trained  to  regard  it  as  the 
arbiter  of  Israel's  acts  and  to  honor  its  members  as 
worthy  of  supreme  reverence.  But  their  companion- 
ship with  Jesus  had  been  an  additional  training  in  the 
art  of  judging  men.     He  had  been  so  unmoved  by  mere 


Clm'pieT  G.     The  Boldness  of  Peter  and  John     21 


display,  so  ready  to  make  a  stand  against  unrighteous- 
ness, even  when  veiled  in  dignity  or  protected  by  usage, 
so  straightforward  in  estimating  every  man  of  what- 
ever degree  on  the  basis  of  his  actual  merit  or  useful- 
ness, that  other  considerations  ceased  to  have  power  to 
blind  His  disciples  to  the  real  truth.  They  were  able 
to  face  men  as  men,  frankly  and  fearlessly,  because  in 
addition  to  this  candor  and  keenness  of  judgment  they 
possessed  a  supreme  confidence  in  the  protection  of  God 
and  the  leadership  of  the  risen  Christ.  The  assurance 
of  faith  was  never  more  clear  and  strong  than  to  these 
prisoners  awaiting  trial. 

The  tribunal  before  which  they  came  was  indeed  an 
august  and  imposing  one.  Composed  of  men  of  dig- 
nity and  repute,  ac- 
c  u  s  t  0  m  e  d  to  a 
proud  self-valua- 
tion, it  would  be  in 
no  mood  to  brook 
resistance.  It  in- 
cluded the  men  of 
greatest  fame  and 
widest  influence  in 
the  nation.  It  had 
supreme  jurisdic- 
tion over  civil  and 
religious  questions 
in  Judea.  No  doubt 
i  t  contemplated 
little  trouble  in  dealing  with  these  men  who  had  given 
rise  to  such  a  disturbance. 

But  it  was  dealing  with  men  who  were  far  from  ordi- 
nary. The  skill  exhibited  by  Peter  in  meeting  the  situa- 
tion was  a  great  surprise  to  them.  The  apostle  laid  stress 
upon  the  undisputed  benefit  which  had  been  rendered  to 
the  man  so  long  known  as  a  cripple,  and  forced  the 
Sanhedrin  to  recognize  it  as  such.  He  did  not  hesitate, 
moreover,  to  declare  with  boldness  that  the  cure  was  due 
to  the  power  of  Jesus  of  Nazareth,  despised  and  cruci- 


CopyrigM,  1896,  by  J.  J.  Thsot. 

Annas  and  Caiaplias. 


22  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

fied  by  them,  but  raised  from  the  dead  by  God  and 
given  pre-eminence  as  the  expected  Messiah,  through 
whom,  and  through  whom  only,  would  there  be  sal- 
vation. 

These  were  strange  words  for  the  ears  of  the  haughty 
rulers.  Regarding  Peter  and  John  attentively,  they 
saw  that  these  were  men  who  made  no  pretence  of  being 
trained  scholars,  yet  were  men  of  power  and  skill  and 
insight.  Only  their  intimacy  with  Jesus  explained  the 
wonder,  but  it  was  adequate.  The  authorities  felt 
themselves  blocked  in  their  intention  of  punishment  by 
the  embarrassing  fact  that  the  former  cripple  was  now 
a  well  man.  To  penalize  such  a  meritorious  deliver- 
ance was  to  arouse  against  themselves  all  right  think- 
ing men.  So  they  chose  to  try  that  last  refuge  of  baffled 
tyrants, — bluster  and  browbeating.  They  strictly  for- 
bade the  apostles  to  speak  or  to  teach  in  the  name  of 
Jesus,  claiming  that  lie  was  still  a  factor  in  the  lives 
of  men. 

Had  the  two  men  gone  forth  silently,  accepting  their 
discharge  and  rejoicing  in  their  freedom,  no  one  would 
have  had  a  word  of  blame  for  them.  But  they  took  a 
braver  course  in  firmly  declaring  that  they  must  con- 
tinue to  bear  testimony  concerning  the  momentous  facts 
of  which  they  were  eye-witnesses.  At  all  hazards  they 
would  clearly  and  honorably  maintain  this  right.  We 
cannot  suppose  that  this  straightforward  declaration 
was  satisfactory  to  the  members  of  the  Sanhedrin,  but 
they  did  not  dare  to  oppose  the  mood  of  the  people 
which  was  highly  favorable  toward  the  men  who  had 
done  so  notable  a  deed. 

Freed  from  all  restraint,  Peter  and  John  joined  the 
company  of  believers  at  their  usual  rendezvous  and 
reported  all  that  had  taken  place.  The  renewed  courage 
and  increased  enthusiasm  of  all  were  voiced  in  a  prayer 
which  is  a  model  of  pointedness  and  appeal.  It 
ascribed  to  God  all  power  as  the  Creator  and  Preserver 
of  the  universe,  quoted  the  second  Psalm  as  being  ex- 
pressive of  the  conditions  prevailing  at  Jerusalem  under 


Chapter  6.     The  Boldness  of  Peter  and  John     23 

the  rule  of  Herod  and  Pilate  and  the  Sanhedrin,  and 
appealed  for  a  new  enduement  of  strength  and  courage 
to  witness,  and  for  a  continuance  of  the  gracious  man- 
ifestation of  healing  power.  It  forgot  all  but  the 
opportunity  and  plead  for  success  in  meeting  it.  No 
wonder  that  the  petition  was  answered  by  a  new  sense 
of  the  presence  and  power  of  the  Holy  Spirit. 

This  experience  of  Peter  and  John  may  not  have  been 
the  only  one  of  its  kind,  but  it  was  probably  the  most 
representative  one.  It  was  important  both  because  of 
the  confidence  which  the  disciples  gained  in  themselves 
and  in  that  for  which  they  stood,  and  because  the  San- 
hedrin discovered  that  the  "superstition"  regarding 
Jesus  had  by  no  means  lost  its  hold.  It  gave  the  new 
movement  a  prominence  it  had  not  sought,  but  which 
was  not  wholly  unprofitable. 

What  changed  these  people  so  completely  was  their 
developing  confidence  in  God.  This  transformed  a 
halting  Peter  into  a  calmly  courageous  one,  a  timid 
gathering  into  one  which  prayed  for  courage  to  keep 
on  witnessing.  Such  reliance  is  the  secret  of  all  true 
progress  and  of  all  serene  firmness. 

That  the  two  apostles  had  *^een  with  Jesus"  readily 
balanced  all  disqualifications  for  dealing  with  the  San- 
hedrin. To  imitate  His  spirit,  to  adopt  His  ideals,  and 
to  view  life  from  His  standpoint  fits  one  for  any 
experience, 


24  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

Chapter  7.    The  Unity  and   Constancy   of   the  Church. 
Acts  4  X  32—5 :  42.    Between  A.  D.  32  and  34. 

The  fortunate  outcome  of  the  encounter  with  the 
Sanhedrin  gave  a  real  impulse  to  the  life  of  the  little 
community  of  believers.  More  than  ever  they  exhibited 
a  unity  of  spirit  which  was  truly  remarkable.  Their 
feeling  of  brotherhood  was  so  keen  that  each  one  who 
had  means  treated  his  possessions  as  if  they  belonged  to 
all.  Many  went  so  far  as  to  dispose  of  their  lands  or 
houses  and  to  bring  the  price  secured  for  these  as  an 
offering  to  God  to  be  distributed  freely  by  the  apostles 
to  all  who  had  need. 

While  the  church  was  but  a  congregation  or  a  com- 
munity in  which  the  apostles  were  the  recognized  lead- 
ers and  the  circumstances  of  each  member  were  well 
known,  this  kind  of  self-sacrifice  and  enthusiasm  was 
not  without  its  advantages.  It  served  to  knit  the  whole 
body  of  believers  together.  Moreover,  it  enabled  the 
pooler  members  of  the  brotherhood  to  receive  aid 
without  putting  them  under  personal  obligation.  Yet 
the  apostles  must  have  chiefly  valued  it  as  the  manifes- 
tation of  a  splendid  Christlike  generosity  and  brotherli- 
ness,  befitting  those  who  professed  to  be  following  close 
after  Jesus. 

A  notable  instance  of  the  exhibition  of  this  grace 
of  brotherly  generosity  in  its  finest  form  was  that 
of  Barnabas,  a  native  of  Cyprus,  a  natural  leader  of 
men,  a  man  of  fine  qualities  and  noble  personality.  He 
felt  deeply  the  prevailing  tone  of  sentiment  and  with 
genuine  consecration  brought  to  the  apostles  the  pro- 
ceeds of  the  sale  of  a  portion  of  his  property. 

The  commendation,  naturally  and  unhesitatingly 
given  to  Barnabas  and  to  others  for  their  thoughtful 
and  yet  royal  generosity,  aroused  the  env>'  of  others  of 
less  thorough  consecration,  who  coveted  the  honor  and 
the  recognition  given  these  without  being  willing  to 
make  the  sacrifice  they  entailed.  A  man  named  Ananias 
and  his  wife  Sapphira  determined  to  sell  some  property 


Chapter  7.     Unity  and  Constancy  of  the  Church  25 

and  pretend  to  bring  to  the  apostles  the  whole  of  the 
proceeds,  secretly  retaining  a  portion  themselves.  They 
thought  thereby  to  cheat  the  apostles  and  the  com- 
munity, but  they  were  really  trying  to  deceive  God.  No 
doubt  the  manifestation  of  the  presence  of  the  Holy 
Spirit  had  been  particularly  marked  in  the  case  of  those 
who  had  shown  this  Christlike  virtue.  Moreover  the 
apostles  had  received  the  money  not  merely  on  behalf 
of  the  brethren  but  in  the  name  of  the  risen  Christ. 
The  suddenness  and  severity  of  the  punishment  of  the 
guilty  couple  not  only  revealed  the  determination  to 
enforce  the  sanctity  of  the  relations  between  God  and 
the  church  but  the  peculiar  meanness  of  their  sin.  It 
was  a  warning  that  liars  and  hypocrites  had  no  place  in 
the  new  community. 

The  result  of  this  judgment  was  a  strong  impulse  to 
the  church.  Men  and  women  of  the  right  sort  were 
continually  being  added  to  it,  until  its  strength  was 
apparent  to  all  observers. 

The  Sanhedrin  had  gradually  become  infuriated  by 
this  rapid  development  of  the  new  community.  They 
could  not  readily  find  occasion  for  dealing  drastically 
with  it,  since  each  member  was  a  devout  Jew,  faithful 
to  all  his  obligations  and  perhaps  unusually  faithful  to 
tlie  duties  of  public  worship  for  one  of  his  station  in  life. 
Not  until  the  name  of  Jesus  was  being  heralded 
throughout  the  city  and  country  did  the  council  try  to 
force  an  issue  with  the  apostolic  leaders. 

At  the  meeting  of  the  council,  made  more  momen- 
tous and  perplexing  by  the  strange  deliverance  from 
prison  of  those  who  had  been  shut  in  the  day  before,  and 
by  the  steadfast  refusal  of  any  of  the  leaders  to  obey 
the  strict  commands  of  the  council,  the  high  priest  made 
a  threefold  charge  that  they  had  been  disobedient  to  the 
Sanhedrin,  had  been  active  in  propagating  what  they 
had  been  ordered  to  cease  from  teaching,  and  were  seek- 
ing to  make  the  populace  believe  that  the  members  of 
the  council  were  responsible  for  the  death  of  Jesus. 

In  reply  Peter  simply  stated  that  he  and  his  fellows 


26  TJu  Apostolic  Leaders 

mtiBt  follow  their  consciences.  They  could  not  desist 
from  a  work  to  which  they  believed  that  God  had  called 
them  at  the  mere  command  of  men,  however  venerable 
and  worthy.  This  was  a  principle  which  no  Jew  would 
dispute.  God's  will,  once  clearly  made  known,  was  at 
all  costs  to  be  obeyed. 

But  Peter  went  on  to  justify  the  assumption  of  the 
disciples  that  they  were  truly  grasping  and  following 
the  will  of  God.  The  council  had  condemned  Jesus  to 
die  a  shameful  death  which  would  under  ordinary  cir- 
cumstances have  ended  His  career  ignobly  and  irrepara- 
bly, as  one  under  the  curse  of  God.  But  instead  God 
had  glorified  this  Jesus  and  exalted  Him,  attesting  His 
divine  personality  and  proving  Him  to  have  been  the 
Messianic  Saviour  of  men,  as  He  claimed  to  be.  Of  this 
wonderful  fact,  so  full  of  interest  and  value  to  all  Israel, 
the  disciples  were  witnesses.  But  further  evidence  of 
it  was  seen  in  the  spiritual  manifestations  which  the 
risen  and  ascended  Lord  had  vouchsafed  to  the  whole 
body  of  believers.  The  duty  of  the  apostles  clearly  was 
to  continue  to  exercise  the  glad  privilege  of  witness- 
bearing,  whatever  the  consequences  to  themselves. 

Little  wonder  that  the  council  was  enraged  at  these 
words  to  the  pitch  of  murder.  But  Gamaliel,  the 
revered  and  learned  Pharisee,  had  wiser  counsel.  Its 
character  proves  little  concerning  his  sympathies.  He 
advised  that  the  movement  be  unrestrained.  If  born 
of  human  energy  alone  it  would  come  quickly  to  destruc- 
tion as  its  predecessors  had  done ;  if  really  set  on  foot  by 
God,  to  oppose  it  would  be  not  only  dangerous  but 
foolish.  His  advice  was  taken,  the  apostles  scourged, 
ordered  to  cease  from  preaching,  and  dismissed.  They 
went  home  rejoicing  that  they  had  been  able  to  endure 
the  trial,  and  threw  themseivcs  with  renewed  energ}' 
and  resolution  into  the  work. 

True  courage  roots  itself  in  a  clear  conscience.  None 
are  so  brave  as  they  who  truly  serve  and  genuinely  love ; 
none  so  impotent  and  useless  for  the  really  great 
achievements  of  life  as  they  who  pretend  to  be  what  they 


Chapter  8.     The  Martyrdom  of  Stephen         27 

are  not  conscious  of  being.  A  Peter  or  a  Barnabas 
stirs  men's  souls  and  quickens  their  sympathies.  A 
Caiaphas  or  an  Ananias  blights  all  aspiration. 


Chapter  8.    The  riartyrdom  of  Stephen.    Acts  chs,  6,7, 
About  A.  D.  34. 

The  renewed  vigor  with  which  the  apostles  preached 
and  taught  had  its  effect  in  the  steady  growth  of  the 
body  of  disciples.  Their  number  made  it  very  difficult 
for  the  apostles  to  keep  track  of  cases  of  individual 
need.  Complaints  were  made  by  Greek  speaking  Jews, 
numbered  among  the  body  of  believers,  that  their  needy 
ones  were  often  overlooked  in  the  daily  ministration  to 
those  who  were  afflicted  in  any  way.  This  charge  can 
have  had  no  serious  foundation,  since  this  service  to  the 
poor  was  still  in  the  hands  of  the  apostles,  who  could 
hardly  be  accused  of  favoritism.  The  mistakes  arose 
because  the  Twelve  were  overburdened  by  their  varied 
responsibilities. 

Their  sensible  suggestion  regarding  the  best  remedy 
to  apply  has  helped  to  solve  many  a  problem  in  the  life 
of  the  Christian  church.  They  had  a  duty  which  was 
likewise  a  great  opportunity.  They  needed  to  give  their 
whole  time  and  strength  to  the  work  of  witnessing  to  the 
eager  people  concerning  the  things  of  God.  It  was 
neither  needful  nor  fitting  that  they  should  consume 
that  energy  in  the  work  of  hunting  up  poor  women  and 
ministering  to  their  needs,  when  among  the  body  of 
believers  were  an  abundance  of  men  well  qualified  to 
perform  duties  of  this  sort  and  even  to  assume  a  sort  of 
leadership  in  matters  of  minor  interest  affecting  tlie 
welfare  of  all. 

Their  proposition  that  a  board  of  seven  representative 
men  should  ])e  entrusted  witli  the  administration  of  the 


28  The  ApoatoUc  Leaders 

charitable  relief  pleased  the  community  of  believers.  At 
once  the  recommended  action  was  taken.  These  men 
were  selected  because  of  their  unblemished  repute,  spir- 
ituality and  sound  sense.  The  apostles  established  their 
official  standing  by  formally  setting  them  apart  for 
their  responsibilities.  They  were  evidently  to  have  the 
right  to  do  their  best  as  associates  of  the  apostles  in  the 
leadership  and  guidance  of  the  whole  community.  Their 
names  are  Greek  names,  yet  some  of  them  may  well 
have  been  Jews  of  Palestinian  birth.  Doubtless  the  selec- 
tion was  made  under  apostolic  influence  on  the  basis  of 
spiritual  and  mental  qualifications  rather  than  on  racial 
lines.  It  seems  to  indicate  the  prevalence  on  the  whole 
of  genuine  brotherliness  in  a  community  in  which  the 
natives  of  Palestine  probably  far  outnumbered  those  of 
foreign  birth. 

This  step  was  one  of  great  importance  to  the  infant 
church,  not  alone  because  it  was  a  first  step  in  organiza- 
tion, but  likewise  a  recognition  of  the  rights  of  the  laity 
in  leadership.  The  Seven,  as  'subsequent  events  indi- 
cate, were  not  mere  almoners  of  charity  but  genuine 
leaders  of  their  fellows,  accorded  adequate  respect  and 
ready  obedience. 

Two  significant  results  followed  hard  upon  this 
action.  There  was  a  marked  increase  in  the  impetus 
given  to  the  spread  of  the  Gospel,  many  even  of  the 
priests  in  this  priest-ridden  city  declaring  their  adher- 
ence to  the  faith;  and  Stephen,  the  foremost  of  the 
Seven  in  personal  gifts  and  spiritual  power,  began  to 
acquire  a  widespread  reputation  as  an  effective  associ- 
ate of  the  apostles.  He  was  altogether  a  different  sort 
of  man,  with  ideas  less  cramped  by  the  teachings  of  the 
Palestinian  rabbis.  Full  of  enthusiasm  and  devotion 
he  gave  himself  heart  and  soul  to  the  exposition  of  the 
truth  regarding  Jesus.  As  he  studied  His  life  and 
teachings  he  readily  grasped  their  universal  values,  and 
their  certain  setting  aside  of  many  of  the  current  cus- 
toms and  ideas  of  Judaism.  It  may  be  doubted  whether 
he  implied  by  any  words  of  his  any  disrespect  for  the 


Chapter  S.     The  Martyrdom  of  Stephen         29 


temple  or  for  the  law.  Rather  like  one  of  the  ancient 
prophets  he  asserted  God's  privilege  to  reform  or 
punish.  He  was  ready  to  defend  his  views  before 
his  earlier  associates  and  did  so  with  such  success  that 
they  could  only  seek  to  silence  him  by  demanding  his 
arrest  and  punishment.  He  was  seized,  brought  before 
the  council  and  made  to  plead. 

The  address  that  follows  in  the  book  of  Acts  is  a 
truly  notable  one.  It  bears  all  the  marks  of  authen- 
ticity and  reasonable  accuracy.  It  is  "a  prophetical 
philosophy  of  Israel's  religious  history."  He  begins  by 
referring  to  the  promises  given  to  Abraham,  to  his  set- 
tlement in  Canaan,  to  the  covenant,  to  the  descent  into 
Egypt  and  the  deliverance  through  Moses,  noting  the 
unwillingness  of  the  people  to  believe  or  follow  Moses  or 
to  adopt  the  institutions  which  he  introduced.  Finally 
under  Solomon  the  temple  was  erected,  yet,  as  Isaiah 
declared,  God  was  in  no  sense  confined  to  it  or  by  it.  It 
was  merely  His  creation.  By  their  stupid  persistency  in 
making  the  temple  of  more  importance  than  God,  they 
were  but  exhibiting 
in  another  form  the 
peverseness  which 
had  all  along  marked 
their  fathers,  and 
were  thereby  resist- 
ing the  Holy  Spirit. 
N'ot  he  but  they 
were    breaking"    the 


aw. 


They  suffered  him 
to  say  no  more. 
Furious  with  anger,         St.  Stephen»8  Gate,  in  Jerusalem. 

wholly  beside  themselves  in  their  rage,  stung  to  the 
quick  by  the  forceful  and  pointed  criticism,  they 
threatened  him  with  death.  Unmoved  by  their 
clamor,  absorbed  by  the  vision  that  rose  before  his 
eyes,  he  spoke  of  "seeing  in  the  heavens  the  glori- 
fied Jesus  in  His  majesty.     This  was  blasphemy  in- 


30  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

deed  in  their  opinion,  and  they  hurried  him  to  a  shame- 
ful death  by  stoning.  Probably  it  was  an  irregular  pro- 
cedure from  the  Koman  point  of  view,  although  justi- 
fied under  Jewish  law  in  the  case  of  one  convicted  of 
blasphemy. 

The  refusal  of  the  apostles  to  spend  their  time  in  dis- 
pensing charity  was  based  upon  an  important  and  eter- 
nal principle — the  necessity  of  giving  one's  energies  to 
the  noblest  service  within  his  range  of  influence.  Inci- 
dentally it  opened  careers  without  number  of  generous 
and  thoughtful  philanthropy  unto  consecrated  men 
and  women.  The  career  of  Stephen  was  very  brief ;  but 
like  Mart3m,  Keith-Falconer  and  Pitkin,  he  used  hie 
opportunity  for  all  that  it  was  worth,  and  did  the  work 
of  years  in  one  heroic  representative  act.  No  one  needs 
time  for  his  work  so  much  as  opportunity  and  fidelity. 


Chapter    9.  — The    Successful     Evangelism    of     Philip. 
Acts  ch.  8.    About  A.  D.  34, 

The  day  of  Stephen's  martyrdom  had  been  mo- 
mentous for  the  church.  He  had  helped  many  to  find 
themselves,  and  to  realize  what  belief  in  Jesus  really 
meant.  He  also  forced  the  church  to  declare 
itself,  and  directed  suspicion  against  it.  The  com- 
munity was  now  more  than  an  annoying  83magogue 
or  sect;  it  was  known  as  a  dangerous  set  of  men 
and  women.  Hence  with  great  promptness  a  bitter 
persecution  ensued  which  quickly  broke  up  the  com- 
munity and  scattered  its  members.  Among  those  who 
labored  zealously  to  destroy  its  vigor  was  the  young  man, 
Saul  of  Tarsus,  who  had  been  the  witness  at  Stephen's 
stoning.  He  was  relentless  and  persistent,  taking  the 
lead  among  those  who  hunted  down  men  and  women 
and  imprisoned  them.  There  ensued  an  orgy  of  cru- 
elty, supported  by  the  fanaticism  and  intolerance  of  the 


Chapter  9.     The  Evangelisni  of  Philip  31 

Pharisees,  and  justified  to  the  people  by  the  supposed 
necessity  of  rooting  out  the  pestilential  heresy  kid  bare 
by  Stephen. 

But  this  persecution  proved  to  be  a  blessing  in  dis- 
guise. It  forced  Christianity  into  its  proper  environ- 
ment and  outlook.  The  history  of  the  spreading  of  the 
gospel  at  Jerusalem  became  a  history  of  its  wider  ex- 
tension throughout  Palestine.  Douljtless  the  church 
had  begun  to  broaden  itself  before  this,  for  how  else 
would  Saul  (9:2)  have  found  disciples  at  Damascus? 
But  the  swift  dispersion  of  many  believers  from  Jeru- 
salem served  to  strengthen  greatly  such  little  groups 
of  disciples  as  had  been  formed  here  and  there  in  Pal- 
estine and  to  establish  many  new  centers. 

Luke  turns  to  the  work  of  Philip  and  others  in 
Samaria.  The  agents  of  the  Sanhedrin  were  without 
authority  or  influence  among  the  Samaritans,  with 
whom  all  strenuously  orthodox  Jews  were  at  feud.  The 
Samaritans  were  a  people  of  mixed  blood.  Their  re- 
ligious traditions  ran  parallel  to  those  of  the  Jews  and 
were  of  common  origin.  They  seemed  to  recognize 
some  form  of  the  Messianic  tradition  (Jo.  4:25)  and 
to  believe  in  Jesus  as,  at  least,  a  political  and  relig- 
ious renewer.  Consequently  a  Christian  preacher  in 
their  midst  had  a  working  base  for  appeal  and  instruc- 
tion. Philip  was,  however,  in  all  probability,  a  for- 
eign born  Jew,  since  no  Judean  would  have  found  it 
easy  to  come  into  friendly  contact  with  the  hated  Sa- 
maritans. But  under  any  circumstances  the  work  rep- 
resented a  breadth  of  sympathy  and  a  depth  of  convic- 
tion which  went  far  to  equip  the  evangelist  for  a  stir- 
ring and  successful  campaign.  How  he  came  to  select 
Samaria  as  the  scene  of  his  ministry  we  are  not  told. 
Evidently,  however,  the  people  were  ready  to  listen  to 
his  message.  They  were  eager  to  know  more  about  the 
Christ,  and  were  deeply  impressed  by  the  personality 
and  power  of  Philip,  who,  in  his  Master^s  name,  did 
mighty  works.  The  work  progressed  rapidly  and  large 
numbers  were  given  baptism  by  the  evangelist  to  the 
^reat  joy  of  all  who  shared  in  these  experiences. 


S2 


The  Apostolic  Leaders 


Word  concerning  this  unexpected  addition  to  the 
body  of  believers  was  sent  to  Jerusalem,  whence  the 
apostles  had  not  departed.  The  evidences  of  religions 
interest  were  unmistakable,  and  the  apostles  concluded 
to  investigate  the  movement.  They  sent  down  Peter 
and  John,  who  as  leaders  of  the  church  and  broad- 
minded  men  of  Galilean  origin,  were  able  to  judge  fair- 
ly concerning  the  sincerity  and  permanence  of  the  re- 
ligious interest.  These  apostles  noted  that  the  last 
tokens  of  full  acceptance  by  God  were  lacking.  None 
of  the  converts  had  manifested  the  possession  of  the 
Spirit.  So  they  invoked  the  blessing  of  God  and  laid 
their  hands  upon  those  who  gave  evidence  of  religious 
responsiveness,  and  rejoiced  to  note  that  the  Spirit 
came  upon  them  in  abundant  measure  just  as  upon 
those  who  had  professed  faith  in  Christ  at  Jerusalem. 
With  what  joy  must  they  have  seen  this  evidence  that 
the  prediction  of  their  Master  was  coming  true.  The 
witness  concerning  Him  was  being  accepted  beyond  the 
bounds  of  Judaea. 

Simon,  the  magician,  was  a  type  of  adventurer,  char- 


Herod's  Colornade,  in  Samaria. 

This  mapniflociit  coloimiKlc  of  marble  pillars  eighteen  foot  higli.  many  of  them  iiionoliih.', 
extended  on  both  sides  of  a  terrace  sixty  fret  wide  around  tiie  brow  of  the  hill  u!  Samaria,  a  dij- 
taucp  of  nearly  a  mile.  Over  seventy  of  these  columns  arc  Ntill  standing  and  mnny  others  lie 
half  burled  in  the  ground.  They  are  a  part  of  the  ruins  of  the  city  <>f  .Scba^te,  rebuilt  by 
Ilerod  the  Great. 

acteristic  of  those  days  of  religious  ferment.  He  may 
liave  been  self-deceived  to  some  extent;  but  had  passed 
among  the  credulous  people  as  a  great  man,  and  prob- 
ably had   gained  that  reputation  because   of  practices 


Chapter  9.     The  Evangelism  of  Philip  33 

which  were  illegitimate  and  claims  which  rivalled  those 
of  the  apostles.  The  preaching  and  healing  of  Philip 
served  to  turn  the  allegiance  of  the  people  away  from 
Simon  and  even  infliienced  the  magician  himself  who 
professed  repentence  and  received  baptism. 

It  would  doubtless  be  fair  to  compare  these  results  in 
Samaria  with  those  obtained  to-day  by  a  foreign  mis- 
sionary. Such  an  one  can  touch  the  hearts  and  awaken 
the  consciences  of  a  very  rude,  ignorant  and  supersti- 
tious people.  Their  conversion  is  real,  but  requires 
their  careful  education  in  order  to  be  lasting.  Their 
motives  are  mixed  and  their  ideas  extremely  crude.  In 
course  of  time  their  belief  becomes  intelligent.  It  was 
not  altogether  strange  that  Simon  supposed  that  he 
could  obtain  the  apostolic  gift  by  making  a  sufficiently 
liberal  offer  to  Peter  and  John.  He  had  won  all  re- 
sults thus  far  by  cleverness,  and  probably  thought  that 
the  apostles  were  possessors  of  a  superior  sort  of  mag- 
ical skill,  which  they  would  share  with  him  for  a  suffi- 
cient inducement.  Such  a  low  ideal  of  spiritual  things 
was  Christianity's  greatest  danger.  It  needed  Peter's 
vigorous  rebuke  to  define  the  right  point  of  view. 

But  Philip  had  another  great  opportunity  to  which 
he  was  quick  to  respond.  An  officer  of  Candace, 
queen  of  the  Ethiopians,  trusted  greatly  by  her,  had 
become  converted  to  Judaism  in  his  own  land  and  had 
made  the  long  journey  to  Jerusalem,  presumably  to  at- 
tend one  of  the  great  festivals.  Philip  was  providen- 
tially led  to  go  southward  along  the  road  leading  from 
Jerusalem  to  Gaza.  If  we  adopt  the  view  of  the  older 
commentators  and  of  Prof.  George  Adam  Smith  that 
the  word  "desert"  in  verse  26  refers  to  the  town,  dis- 
tinguishing it  as  Gaza  in  the  desert  or  old  Gaza  in  con- 
tradistinction to  the  newer  city  near  the  coast,  it  sug- 
gests a  highway  comparatively  undisturbed  by  traffic. 
Philip's  prompt  obedience  to  a  command  which  must 
liave  seemed  to  him  strange  since  it  took  him  away 
from  a  useful  work  which  God  was  blessing,  his  alert- 
ness in  availing  himself  of  the  missionary  opportunity 


84  _  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

suddenly  presented  to  him,  and  his  broad-minded  die- 
regard  of  national  and  religious  prejudices  (8:38) 
have  often  been  noted  as  justifying  the  title  ^^the  evan- 
gelist" by  which  he  has  been  generally  known. 

The  Ethiopian  officer  to  whom  Philip  was  sent  had 
perhaps  purchased  in  Jerusalem  a  roll  of  the  prophe- 
cies of  Isaiah  and  was  earnestly  studying  it  but  with- 
out great  result.  He  gladly  welcomed  Philip  as  a 
teacher  of  its  fulness  of  meaning.  He  had  been  read- 
ing a  Messianic  passage  which  gave  Philip  a  notable 
opportunity  for  explaining  its  fulfilment  in  Jesus  and 
to  tell  of  His  life  and  death  for  the  whole  world.  Over- 
joyed by  the  message  and  ripe  for  its  acceptance  the 
officer  asked  for  baptism  as  one  who  embraced  the  new 
faith  and  Philip  unhesitatingly  administered  it.  Thus 
one  more  of  the  barriers  which  had  hedged  Judaism 
about  was  broken  down. 

The  progress  of  God^s  kingdom  at  all  ages  depends 
on  such  readiness  as  this  to  follow  the  clear  leadings 
of  the  Spirit  of  God  notwithstanding  prejudice  or  cus- 
tom or  fear.  There  is  a  continuous  need  of  Philips, 
sensitive  to  spiritual  direction  yet  wise  and  thoughtful 
in  its  execution,  prompt  and  zealous  to  act  yet  never 
forgetting  that  their  service  is  for  spiritual  ends. 


Chapter  10.     Peter's  Vision 


35 


Chapter  1 0.— Peter's  Vision.  Christianity's  Forward  Step. 
Acts  9:  31-10 :  23«,    About  A.  D.  40. 

When  Peter  returned  with  John  from  Samaria  he 
may  have  remained  at  the  capital  city  for  some  time. 
The  conversion  of  Saul,  the  persecutor  whose  zeal  knew 
no  abatement,  weakened  for  a  time  the  energies  of  his 
allies  and  followers.  There  ensued  a  period  of  relative 
peacefulness  and  prosperity  for  the  growing  church. 

This  progress  of  the  church  gave"'  rise,  no  doubt,  to 


View  ia  Lydda. 

the  need  of  many  an  apostolic  journey  of  visitation. 
Each  new  group  of  congregations  desired  the  approval 
and  the  helpful  counsel  of  one  of  the  church  leaders. 
Possibly  a  system  of  circuit-visitation  was  gradually 
growing  up.  On  one  such  tour  Peter  came  to  the  con- 
gregation at  Lydda,  a  village  on  the  old  frontier  of 
Judea,  three  hours  from  Joppa.  In  common  with 
Joppa  it  was  in  these  days  a  place  of  importance  and 
a  center  of  intense  Jewish  nationalism.  Here  he 
healed  ^neas,  a  palsied  man,  and  at  Joppa  restored 
to  life  an  estimable  woman  named  Dorcas.  Such  works 
of  power  gave  the  church  great  confidence  and  drew 
many  to  belief  in  Jesus. 

But  the  really  important  achievement  of  the  journey 
was  Peter's  victory  over  the  prejudices  of  his  race.  At 
Joppa  he  was  the  guest  of  Simon,  a  tanner.  This  fact 
goes  far  to  establish  his  growing  breadth  of  mind  and 
resoluteness   of   will.     The   Jews   despised    and   even 


36  Hie  Apostolic  Leaders 

hated  those  who  practiced  the  trade  of  a  tanner,  re- 
garding them  as  unclean,  because  they  were  obliged  to 
come  in  contact  with  dead  animals.  Possibly  this  feel- 
ing was  not  shared  by  the  unpunctilious  common  peo- 
ple, the  working  classes  to  which  Peter  belonged.  One 
day,  a  remarkable  experience  came  to  Peter  near  the 
time  of  noon,  which  he  felt  to  be  in  some  form  a  divine 
intimation  that  it  was  not  fitting  that  he  should  aim 
to  be  more  scrupulous  than  God.  He  saw  a  vision 
while  at  prayer,  of  a  great  sheet  lowered  from  the 
heavens  in  which  were  all  sorts  of  living  animals,  fit 
for  food.  While  gazing  at  the  strange  'sight  a  voice 
seemed  to  say  to  him,  "Rise  up,  Peter ;  slay  and  satisfy 
your  hunger.^'  But  impulsively  as  ever  Peter  made  re- 
ply, "Par  be  it  from  me,  0  Lord,  for  I  have  never 
eaten  anything  which  the  law  declared  to  be  unclean 
and  unbecoming  the  use  of  godly  men."  It  was  not  an 
unworthy  reply.  Peter  was  but  remaining  loyal  to  the 
principles  which  had  been  inculcated  from  his  very 
youth.  The  distinction  between  clean  and  imclean  he 
regarded  as  established  by  God,  to  be  blindly  conserved. 
Imagine  his  astonishment  and  wonder  at  hearing  the 
words,  "What  God  hath  set  before  you  as  clean  and  in- 
vited you  to  eat,  do  not  presume  to  regard  as  inadmissi- 
ble." It  was  a  lesson  over  which  he  began  to  ponder. 
What  God  had  made  clean  he  could  also  make  usable. 
The  Jews  for  centuries  had  been  observing  artificial 
distinctions  because  of  God's  ordinance;  they  had 
drawn  many  lines  between  themselves  and  other  peo- 
ples from  the  same  motive;  was  all  this  to  cease? 

While  he  was  reflecting  a  group  of  men  knocked  at 
the  gate  of  Simon's  house,  inquiring  for  him.  Prompted 
by  the  inward  voice  of  the  Spirit  to  regard  their  mis- 
sion as  a  providential  one  for  hiin,  Peter  went  down 
from  the  housetop  and  inquired  their  message.  They 
told  him  that  Cornelius,  a  Roman  centurion  at  Csesa- 
rea,  a  "fearer  of  God"  and  well  liked  by  the  Jews  of 
that  city,  had  sent  by  them  to  have  Peter  come  to  his 
house  and  declare  the  will  of  Gorl.     Coming  hard  upon 


Chapter  10.     Peter's  ^Vision  S7 

his  strange  experience  that  noon,  Peter  understood  that 
this  invitation,  with  wliieh  a  few  da3'S  before  he  would 
not  have  dreamed  of  complying,  was  in  reality  a  divine 
call.    He  therefore  made  ready  to  obey  it. 

The  significance  of  the  act  and  the  necessity  of  the 
precedent  vision  became  clearer  to  one  who  studies  the 
situation  with  which  Peter  had  to  deal.  Only  a  direct 
divine  command,  or  what  he  interpreted  as  such,  could 
have  justified  him  in  ignoring  the  strongest  convictions 
and  dearest  conventions  of  his  own  people. 

Cornelius  was  clearly  a  man  who  was  held  in  high 
esteem  by  the  Jews  who  knew  him.  He  was  the  com- 
manding officer  of  a  cohort  known  as  the  "Italic  co- 
hort," stationed  as  Caesarea.  It  seems  probable  that 
this  cohort  was  one  recruited  from  volunteer  Eoman 
citizens  in  the  East  and  used  as  an  auxiliary  body  of 
troops.  Such  a  cohort  was  commanded  by  regular  Eo- 
man officers.  Cornelius,  then,  was  unquestionably  a 
Roman,  a  foreigner.  He  is  described  as  a  very  devout 
and  very  liberal  man,  "one  that  feared  God."  This  last 
phrase  means,  by  general  consent  of  students,  when 
used  in  the  book  of  Acts,  one  who  was  attracted  by  the 
religious  beliefs  of  Judaism,  and  had  adopted  certain 
Jewish  customs,  especially  the  habits  of  regular  prayer, 
of  Scripture  study,  of  synagogue  worship,  almsgiving 
and  meditation.  Such  an  one  was  given  grateful  recog- 
nition in  the  Jewish  community  as  a  religious  and  vir- 
tuous man,  worthy  of  respect  and  confidence,  yet  he  was 
in  no  sense  a  real  proselyte,  recognized  as  a  member  in 
good  standing  of  the  Jewish  community.  He  was  still 
an  outsider,  a  Gentile,  because  he  was  unwilling  to 
wholly  conform  to  the  requirements  of  the  law.  The 
contact  of  Judaism  with  the  world  during  the  several 
centuries  just  preceding  the  life  of  Jesus  induced  at 
once  a  more  rigid  drawing  of  the  line  between  a  real 
Jew  and  son  of  the  covenant  and  one  who  remained 
outside,  and  a  friendlier  treatment  of  those  who  were 
disposed  to  fraternize  with  Jews  and  to  adopt  their  re- 
ligious beliefs. 


38 


The  Apostolic  Leaden 


This  centurion  was  recognizable  as  a  truly  religious 
man,  who  aMiated  as  nearly  as  possible  with  the  Jews, 
whom  he  respected  and  liked.  One  day  he  was  engaged 
in  prayer,  quite  possibly  for  guidance  in  regard  to  his 
duty  in  acknowledging  his  relationship  to  God.  The 
question  of  entering  tully  into  tlie  membership  of  the 
Jewish  community  may  well  have  been  a  perplexing  one 
to  him.      A^^iile  praying  he  saw  a  vision  and  heard  a  mes- 


"View  la  Joi>pa. 

sage  bidding  him  send  messengers  to  Joppa  and  invite 
to  Caesarea  a  man  named  Simon  Peter,  who  would  in- 
struct him.  He  promptly  summoned  tvv'o  of  his  confi- 
dential servants  and  a  soldier,  all  bein<]^  in  sympathy 
with  him,  related  to  them  his  vision,  and  bade  them  go 
to  Joppa  to  find  Peter  and  bring  him  back  with  them. 

It  is  interesting  to  note  that  God  is  represented  in 
Scripture  as  executing  His  purposes  through  those  who 
are  living  up  to  their  ideals.  Peter  and  Cornelius  were 
both  terribly  in  earnest.  Each  was  anxious  for  divine 
leading  and  ready  at  all  costs  to  obey  it.  Such  men 
may  alter  the  trend  of  centuries. 


Chapter  II.     Peter  and  Cornelius  39 

Chapter  11.    Peter  at  the  iiouse  of  Cornelius.    Acts  10: 
2db—\  1:18.    About  A,  D.  40. 

We  can  well  imagine  the  thoughtfulness  of  Peter 
that  night  at  Joppa  after  his  guests  liad  retired.  The 
vision  of  the  daytime  had  made  a  deep  impression  upon 
him.  He  could  not  doubt  that  it  portended  some  line 
of  action  which  nothing  less  than  a  divine  authorization 
would  justify  to  himself  or  to  his  brethren.  The  story 
told  by  the  soldiers  gave  him  a  clue  to  the  probable 
duty  which  confronted  him.  His  own  fidelity  to  the 
custom's  of  his  fathers  emphasized  the  importance  of 
any  action  which  he  might  be  forced  to  take.  With  the 
shrewdness  which  ever  supplemented  his  impulsiveness 
he  determined  to  take  with  him  to  Csssarea  a  group  of 
Christians,  men  whose  standing  as  such  and  as  loyal 
Jews  would  be  beyond  question,  in  order  that  they  too 
might  participate  in  the  event,  whatever  it  was,  and  be 
reliable  witnesses  regarding  his  own  share  in  it. 

We  cannot  overstate  the  perplexity  which  would  be  in 
his  mind  and  in  the  minds  of  those  brethren  with  whom 
he  discussed  the  vision.  Jewish  exclusiveness  had  based 
itself  on  the  thought  of  holiness.  The  Jews  were  a  dis- 
tinctive people  that  they  might  remain  a  holy  nation, 
absolutely  ready  for  divine  serviceableness.  It  was  a 
noble  idea,  belittled  in  the  execution,  but  satisfying 
still  to  the  average  Jewish  mind.  Without  'such  a  vision 
of  the  possible  abolition  of  a  purely  ceremonial  distinc- 
tion Peter  might  not  have  felt  himself  at  liberty  to 
respond  to  the  v/ish  of  Cornelius. 

Probably  the  apostle  had  no  plan  of  action  completely 
in  his  mind,  as  he  walked  northward  in  company  with 
the  others.  He  was  far  from  realizing  the  full  signifi- 
cance of  his  concession.  Familiar  as  he  was  with  the 
commission  of  Jesus  to  make  disciples  of  all  nations,  he 
could  only  enter  into  a  full  perception  of  its  implica- 
tions through  experience.  When  confronted  by  a  con- 
crete case  he  could  v/ith  encouragement  deal  with  it  in 
the  spirit  of  Jesus.    Until  that  necessity  arose,  he  was 


40 


The  Apostolic  Leaders 


not  likely  to  even  consider  the  broader  aspects  of  the 
commission. 

Arriving  at  Caesarea,  he  and  his  companions  found 
that  Cornelius  had  assembled  a  group  of  kinsmen  and 
acquaintances  to  meet  them.  The  centurion  received 
Peter  with  great  respect,  making  deep  obeisance  to  him. 
Doubtless  he  meant  only  to  express  real  reverence,  not 
worship;  but  Peter  was  quick  to  disclaim  any  unusual 


Old  Mole  at  Czesarea. 


I  i-:m  a  inot'ijraiA 


distinction.  Entering  the  house  with  Cornelius  and 
explaining  his  waiving  of  scruples  by  alluding  to  his  re- 
cent vision  and  its  lesson  of  tolerance,  Peter  called  for 
the  reason  of  his  summons.  The  centurion  complied  by 
recounting  his  own  vision,  four  days  previous,  at  the 
time  of  afternoon  prayer,  declaring  with  soldierly  terse- 
ness how  he  instantly  obeyed  the  heavenly  mandate 
and  sent  messengers  for  Simon.  Realizing  that  the  un- 
expected coincidence  in  their  experiences  was  a  proof 
that  God  had  brought  them  together  for  some  purpose 
of  His  own,  Cornelius  requested  Peter  to  give  them  the 
message  he  had  for  them. 

Peter's  sermon  is  interesting  as  affording  an  example 
of  apostolic  preaching.  It  is  just  such  a  sermon  as  must 
have  been  preached  many  a  time  in  those  early  days. 
Extolling  God's  readiness  to  receive  and  bless  those  of 
any  nation  who  are  real  workers  of  righteousness,  he 
declared  that  Christ's  message  of  heavenly  peace  was  not 
limited  to  the  Jewish  people  but  was  for  all  mankind. 


Chapter  11.     Peter  and  Cornelius  41 

His  ministry  all  knew  about,  how,  anointed  with  the 
Spirit,  He  went  about  doing  all  manner  of  good  and 
delivering  all  from  the  thraldom  of  the  devil.  Of  all 
this  the  apostles  were  competent  witnesses.  The  Jews 
put  Him  to  a  shameful  death,  but  God  restored  Him  to 
life  and  made  this  renewed  life  perfectly  apparent  to 
many.  He  laid  upon  His  followers  the  duty  of  wit- 
nessing concerning  Him  as  the  universal  Lord  of  all. 
The  prophets  too  were  witnesses  of  His  power  to  grant 
forgiveness  of  sins. 

While  Peter  was  speaking,  the  customary  indications 
of  the  presence  of  the  Spirit  came  upon  those  who  were 
listening.  Just  what  these  w^cre  is  not  made  clear. 
Probably  those  present  were  unable  longer  to  restrain 
their  emotions,  and  burst  out  into  rhapsodies  of  praise 
to  God.  They  were  filled  with  an  overwhelming  sense 
of  consecration  and  devotion,  with  a  great  desire  to  serve 
God.  Such  indications  were  regarded  as  proof  of  di- 
vine acceptance.  The  Jewish  Christians  who  had  come 
with  Peter  were  greatly  amazed.  But  Peter,  prepared 
in  a  measure  for  just  such  a  result,  authorized  their 
receiving  the  rite  of  baptism  as  the  formal  sign  of  ad- 
mittance into  the  Messianic  brotherhood.  Moreover, 
yielding  to  their  earnest  persuasions  and  ignoring  alto- 
gether the  conventions  which  had  hitherto  been  so  dear 
to  him,  Peter  remained  with  Cornelius  as  his  guest  for 
a  while,  doubtless  improving  the  opportunity  for  im- 
parting instruction. 

When  Peter  returned  to  Jerusalem  the  exciting  news 
of  this  action  of  his  had  preceded  him.  He  was  taken 
vigorously  to  task  by  the  conservatively  minded  Chris- 
tians who  believed  that  no  one  could  be  a  good  disciple 
who  was  not  first  of  all  a  good  Jew.  How  natural  it 
was  for  such  to  feel  indignant  and  even  scandalized  by 
Peter's  action  we  realize  when  we  recollect  that  every 
leading  Christian  up  to  date  had  been  a  Jew,  careful  to 
respect  and  maintain  every  Jewish  ceremonial  obliga- 
tion. Peter's  defense  was  straight  and  simple.  He  had 
not  dared  to  oppose  the  will  of  God,  manifested  so  un- 


42  The  A2}06tolic  Leaders 

mistakably  and  confirmed  so  promptly.  Of  the  impor- 
tant fact  that  the  Spirit  of  God  had  been  given  to  the 
Gentiles  the  brethren  from  Joppa  were  competent  wit- 
nesses. When  thus  the  group  at  Caesarea  had  been  ad- 
mitted by  God  Himself  into  the  brotherhood,  how  could 
Peter  regard  them  as  unworthy  of  close  and  friendly 
fellowship  ? 

This  argument  was  unanswerable.  It  silenced  every 
objector,  so  far  as  Peter  was  concerned.  Apparently, 
however,  there  was  no  general  conviction  that  God  had 
thus  thrown  wide  open  the  doors  of  Christianity  to  the 
uncircumcised.  At  best  it  was  understood  to  be  a  special 
instance  of  grace,  such  as  might  always  be  expected. 
The  great  majority  of  Christians  'still  regarded  the  path- 
way of  Judaism  as  the  normal  road  to  Christlikeness. 

It  is  instructive  to  notice  how  difficult  men  have  found 
it  in  all  ages  to  admit  that  other  men  may  become 
heavenly-minded  in  other  than  their  own  familiar  way. 
Cornelius  was  a  genuinely  good  man,  as  all  bore  witness, 
but  nothing  less  explicit  than  this  experience  would 
have  sufficed  to  make  Peter  accept  him  as  a  fellow- 
disciple.  Intolerance  and  narrowness  are  not  unknown 
in  the  twentieth  century.  They  usually  must  be  broken 
down  in  a  similar  way  by  the  unquestionable  manifesta- 
tion of  spiritual  experience.  Fortunate  will  the  church 
of  Christ  itself  be  when  its  development  can  be  as  nor- 
mal and  unprejudiced  as  that  of  its  great  Head. 


Chapter  12.     Feier's  Irnpri^onment  43 

Chapter  12.    Peter's  imprisotiinent,  Deliverance  and  De- 
parture.   Acts  12  ;  1=23.    A.  D.  44. 

The  last  episode  in  which  Peter  figures  followed  hard 
upon  the  baptism  of  Cornelius.  It  arose  in  connection 
with  another  persecution  which  gave  the  Christian  com- 
munity trouble.  A  part  of  its  great  interest  to  us  is 
due  to  the  fact  that  it  brings  the  narrative  of  Acts  into 
definite  contact  with  the  world's  history  and  gives  the 
student  of  this  history  an  exact  point  of  reference. 

The  rapid  growth  of  the  Christian  community  all 
over  Palestine,  as  well  as  at  Jerusalem,  gave  great  con- 
cern to  the  religious  authorities  of  Judaism.  They 
recognized  far  more  clearly  than  did  the  Christians 
themselves  the  irreconcilable  differences  which  made 
such  a  growth  dangerous  to  Judaism.  The  older  re- 
ligion was  based  on  absolute  obedience  to  fixed  rules, 
and  in  practice  those  rules  were  interpreted  by  the  relig- 
ious leaders  themselves.  Any  questioning  of  their  au- 
thority was  really  fatal  to  the  type  of  religious  life  they 
had  developed.  These  leaders  were  naturally  pleased 
when  Herod  Agrippa  'seized  the  apostle  James  and  put 
him  to  death  by  the  sword. 

Some  have  thought  that  James  was  the  first  member 
of  the  apostolic  body  to  be  mart5rred  because  he  hap- 
pened to  be  within  reach  at  the  time  of  this  royal  ca- 
price. No  further  reason  would  be  really  necessary, 
since  James  was  one  of  the  recognized  leaders,  whose 
shameful  death  would  be  expected  to  fill  the  hearts  of 
the  Christians  with  terror.  But  James  was  a  ^'son  of 
thunder'^  and  may  have  been,  despite  the  silence  of  Acts, 
one  of  the  boldest  and  most  uncompromising  of  preach- 
ers. The  failure  of  Luke  to  give  him  a  place  of  promi- 
nence is  no  assurance  of  his  obscurity.  The  plan  of  the 
book  of  Acts,  as  we  have  already  seen,  excludes  the  men- 
tion of  all  incidents  but  those  which  became  turning 
points  in  the  evolution  out  of  Judaism  of  a  free,  pro- 
gressive world-wide  Christianity. 

The  appearance  of  a  Herod  on  the  scene  with  the 
power  of  life  and  death  demands  explanation.     Since 


44  Tlie  Apostolic  Leaders 

the  deposition  of  Archelaus  as  tetrarch  of  Judea  in  A.D. 
6  no  one  belonging  to  the  family  of  Herod  had  exer- 
cised such  power  in  Judea.  Herod  Antipas  (Lu.  13  :  31 ; 
23 :  7;  Mk.  6 :  17)  to  whom  the  will  of  Herod  the  Great 
gave  Galilee  and  Perea,  ruled  that  territory  until  39 
A.  D.,  a  period  of  more  than  forty  years.  Herod  Philip 
(Lu.  3:1),  who  had  received  the  northeastern  territory, 
ruled  it  with  great  success  for  thirty-seven  j^ears  until 
34  A.  D.  He  was  a  Gentile  in  spirit  and  had  little  to 
do  in  any  way  with  the  religious  fortunes  of  the  Jewish 
people.  The  only  contact  of  the  active  career  of  Jesus 
with  him  was  at  the  occasions  of  withdrawal  from  Gali- 
lee (Mk.  8:27). 

When  Herod  Philip  died  the  emperor  Caligula  made 
Herod  Agrippa  ruler  over  his  dominions  with  the  title 
of  king.  Agrippa  was  the  son  of  Aristobulus,  and  the 
grandson  of  Herod  the  Great.  After  the  tragic  death 
of  his  father  he  had  been  sent  to  Eome  to  be  educated. 
He  inherited  the  attractive  personality  of  his  father 
and  the  wiliness  and  ambition  of  his  grandfather.  He 
was  nearly  fifty  years  of  age  before  his  real  opportunity 
came.  In  youth  he  had  led  an  extravagant,  brilliant 
social  career.  During  the  long  reign  of  Tiberius  his 
fortunes  ranged  through  every  scale,  but  at  last  he  be- 
came the  intimate  personal  friend  of  Prince  Caligula, 
on  whose  succession  to  the  throne  he  staked  his  fortunes. 
The  death  of  Philip  and  the  enthronement  of  Caligula 
happened  in  close  succession,  so  that  one  of  the  first 
acts  of  Caligula  was  the  raising  of  Agrippa  to  royal 
rank.  In  A.  D.  39  Herod  Antipas  was  deposed  and 
banished  and  his  territories  added  to  those  of  Agrippa, 
who  thus  became  king  of  Galilee,  Perea,  and  the  north- 
eastern regions  as  far  as  the  neighborhood  of  Damascus. 
During  the  last  two  years  of  Caligula's  reign,  when  he 
conceived  the  insane  purpose  of  having  his  statue  erected 
in  the  temple  at  Jerusalem,  it  was  Agrippa  who  at 
great  personal  cost  and  risk  persuaded  him  to  forego 
it.  At  the  death  of  Caligula,  AgTip])a  helped  Claudius 
to  the  imperial  Ihrono  and  was  rewarded  by  tlie  addition 


Chapter  i.v.     rder'a  Itupriaoiuneut 


45 


of  Samaria  and  Judea  to  his  royal  deraesne.  Thus  in 
41  A.  D.  he  became  king  of  all  the  territory  of  his 
grandfather. 

His  reign  was  short  but  glorious.  His  subjects  liked 
him.  Probably  he  was  as  much  of  a  pagan  in  heart  as 
all  his  family,  but  he  was  outwardly  scrupulous  in  his 
relations  with  his  people,  taking  an  occasional  vacation 
to  a  Greek  city  like  Berytus  in  order  to  enjoy  the  Greek 
games  and  atmosphere. 

In  pursuance  of  his  two-sided  policy  of  strict  legal- 
ism and  liberality  he  began  to  persecute  the  Christians. 
Having  won  ap- 
proval by  the  exe- 
cution of  James, 
lie  arrested  the  rec- 
ognized leader  of 
the  apostolic  band, 
Peter.  The  apostle- 
was  placed  under 
strict  guard,  six- 
teen men  in  four 
watches  taking  him 
in  charge  until  the 
Passover  should 
have  concluded. 
Two  of  the  soldiers 
guarded   the   prisoner 


From  a  photoffrapTi. 

Gate  to  Peter's  Frisoa,  in  Jerusalem. 


cell, 


l)eing   chained 


within   the 
to  him,  and  two  were  at  the  door. 

The  one  refuge  of  the  church  was  earnest  supplication 
to  God.  Apparently  the  community  gathered  in  one 
place  and  organized  a  continuous  service  of  prayer.  The 
crisis  was  a  supreme  one.  No  earthly  help  could  avail. 
They  plead  for  the  life  so  precious  to  them  and  for  the 
continuing  leadership  which  seemed  so  essential. 

God  heard  those  prayers  and  delivered  the  apostle 
from  his  dangerous  position.  The  narrative  is  dramatic. 
Peter's  profound  and  trustful  slumber  between  his  burly 
guards,  his  sudden  and  complete  deliverance,  his  own 
bewilderment,  his  prompt  repairing  to  tbe  woll-known 


46  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

gathering  place,  where  he  would  find  the  disciples,  the 
ready  faith  of  the  maiden  and  the  skepticism  of  the  as- 
sembly— every  detail  is  lifelike  and  corroborative.  Poor 
human  nature  manifested  itself  then  as  now.  The 
church  did  not  take  its  prayers  with  half  enough  seri- 
ousness. 

Herod^s  sudden  death  followed  very  soon.  While  at 
Caesarea,  probably  for  the  purpose  of  celebrating  public 
games  in  honor  of  the  safe  return  of  Claudius  to  Rome 
from  Britain,  and  after  a  public  manifestation  of  pride 
which  all  regarded  as  blasphemous,  he  died  a  speedy 
but  terrible  death,  the  victim  in  fact  of  a  profligate  and 
luxurious  life.  It  was  a  sovereign  calamity,  which  gave 
pause  to  the  outburst  of  persecution. 

The  career  of  James  is  instructive  for  the  average 
man  with  powers  of  leadership.  He  was  one  of  the  first 
four  disciples,  invariably  honored  with  his  Lord's  confi- 
dence. He  must  have  iDeen  a  man  of  great  usefulness 
and  prominence,  but  it  brought,  so  far  as  we  know,  no 
honorable  mention.  But  the  greatest  need  of  the 
church  of  to-day  is  a  body  of  leaders  who  like  James 
rejoice  in  usefulness  rather  than  prominence,  or,  like 
Peter,  maintain  a  serene  and  childlike  confidence  in 
God  under  the  most  appalling  conditions.  Such  are  the 
men  needed  for  crises,  and  crises  never  cease. 


Chayter  IS.     The  Developing  Cliurch  47 

Chapter  13.     The  Developing  Church:  a  Review. 

The  writer  of  the  book  of  Acts  was  a  literary  artist, 
and  he  used  his  varied  material  in  the  early  chapters 
with  consummate  skill.  To  tell  a  great  story  by  sugges- 
tion is  no  easy  task.  It  demands  the  historian's  range 
of  vision,  the  student's  grasp  of  the  detailed  course  of 
development,  and  the  writer's  skill  in  deftly  suggesting 
to  the  active  mind  through  a  cleverly  ordered  series  of 
narratives  the  true  picture  which  is  before  his  own  gaze. 
Our  author  had  in  mind  the  rapidly  extending  church 
of  the  days  of  Paul,  the  apostle  to  the  Gentile  world. 
He  had  to  indicate  the  steps  of  transition  by  which  the 
little  company  of  believers,  differing  from  their  Jewish 
acquaintances  only  in  their  absolute  conviction  that 
Jesus  was  the  Christ  of  prophecy  and  the  Lord  of  the 
church  which  was  to  be  organized,  became  the  promise 
of  an  army  of  resolute,  untrammeled,  far-visioned  mis- 
sioners,  aiming  at  nothing  less  than  the  acknowledgment 
of  His  Lordship  by  the  whole  human  world. 

The  group  of  disciples  who  awaited  in  the  upper  room 
the  manifestation  of  the  Holy  Spirit  were  faithful  and 
fairly  conservative  Jews.  At  least  they  cherished  at 
that  time  no  thought  of  heading  a  revolt  from  Judaism. 
They  were  reformers  and  yet  sympathizers.  They  cham- 
pioned a  return  to  the  ancient  simplicity  and  spirit- 
uality. They  believed  that  Jesus  had  indicated  the  true 
spirit  and  the  proper  methods  of  Judaism,  but  did  not 
realize  that  He  had  virtually  abolished  it  as  a  religious 
system.  The  significant  comment  of  Mark  7:19  was 
the  remark,  made  a  generation  later  than  the  period 
which  immediately  followed  the  departure  of  Christ,  of 
a  writer  who  had  been  educated  by  the  illuminating  ex- 
periences which  are  rehearsed  in  the  book  of  Acts. 

This  group  of  men  were  of  fine  yet  not  extraordinary 
quality.  They  could  hold  their  ground,  once  having 
taken  it,  but  they  were  not  of  a  creative  disposition. 
They  had  come  to  know  well  a  great  personality.  Life 
could  never  be  restored  to  its  old  low  level  for  them. 


^S  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

They  were  possessed  by  a  grand  ambition — to  give  ex- 
pression in  word  and  life  to  the  ideals  He  had  made 
real  to  them.  His  personality  and  His  ideals  were  their 
basis  of  comparison  and  departure.  As  nearly  as  pos- 
sible they  meant  to  live  the  Christlike  life  and  spread 
abroad  His  teachings. 

Such  a  resolve  in  no  way  interfered  with  their  cus- 
tomary acts  of  piety.  The  Christian  community  in 
those  early  days  was  more  than  ever  solicitous  to  do  its 
full  measure  of  holy  service,  which  meant  a  constant 
round  of  devotional  acts  in  private  and  at  the  temple. 
The  disruption  between  its  members  and  the  leaders 
and  the  rank  and  file  of  Judaism  arose  in  natural  ways. 

These  rulers  betrayed  their  unwillingness  to  face  ex- 
isting facts.  They  threatened  and  punished  the  apostles 
in  a  vain  attempt  to  make  them  cease  from  witnessing 
concerning  the  resurrection  of  Jesus.  They  were  evi- 
dently more  anxious  to  be  exempt  from  criticism  than 
to  ascertain  and  to  uphold  the  truth.  Consequently  the 
disciples  were  forced  to  make  a  deliberate  choice  be- 
tween obeying  them  and  obeying  God.  Once  awakened 
to  the  spiritual  captiousness  and  blindness  of  these 
leaders,  the  disciples  were  sure  to  quickly  emancipate 
themselves  from  'such  leadership. 

They  had  reason  to  have  confidence  in  themselves  as 
led  by  the  Spirit  of  God.  No  wonder  that  they  were 
brave  and  resolute.  The  day  of  Pentecost  was  a  day  of 
transformation,  but  also  a  day  of  conviction.  "tTo  expe- 
rience, however  bitter,  could  from  that  day  affect  their 
consciousness  of  the  direct  support  of  God.  This  was  a 
mighty  factor  in  their  personal  development,  dignifying, 
broadeninjr,  deepenino^  their  conscious  life. 

It  is  of  interest,  however,  to  note  that  the  steps  of 
enlargement  were  mostly  of  a  practical  character.  Con- 
fronted bv  some  nctual  problem  the  disciples  solved  it 
and  passed  on.  The  hoalim?  of  the  lame  man  who  sat  at 
the  temple  ^ate  aroused  them  to  a  sense  of  their  own 
strength  and  of  the  inability  of  the  rulers  to  gainsay 
the   patent   exhibition    of   divine   resourcefulness    dis- 


Chapter  IS.     The  Developing  ChurcJi  49 

played  in  the  presence  of  the  multitude.  When  the  sin 
of  Ananias  and  Sapphira  was  laid  bare  and  punished 
with  such  promptness,  it  gave  a  new  value  to  the  inner 
purity  and  faithfulness  of  the  loyal  church.  When  the 
priesthood  sought  in  vain  to  repress  the  plain  speech  of 
the  apostles,  all  took  new  courage  and  confidence.  When 
the  distractions  of  personal  service  to  the  needy  breth- 
ren made  it  wise  to  elect  laymen  to  relieve  the  apostles 
of  this  responsibility  and  to  give  them  freedom  for  their 
work  of  evangelization,  the  double  result  was  a  larger 
number  of  official  spokesmen  and  the  addition  of  men 
who  took  a  broader  view  of  the  significance  of  the  work 
and  words  of  Jesus. 

After  the  martyrdom  of  Stephen  the  course  of  de- 
velopment was  more  rapid  than  before.  His  impas- 
sioned words  aroused  Pharisaic  hatred  and  fear,  and 
justified  in  their  sight  a  vigorous  persecution  which 
quickly  scattered  the  Christian  community  to  other 
parts  of  the  country  and  in  foreign  lands.  Wherever 
these  men  or  women  went,  they  became  preachers  and 
teachers  of  the  new  faith  in  Jesus.  These  were  still 
propagators  of  Christianized  Judaism,  but  they  found 
that  others  than  Jews  were  affected  by  their  message  of 
faith  and  righteousness.  Samaritans  were  converted, 
then  a  proselyte  from  the  South,  and  then  Peter  was 
led  by  the  Holy  Spirit  to  baptize,  instruct  and  associate 
with  a  group  of  Eomans,  acknowledging  them  as  Chris- 
tian brethren.  No  one  of  these  steps  was  anticipated 
beforehand;  none  of  them  could  be  gainsaid.  The 
church  was  gradually  led  to  see  that  God  purposed  to 
include  within  the  range  of  the  Messianic  promise  others 
than  His  historic  people.  Whoever  in  any  nation  ex- 
hibited a  spirit  of  genuine  faith  was  acceptable  to  Him. 
This  was  a  great  advance,  although  it  was  but  the  prep- 
aration for  the  truly  notable  advance  to  be  made  under 
another  sort  of  leadership. 

This  period  of  fourteen  or  fifteen  years  after  the  res- 
urrection witnessed  some  notable  achievements;  the 
self-consciousness  of  the  new  community;  the  appear- 


oO  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

ance  of  fearless,  consecrated  leaders  determined  to  give 
expression  to  the  will  of  Christ  as  they  understood  it; 
the  rapid  growth  of  the  community  into  real  strength; 
the  wonderful  spirit  of  brotherhood  and  unity ;  and  the 
gradual  widening  of  the  scope  of  the  church.  These 
were  achieved  because  of  the  recognized  leadership  of 
God. 

These  early  Christians  got  at  the  very  heart  of  the 
matter.  The  principal  factors  in  human  progress  are 
dependence  and  independence,  faith  in  a  personal  God 
who  guides,  and  courage  to  do  whatever  such  guidance 
seems  to  demand.  These  are  the  elements  which  the 
life  of  every  age  needs  to  include. 


Chapter  14.     The  Conversion  of  Saul.     Acts  9:    1-1 9a, 
and  scattered  references.    About  A.  D.  35. 

The  story  of  the  active  career  of  Saul  is  a  real  theme 
of  the  book  of  Acts.  It  singles  him  out  as  the  one 
agent  through  whom  the  Gospel  was  given  to  the  Gen- 
tile world.  He  did  not  do  this  work  alone.  At  times 
others  seemed  of  more  importance.  Yet  on  the  whole 
he  was  the  master  mind  and  the  one  who  gave  direc- 
tion to  all.  In  a  significant  sense  the  true  life  of  the 
church  was  bound  up  with  his  life. 

It  is  somewhat  surprising  under  these  circumstances 
to  note  how  varied  in  character  is  the  narrative  which 
gives  us  the  data  concerning  the  great  apostle.  Por- 
tions of  his  career  are  related  in  minute  detail,  par- 
ticularly 'some  of  the  experiences  of  the  years  succeed- 
ing the  last  visit  to  Jerusalem.  But  we  are  told 
almost  nothing  of  his  early  life  and  very  little  of  de- 
tail regarding  his  apostolic  career.  Much  which  the 
student-  of  his  career  would  gladly  know  of  his  en- 


CTiapter  14-     The  Con  version  of  Saul  51 

viionment  and  activity,  his  opinions  and  his  motives, 
is  given  no  expression  in  the  narrative  of  Acts. 

On  the  other  hand^  however,  the  story  of  the  apos- 
tle's life,  as  given  in  Acts,  is  a  stirring  narrative. 
It  bears  the  stamp  of  the  skilled  writer  with  the  power 
of  seeing  the  trend  of  a  generation  and  deftly  sketch- 
ing it.  It  quickens  the  imagination  of  the  reader, 
who  is  made  to  live  over  the  scenes  of  PauVs  ministry 
among  men,  and  to  realize  the  noble  character  which 
ripened  under  the  storm  and  sunshine  of  his  checkered 
career. 

When  we  are  first  introduced  to  Saul,  he  is  a  young 
man,  yet  sufficiently  mature  and  trustworthy  to  be 
given  very  great  and  responsible  commissions  by  the 
high  priest.  Quite  possibly  he  came  from  a  family 
of  distinction.  He  had  been  brought  up  in  Tarsus 
and  was  perhaps  a  graduate  of  the  famous  university, 
of  that  city.  Doubtless  he  had  not  been  in  Judea  while 
Jesus  was  carrying  on  His  active  ministry.  It  has 
been  suggested  that  he  was  away  in  his  home  city  or 
on  a  mission  of  some  kind.  At  the  time  of  his  con- 
version, however,  he  was  in  Jerusalem,  studying  with 
Gamaliel,  a  learned  and  gentle  rabbi,  tolerant  and 
large-hearted. 

Saul,  at  this  time,  by  his  own  confession,  was  fiercely 
intolerant  and  zealous,  eager  to  destroy  the  stubborn 
fanatics  who  persisted  in  exalting  Jesus  a's  the  Christ. 
He  believed  that  they  were  conspiring  to  break  down 
the  exclusive  sanctity  of  the  temple  and  the  authority 
of  the  law.  He  threw  himself  whole-heartedly  into 
the  work  of  checking  their  progress.  Who  can  ques- 
tion that  he  was  one  of  those  who  disputed  with 
Stephen  in  the  '^synagogue  of  the  Cilicians,"  and, 
willingly  or  unwillingly,  was  a  participant  in  the  crime 
of  stoning  him  to  death. 

Saul  was  the  kind  of  man  whom  only  that  curious 
age  would  produce.  He  was  a  Pharisee  of  straitcst 
sect,  a  Hebrew  of  pure  blood,  proud  of  his  lineage, 
proud   of  his  attainments,  a  zealot  yet  a  nobleman. 


52  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

Hie  Pharisaism,  it  has  been  well  said,  was  of  the  type 
displayed  by  the  young  ruler  who  came  running  and 
kneeled  at  the  feet  of  Jesus,  saying,  "What  shall  I 
do  that  I  may  inherit  eternal  life?"  He  continually 
longed  to  secure  the  righteousness  that  comes  by  the 
law.  But  he  went  to  Jerusalem  as  something  more 
than  a  Pharisee.  He  was,  as  he  himself  declared,  a 
free-born  Roman  citizen,  a  fact  of  great  social  as  well 
aa  political  value.  He  was  likewise  a  man  of  broad 
culture,  possibly  in  the  technical  sense,  as  one  who  had 
studied  long  in  a  Greek  university,  certainly  in  the 
general  sense,  as  one  who  had  caught  the  nobler  spirit 
of  the  Hellenism  of  his  day  and  its  deeper  feeling. 
Few  men  were  as  well  prepared  as  he  by  the  circum- 
stancee  of  their  early  life  to  make  a  radical  change 
in  their  outlook  and  emphasis,  to  reinterpret  Chris- 
tian thinking  to  itself  and  to  grasp  in  a  moment  the 
world-Messiahship  of  Jesus.  He  himself  regarded  the 
'Vhole  experience  of  his  early  life  as  a  providential 
shaping  of  his  character  and  capacities  for  his  divinely 
appointed  calling." 

Particularly  should  we  so  interpret  his  bitter  perse- 
cution of  the  church  at  Jerusalem.  Saul  at  that  time 
was  in  a  strange  mental  and  spiritual  condition.  He 
thought  he  was  doing  God  service.  He  was  goading 
himself  on  to  deeds  of  bloody  violence,  wholly  alien 
to  his  exceptionally  gentle  and  tender  disposition.  Only 
the  enthusiasm  and  the  determination  of  the  logically 
sustained  persecutor  upheld  him.  Yet  he  was  full  of 
misgivings,  which  made  him  almost^  desperate.  In  his 
disputes  with  Stephen  and  the  others,  in  the  noble 
martyrdom  of  which  he  was  a  witness,  in  the  lives 
of  those  whom  he  was  persecuting  to  the  death,  he 
must  have  been  constantly  made  aware  of  the  genu- 
ineness and  depth  of  the  religious  life  of  his  opponents 
and  victims.  The  strength  of  his  own  position  lay 
in  a  fixed  belief  that  a  crucified  man  could  under  no 
circumstances  have  been  the  expected  Messiah.  The 
weakness  of  it  l;w  in  the  possible  appeal  to  fact. 


Cho.pter  IJf.     The  Convemon  of  Suul 


OO 


The  three  stories  of  SauFs  conversion  found  in  Acts 
are  not  exactly  alike,  but  the  principal  factors  are  clear. 
Commissioned  by  Caiaphas  to  carry  the  persecution 
to  the  ancient  city  of  Darnascirs,  and  accompanied  by 


View  in  Damascus. 


From  a  photoqiaph. 


Damascus  is  the  oldest  city  in  the  world.  Its  Biblical  history  dates  from  the  time  of 
Abraham,  but  it  is  chiefly  interesting  from  its  connection  with  the  life  of  Paul.  The  city 
is  situated  in  an  oasis  produced  in  the  Syrian  desert  by  the  river  Barada  (the  Abanah  of 
the  Bible),  making  the  site  one  of  rare  beauty. 

others,  he  was  drawing  near  about  midday,  when  a 
blinding  light  flashed  from  heaven  and  Saul  fell  pros- 
trate. He  heard  a  voice  addressing  him  in  the  spoken 
Hebrew  tongue,  "Saul,  Saul,  why  persecutest  thou  me? 
It  is  hard  for  thee  to  kick  against  the  goad."  At  this 
very  moment  it  must  have  been  that  Paul  received 
that  conviction  which  forever  remained  his,  that  he 
gazed  upon  his  risen  Lord.  An  assurance  was  his  that 
wholly  changed  his  point  of  view.  He  arose  blinded 
and  dazed,  was  led  to  Damascus  and  there  was  received 
by  the  disciples. 

The  conversion  of  Saul  to  the  Christian  faith  was  the 
event,  after  Pentecost,  of  greatest  importance  to  the 
growing  church.  He  was  fitted,  r.s  none  of  the  apostles 
were,  to  enter  into  the  plans  of  Jesus  and  to  develop 
Christianity  as  a  world-religion.  They  had  realized 
the  spiritual  values  of  Jesus  and  His  larger  significance 
for  Judaism,  but  there  was  need  of  a  master  mind  to 
give  His  teachings  their  final  importance. 

Many  others  were  being  converted  by  the  Gospel, 


54  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

but  his  conversion  meant  more  than  those  of  all  the 
others  comhined,  because  Saul,  in  addition  to  being 
a  cultured,  broad-minded,  experienced  man,  was  also 
a  man  of  sincerity,  courage,  and  conviction.  Whatever 
he  believed  directed  his  life.  He  became  the  champion 
of  Christianity,  just  as  he  had  been  the  zealous  defender 
of  Judaism.  Such  men  and  women  are  the  real  sup- 
porters and  promoters  of  religion  in  every  age. 


Chapter  15.    The  Training  of  Saul.    Scattered  References. 
About  A.  D.  35=45. 

The  movements  of  Saul  after  his  conversion  cannot 
be  dogmatically  affirmed.  The  narrative  of  Acts  9: 
19&-30  and  that  of  Galatians  1:16-19  do  not  perfectly 
agree.  Some  authorities  give  greater  stress  to  the 
"straightway"  of  Acts  9 :  20  and  regard  him  as  beginning 
at  once  to  preach  in  Damascus,  and  after  a  short  time 
withdrawing  to  Arabia.  Others  emphasize  the  "straight- 
way" of  Galatians  1 :  16,  concluding  that  the  retirement 
occurred  as  soon  as  he  had  recovered  sight  and  strength. 
The  fact  of  this  retirement  is,  however,  of  much  greater 
importance  than  its  exact  date.  A  revolution  had 
occurred  in  SauFs  point  of  view.  Heretofore  he  had 
denied  that  there  was  a  living  Christ.  Now  he  knew 
to  the  contrary.  This  raised  many  questions  in  his 
active  mind,  and  time  was  needed,  even  for  one  so  finely 
trained  as  he,  for  the  reconstruction  of  his  entire  system 
of  thinking. 

The  authority  for  his  absence  in  the  desert  is  himself 
in  Galatians  1 :  17.  Where  he  liid  himself  and  how  long 
he  was  there  are  nowhere  stated.  His  motives  in  retir- 
ing may  have  been  varied.  He  surely  aimed  to  deter- 
mine what  he  would  henceforth  do.  He  may  also  have 
wished  to  let  some  time  pass  before  taking  up  any 
active  public  'service.  Doubtless  during  this  long 
ponpon  of  politnry  meditntion  he  came  to  a  realization, 


Chapter  Id.     TJie  Training  of  Saul  55 

not  merely  of  his  natural  fitness  to  become  a  witness  to 
the  Gentiles  of  divine  grace,  but  also  of  the  issues  truly 
involved  in  the  sacrificial  work  of  Christ.  No  one  had 
as  yet  seen  the -issues  or  stated  them,  not  even  Stephen. 
To  SauFs  trained  mind  they  were  sure  to  stand  forth 
clearly  in  due  time. 

After  an  interval  spent  in  calm  review  and  readjust- 
ment of  the  data  so  familiar  to  him  from  boyhood,  Saul 
returned  to  Damascus  and  labored  there  earnestly.  He 
was  his  old  aggressive  self,  disputing  in  the  synagogues 
and  proclaiming  that  Jesus  was  the  Son  of  God.  He 
met  with  astonishing  success;  and  no  wonder,  for  he 
was  familiar  with  every  trick  of  argument  and  every 
hidden  prejudice  and  every  point  of  approach  of  which 
his  opponents  could  make  use.  No  one  could  seem  to 
stand  against  him.  In  the  end  they  utilized  the  last 
resource  of  beaten  men  and  plotted  to  kill  him.  Learn- 
ing of  this  scheme,  Saul's  friends  felt  it  best  that  he 
should  slip  away  quietly  from  the  city  where  his  life 
was  no  longer  safe. 

There  are  some  differences  of  opinion  regarding  the 
first  visit  of  Saul  to  Jerusalem  as  a  Christian.  Gener- 
ally, however,  the  accounts  of  Acts  9 :  26-30  and  Gala- 
tians  1 :  18-24  are  blended  as  both  referring  to  this  visit. 
They  mention  different  names  but  do  not  seem  to  be  in 
opposition. 

Accord/ng  to  Galatians  it  was  a  furtive  visit,  inten- 
tionally secret,  made  for  the  specific  purpose  of  getting 
facts  from  Peter  regarding  Jesus.  The  account  of  Acts 
assigns  the  timidity  of  the  disciples  at  Jerusalem  as  the 
reason  for  his  meeting  so  few  of  them,  and  emphasizes 
the  share  of  Barnabas  in  bringing  him  into  contact  with 
some  of  the  Twelve,  who  in  Galatians  are  specified  as 
Peter  and  James.  Acts  9 :  29  indicates  that  he 
attempted  to  take  up  the  congenial  task  of  preaching  in 
the  synagogues  in  Jerusalem.  But  the  Jews  plotted 
against  his  life,  and  the  disciples  hurried  him  away 
before  the  church  as  a  whole  had  had  any  chance  to 
really  know  him. 


56 


The  Apostolic  Leaders 


Between  his  departure  from  the  holy  city  to  hife  call 
to  Antioch  is  a  considerable  interval,  jDerhaps  eight  or 
ten  years.  During  this  period  Sanl  was  said  to  be  "in 
the  regions  of  Syria  and  Cilicia/'  where  he  was  engaged 
in  the  active  work  of  preaching,  probably  also  of  organ- 
izing chniches.  Quite  a  group  of  them  were  fostered, 
whether  chiefly  by  Saul  we  are  nowhere  told. 

Meanwhile  a  church  of  great  strength  and  influence 
had  been  growing  up  in  Antioch.     Some  of  those  who 


Antiocli,  from  the  Hortli  Bank  of  tbe  River  Orontes. 

The  bridge  is  on  the  road  to  Selrucia,  tlic  seaport  of  Antioch.    The  celebrated  grove 
of  Daphne  was  about  four  miles  down  the  river  to  tlic  right  of  the  picture. 

had  been  driven  out  of  Jerusalem  after  Stephen's  mar- 
tyrdom went  as  far  as  that  city.  In  the  main  these 
refugees  preached  only  to  Jews,  but  a  few  of  broader 
sympathies  preached  to  the  Greeks.  The  result  was 
astounding  to  those  of  strict  Jewish  standards.  That 
these  converts  were  sincere  Christians  could  hardly  be 
denied;  how  significant  and  permanent  their  conver- 
sions would  be  merited  friendly  investigation. 

It  speaks  much  for  Barnabas  that  he  was  selected  for 
this  mission.  He  was  in  excellent  standing  at  Jeru- 
salem as  a  generous  and  kindly  disciple.  He  was  ap- 
parently a  man  of  broader  sympathies  and  more  valu- 
able experience  than  any  of  the  others.  lie  went  to 
Antioch  and  entered  heartily  into  the  work  of  the 
church  established  there  on  an  inclusive  rather  tlian 
rxclu=:ivo  bnsis. 


Chapter  Id.     The  Training  of  Saul  57 

The  church  grew  with  increasing  rapidity,  so  that 
Barnabas  needed  a  coadjutor.  He  thereupon  bethought 
himself  of  Saul,  by  whom  he  had  been  deeply  impressed 
years  before.  He  found  him  at  home  and  persuaded 
him  to  go  to  Antioch,  where  they  became  companions 
and  congenial  fellow-workers. 

The  preceding  years  had  been  full  of  value  for  Saul. 
He  was  now  in  the  full  maturity  of  his  powers,  with 
an  experience  which  made  him  successful  in  his  work 
and  eager  for  it.  He  had  become  fully  convinced,  prac- 
tically as  well  as  ideally,  that  the  Gospel  was  indeed 
universal.  He  could  labor  unreservedly  and  enthusias- 
tically at  Antioch  working  with  Jews  and  Gentiles  alike. 
His  great  heart  yearned  for  them  both,  his  brethren  of 
the  faith  once  given  to  Israel  and  those  whom  he  wel- 
comed out  of  deeper  darkness.  Having  pursued  an 
independent  career  thus  far,  he  could  act  not  alone 
with  decision  and  persistence,  but  with  an  ever  broad- 
ening apprehension  of  the  issues  involved  in  the  freedom 
of  the  Gospel  message.  All  was  ready,  therefore,  for  an 
advance. 

Saul's  most  important  preparation  for  his  future  work 
was  his  whole-souled  devotion  to  his  duty.  When  once 
convinced  that  he  had  been  in  the  wrong,  he  began  to 
practice  the  right.  As  soon  as  he  had  become  clear  with 
regard  to  what  he  should  preach,  he  commenced  a  work 
of  evangelization.  He  no  sooner  faced  a  responsibility 
than  he  met  it. 

We  find  a  helpful  thousfht  also  in  his  brave  and 
patient  enduring  of  discipline.  It  could  hardly  have 
been  easy  or  pleasant  for  one  who  must  have  been  con- 
scious of  his  powers  to  wait  those  many  years  for  the 
opportunity  of  leadership.  He  had  been  a  notable  man 
among  Jews;  Christians  almost  looked  on  him  with 
suspicion.     But  he  was  meanwhile  in  the  making. 


o8  The  Apoatolic  Leaders 

Chapter  16.    PauPs  First  MLissionary  Journey.    Acts  ch. 
13.    A.  D.  45  or  46. 

In  the  book  of  Acts  we  gain  the  impression  that  the 
work  of  evangelizing  the  Gentiles  was  begun  in  spite  of 
apostolic  plans.  It  might  be  wrong  to  declare  that  the 
apostles  resisted  the  manifest  indications  of  the  willing- 
ness of  God  to  bless  repentant  Gentiles.  JMore  prob- 
ably they  saw  so  abundant  a  work  before  them  amid 
the  congenial  surroundings  of  the  Jewish  settlements, 
where  they  knew  their  power  and  the  efficacy  of  the 
Gospel  message,  that  the  need  of  the  great  world  beyond 
had  not  yet  laid  hold  of  them.  It  was  better  in  the 
providence  of  God  that  this  call  came  through  their  own 
natural  associations  and  sympathies  and  through  the 
convictions  of  their  brethren  of  the  free  church  of  Anti- 
och  to  the  two  loyal  disciples,  Barnabas  and  Saul.  Each 
had  come  out  of  non-Palestinian  surroundings;  each 
was  a  faithful  and  reverent  Jew;  each  took  a  broader 
view  of  the  mission  of  the  Christ  than  the  average  of 
his  Christian  associates;  each  had  thoroughly  tested 
himself  in  the  actual  work  of  evangelization. 

The  conviction  had  doubtless  long  been  forming  in 
the  mind  of  Saul  that  some  one  should  carry  the  mes- 
sage of  the  Gospel  into  parts  hitherto  unponetrated, 
letting  it  help  whom  it  would.  Probably  he  and  Barna- 
bas had  many  a  time  talked  it  over  together  and  with 
the  leaders  of  the  church  at  Antioch  before  the  resolu- 
tion to  send  them  forth  as  its  representatives  was  taken. 
It  was  one  of  those  epochal  acts,  the  result  of  many  co- 
operating judgments,  on  which  the  Divine  seal  was  set 
at  the  very  start. 

This  mission  thus  begun  gave  Saul  his  first  real 
opportunity.  Hitherto  he  had  been  acting  in  an  obscure 
environment  or  as  an  associate  of  more  prominent  men. 
But  the  exigencies  of  such  a  tour  were  just  such  as  he 
could  cope  with  better  than  most  men.  His  unrivaled 
knowledge  of  the  technicalities  of  Judaistic  argument, 
his  lifelong  acquaintance  with  Gentiles  and  their  ways 
of  thinking,  his  familiarity  with  conditions  along  the 


Chapter  16.     Paul's  First  Missionary  Journey    59 


coast  and  in  the  interior  of  Asia  Minor,  his  skill  as  a 
speaker  and  his  quickness  and  coolness  of  judgment 
gave  him  a  vast  advantage  over  Barnabas,  who  was  his 
superior  in  appearance  and  perhaps  in  geniality.  The 
moment  real  leadership  was  demanded,  Saul  came  to 
the  front. 

There  went  with  the  two  a  young  man,  John  Mark 
by  name,  whom  they  had  brought  back  from  Jerusalem. 
He  was  related  to  Barnabas  (Col.  4: 10),  and  doubtless 
was  included  at  his  request.  He  was  a  useful  member 
of  the  party,  helping  in  many  ways. 

The  probable  plan  of  campaign  was  to  tour  through 
Cyprus  and  then  by  way  of  the  coast  back  to  Antioch 
of  Syria.  The  chief  reason  for  so  thinking  is  the  unex- 
plained defection  of  Mark  before  the  interior  journey 
had  been  begun,  and 
PauFs  unwillingness 
a  year  later  to  take 
him  again  as  an  asso- 
ciate on  the  ground 
that  he  had  not  been 
willing  "to  go  to  the 
work"  (Acts  15:38). 
Mark  may  have  done 
all  that  he  had  ever 
agreed  to  do,  but  Paul 
wished  for  men  who 
had  just  one  ambition, 
and  that  was  to  go 
where  the  need  was 
patent. 

They  landed  on  the 
eastern  end  of  the 
great  island  of  Cyprus 


Temple  of  Venus,  at  Paphos,  Restored. 

The  imape  of  the  goddess  was  the  cone  shown  in  the 
shrine.  Incense  was  burned  on  the  altar  in  front  of 
the  shrine. 


at 


Salamis,  where  there  were 
many  Jews,  to  whom  they  spoke  at  once.  Synagogue 
preaching  was  an  obvious  and  sensible  way  of  opening 
their  mission  in  any  place.  They  had  ready  access  to  it, 
were  sure  to  be  invited  to  speak,  and  met  there  just 
those    men    for    whom    they    were    looking,    the    well- 


60  Tlie  Ayodolic  Leaders 

informed  Jews  and  the  enlightened  Gentiles.  They 
met  with  no  jDarticular  hindrance,  at  least  not  until  they 
came  to  the  other  end  of  the  island  to  Paphos. 

Here  occurred  an  event  of  considerable  importance, 
in  that  it  not  only  led  Saul  to  assert  himself  and  made 
him  the  accepted  leader  of  the  party,  but  it  was  the 
first  recorded  occasion  of  the  declaration  of  his  Gospel. 

Sergius  Paulus,  the  Eoman  proconsul,  was  a  man  of 
intelligence  and  reverence.  He  was  listening  with  glad- 
ness to  the  words  of  the  apostles,  when  Elymas,  a  pro- 
fessional "sage,"  who  feared  that  his  hopes  of  gain 
would  be  cut  short,  tried  to  prevent  a  continuance  of 
their  influence.  With  tremendous  earnestness  and 
force  Saul,  facing  the  man  with  a  piercing  gaze  which 
startled  him,  denounced  his  motives  and  declared  his 
judgment. 

From  that  emergency  thus  met  to  the  end  of  his  days 
Saul  was  the  foremost  missionary  of  the  Christian 
church.  Henceforth  he  is  known  as  Paul.  The  'sig- 
nificance of  the  change  of  name  at  this  time  is  not 
wholly  sure.  The  apostle  may  have  already  had  the 
additional  name  from  Eoman  sources.  He  may  have 
taken  the  name  in  view  of  the  new  work  about  begin- 
ning. 

From  Cyprus  the  party  sailed  across  to  Perga  on  the 
coast.  For  some  reason,  either  because  it  was  not 
healthful  to  remain  at  the  coast  and  work  or  because 
Paul  already  was  making  plans  for  an  enterprise  far 
bolder  and  of  wider  scope  than  the  original  plan,  no 
long  stop  was  made  at  Perga.  They  pressed  on  after 
Mark's  defection,  up  into  the  uplands  of  Pisidian 
Antioch. 

After  a  journey  which  must  have  included  a  fair 
number  of  hardships  and  perils,  the  little  company  came 
to  Antioch  in  Pisidian  Galatia.  Here  there  were 
plenty  of  Jews  who  in  their  synagogues  as  usual 
afforded  an  easy  method  of  approach.  The  apostles 
were  courteously  received,  and  invited  to  speak.  Paul 
accepted  the  invitation  and  with  a  gesture  compelling 


Chapter  16.     Paul's  First  Missionary  Journey     61 

silence  began  to  preach.  The  sermon  is  not  different 
from  what  other  apostles  would  have  said,  because  the 
audience  was  composed  of  Jews.  He  traced  the  provi- 
dences of  God  which  finally  resulted  in  the  choice  of 
David  and  the  establishment  of  the  kingdom.  But  that 
was  in  order  that  the  Saviour  might  come,  whom  John 
the  Baptist  recognized  in  Jesus  of  Nazareth.  This 
Saviour  Paul  was  proclaiming  to  them  all.  Misunder- 
standing Jesus,  the  Jerusalemites  had  put  Him  to 
death,  but  God  had  raised  Him  from  the  dead,  a  fact 
known  to  many  witnesses.  These  were  they  who  were 
witnessing  regarding  Him  to  all  people.  To  those  who 
accepted  Him  there  was  available  the  opportunity  of 
forgiveness,  and  of  redemption  and  of  justification. 
Let  those  who  would  not  act  be  warned. 

The  Holy  Spirit  works  along  the  natural  lines  of 
intellectual  obedience.  Paul  and  Barnabas  were  con- 
vinced of  the  need  and  the  duty  of  their  new  work 
before  the  irresistible  command  came  to  them.  They 
were,  doubtless,  looking  for  li,2jht  and  guidance. 

It  also  uses  real  ability.  Barnabas  was  a  kindly  and 
worthy  man,  but  Paul  was  a  great  one.  The  emergency 
developed  him  and  made  his  place.  The  honest  and 
earnest  man  or  woman  can  afford  to  wait  God's  time. 


62  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

Chapter   17.     Paul  and  Barnabas  in  Qalatia.     Acts  ch. 
14.    About  A.  D.  48  or  49. 

Paulas  experience  in  Antioch  of  Pisidia  was  of  no 
little  importance  m  determining  his  missionary  policy 
for  the  future.  The  silence  of  Acts  prevents  us  from 
knowing  much  about  the  events  of  the  years  preceding 
his  stay  with  the  church  in  Syrian  Antioch  or  during 
that  year.  rVpparently  his  work  had  in  the  main  been 
with  those  of  Jewish  birth  and  training. 

During  the  v/eek  which  followed  the  lirst  sermon  in 
the  synagogue  in  Antioch  of  Pisidia,  Paul  and  Barnabas 
were  busy  talking  with  those  who  sought  their  counsel. 
They  shortly  established  a  strong  influence  over  such 
men.  Wlien  the  second  Sabbath  came  the  synagogue 
was  crowded,  not  alone  with  Jews  or  proselytes,  but 
with  Gentiles  who  were  eager  to  hear  what  the  apostles 
had  to  say.  Such*  responsiveness  on  their  part,  offset 
and  encouraged,  no  doubt,  by  an  obvious  willingness  on 
the  part  of  Paul  and  Barnabas  to  encourage  them,  en- 
raged the  Jews,  who  quickly  saw  to  what  all  such  activ- 
ity was  tending.  They  gave  expression  to  their  feelings 
by  interrupting  and  denouncing  the  proceedings.  Their 
rudeness  and  bigotry  called  forth  a  well-merited  rebuke 
from  the  apostles,  who,  thinking  of  the  noble  word  of 
Isaiah  regarding  Israel's  mission,  declared  that  they 
would  not  fail  to  carry  the  message  of  the  Gospel  to  the 
Gentiles.  Tlie  people  of  the  city  gave  them  a  hearty 
welcome  and  among  these  they  found  many  ready 
listeners. 

A  v.'ork  of  real  magnitude  began  at  once.  It  extended 
throughout  the  "region"  of  which  Antioch  was  the  cen- 
ter. Those  who  came  to  the  city  for  trade  heard  of  the 
new  faith  which  was  being  preached  by  the  Jewish  mis- 
sionaries to  Jew  and  Gentile  alike.  This  fact  in  itself 
would  seem  to  tliom  very  strange  and  quite  attractive, 
and  they  would  wish  to  hear  for  themselves,  and  thus 
came  under  the  spell  of  Paul's  persuasive  eloquence. 

After  some  time,  ])ossibly  several  months,  a  period 
marked  by  an  incrensiiiG"  ranao  of  apostolic  influence. 


Chapter  17.     Paul  and  Barnabas  in  Galatia       63 

the  Jews  determined  to  put  an  end  to  their  preaching. 
They  stirred  up  the  women  of  rank,  who  were  their 
blind  supporters,  and  the  leading  men,  and  drove  out 
Paul  and  Barnabas.  We  may  not  suppose  that  this 
happened  without  a  protest  or  in  a  moment.  The  book 
of  Acts  has  little  to  say  about  apostolic  sufferings.  But 
Paul  reminded  Timothy  once  (2  Tim.  3:11)  of  the 
severity  of  the  persecutions  endured  at  Antioch  and 
elsewhere  in  Galatia.  Quite  possibly  some  of  the  beat- 
ings and  scourgings  recorded  in  2  Cor.  11:  24,  25  came 
to  them  at  this  time. 

But  persecution,  however  severe,  could  not  daunt  the 
spirit  of  the  apostles  or  crush  the  ardent  hopes  of  the 
converts.  All  were  faithful  to  their  vows  and  rather 
gloried  in  the  privilege  of  suffering  on  behalf  of  the 
Gospel. 

At  Iconium,  some  ninety  miles  to  the  southeast  and 
outside  of  the  Antioch^an  sphere,  the  apostles  halted. 
As  usual  they  first  entered  the  Jewish  synagogue  and 
preached  there  with  abundant  success.  Both  Jews  and 
Greeks  received  the  message.  Again  this  stirred  to 
jealousy  and  violence  the  hearts  of  the  Jewish 
leaders.  These  were  willing  that  such  a  message  as 
that  of  Paul  should  be  preached  in  the  synagogue, 
but  they  were  not  ready  to  refer  it  to  Gentiles, 
thus  putting  them  on  the  same  religious  plane  as  Jews. 
The  popular  good-will  toward  the  apostles  was  so  gen- 
uine and  widespread  that  tlie  attitude  of  these  leaders 
did  not  for  some  time  succeed  in  making  the  situation 
perilous  for  them.  At  last,  however,  so  bitter  became 
the  factionalism  and  so  imminent  the  danger  that  Paul 
and  Barnabas  deemed  it  wise  to  slip  away  into  the 
Lycaonian  *^region." 

They  had  to  go  only  eighteen  miles  to  reach  Lystra, 
a  garrison  town,  a  "colony"  like  Antioch,  and  a  place  of 
considerable  importance.  They  found  here  a  good 
example  of  the  hybrid  religion  that  officially  existed  in 
a  community  with  the  veneer  of  Greek  civilization.  It 
took  the  forms  and  names  of  Greek  deities  but  main- 


64 


The  Apostolic  Leader, 


tained  the  ideas  of  the  locality.  Paul  healed  a  cripple, 
a  deed  which  aroused  to  the  highest  pitch  the  wonder 
and  joy  of  the  populace,  which  planned  at  once  a  public 
welcome  to  the  deities  who  had,  as  they  conjectured, 

come  to  visit  them. 
Neither  of  the  apos- 
tles understood  the 
cries  of  the  people, 
expressed  in  the  local 
speech,  but  they 
quickly  apprehended 
the  meaning  of  the 
action  of  the  temple 
servitors,  who  were 
unmistakably  prepar- 
ing to  offer  sacrifice. 
It  is  interesting  to 
note  that  the  princi- 
pal place  was  accorded 
Rnins  of  an  Ancient  CiurcH  in  lystra.     to  Barnabas  on  purely 

There  are  BD  many  ruins  of  churches  in  till  9  vicinity,    nvfornnl    rrrnnnrJc       TTo 
that  it  has  been  called  "the  place  of  a  thousand  and     t-AieiJldi    ^lUUULiS:.      XXe 

one  church.6."  I^^^l  wlthout  qucstlon 

the  more  attractive  and  impressive  personality. 

Some  may  wonder  at  the  complaisance  of  the  priest- 
hood. Possibly  the  sudden  enthusiasm  of  the  populace 
was  not  to  be  gainsaid,  more  likely  the  priest  was  not 
jealous.  It  is  not  impossible  that  the  local  guardians 
of  the  temple  of  the  city  were  as  ignorant  as  the  mass 
of  the  people.  At  all  events  the  apostles  with  difficulty 
prevented  the  consummation  of  their  purpose.  Exhib- 
iting distress  and  horror  they  appealed  to  the  multitude 
to  stay  the  sacrificial  rites,  declaring  that  they  were  not 
gods  but  men,  witnesses  of  the  true  message  of  the  one 
living  Grod,  the  Creator  and  Ruler  of  the  whole  universe, 
who  had  in  times  past  allowed  peoples  to  have  their 
own  peculiar  fashion  of  worship,  yet  knit  Himself  to 
them  and  their  needs  l)y  continuous  deeds  of  kindly 
providence. 

Surely    such    enthusiasm    gave    the    apostles    a    rare 


Chapter  17.     Paul  and  Barnabas  in  Galaiia       65 

chance  for  evangelizing,  but  again  their  jealous  Jewish 
foes,  following  them  up  from  Antioch  and  Iconium, 
spread  abroad  suspicion  of  their  motives,  and  soon 
stirred  up  a  mob  which  stoned  Paul  and  left  his  body 
outside  of  the  city,  supposably  dead.  But  he  recovered 
sufficiently  to  return  quietly  with  his  disciples  to  the 
city  and  to  proceed  on  the  next  day  to  Derbe,  still 
farther  to  the  southeast  and  at  the  very  edge  of  Galatia. 
After  a  successful  work  of  some  duration  in  this  city  the 
apostles  determined  to  retrace  their  steps,  revisiting  the 
places  in  which  they  had  labored,  rather  than  to  go 
direct  to  Syrian  Antioch  overland.  Possibly  this  was 
because  the  mountain  roads  were  impassable  at  the 
time;  more  likely  the  decision  was  due  to  a  well-con- 
sidered policy.  Paul  and  Barnabas  had  determined  to 
assume  the  responsibility  of  formally  recognizing  inde- 
pendent churches  in  these  communities  without  advice 
or  permission  from  Antioch  or  Jerusalem.  Their 
installation  of  new  officers  in  the  cities  gave  them  rea- 
sonable freedom  in  meeting  and  counselling  the  congre- 
gations. They  therefore  exhorted  each  group  of  Chris- 
tians to  be  true  to  their  faith,  expecting  and  enduring 
tribulations;  they  organized  a  church  in  each  com- 
munity, and  encouraged  it  to  begin  to  live  its  inde- 
pendent life.  Thus  they  returned  to  Syrian  Antioch 
with  a  report  which  thrilled  all  hearts. 

Those  who  are  looking  for  opportunity,  setting  their 
gaze  ahead,  are  the  ones  whom  neither  abuse  nor  danger 
nor  ridicule  can  swerve  from  their  course.  The  more, 
like  these  apostles,  we  let  the  possible  future  of  the 
kingdom  of  God  grow  before  our  vision,  the  more  avail- 
able as  real  leaders  we  become. 


66  The  xip  Oslo  lie  Leaders 

Chapter  18.    Th«  Coancil  at  Jerusalem.    Acts  15  :  1<»35; 
Gal.  ch.2.    About  A.  D,  50  or  51. 

The  successful  work  of  Paul  and  Barnabas  in  Cyprus 
and  Galatia  must  have  greatly  stirred  even  the  church  at 
Antioch  which  had  sent  them  forth.  It  is  hardly 
within  the  bounds  of  probability  that  either  the  two 
missionaries  or  their  sponsors  anticipated  what  had 
happened.  Not  merely  had  they  spread  the  word  of  the 
Gospel,  but  it  had  taken  remarkable  effect.  Whole 
churches,  made  up  of  Gentile  members,  or  at  least 
having  them  in  the  dominant  majority,  had  come  into 
being.  Galatia  and  Cyprus  as  well  as  Syria  and  Pal- 
estine were  enrolled  as  provinces  of  the  church,  where 
men  and  wom.en  were  being  rapidly  added  to  the  body 
of  believers. 

The  Antioch  church  was  no  doubt  able  to  receive  this 
report  with  complacency  and  to  sympathize  with  the 
ardor  of  their  apostolic  messengers.  But  what  of  the 
Christians  at  Jerusalem!  Mark  had  returned  thither 
and  it  is  fair  to  presume  that  his  account  of  what  was 
being  ventured  by  the  missionaries  was  not  unaffected 
by  his  own  reluctant  attitude.  No  criticisms,  however, 
were  necessary  to  fan  the  flame  of  opposition  at  Jeru- 
salem. The  word  sent  on  from  the  missionaries  them- 
selves was  sufficient  to  horrify  the  straitest  of  the  Jewish 
Christians. 

We  mast  not  forget  that  the  majority  of  the  com- 
munity at  Jerusalem  were  ardent  Jews  as  well  as 
believers  in  Jesus  as  the  Messiah.  They  were  very 
careful  to  walk  accordino-  to  the  ordinances,  blameless. 
They  still  clung  to  the  Jewish  idea  that  salvation  was 
to  be  granted  only  to  those  who  were  actuallv  Jews  or 
to  those  who  became  as  like  them  as  possible  in  spirit 
and  attitude.  Such  did  not  relish  the  letHng  down  of 
barriers  in  the  wholesale  fashion  practiced  by  Paul  and 
Barnabas,  who  seemed  to  make  it  as  easy  for  a  rank 
outsider  without  instruction  to  enter  the  kingdom  of 
God  as  it  was  for  one  of  Jewish  training.     They  even 


Chapter  18.     The  Council  at  Jerusale 


m 


67 


seemed  to  be  advising  the  Jews  who  lived  in  Gentile 
countries  "to  forsake  Moses  and  not  to  circumcise  their 
children."  Of  course  such  charges  were  untrue,  but 
they  were  believed  in  the  general  excitement. 

Certain  zealous  conservatives  journeyed  down  to 
Antioch  in  order  to  bear  testimony  to  the  truth.  They 
were  in  earnest,  had  the  prestige  of  coming  from  the 
center  of  Christendom,  presumably  reflected  the  views 
of  all  there,  including  the  apostles,  and  created  at  once 
much  trouble.  Paul  and  Barnabas  were  not  men  who 
would  permit  such  declarations  to  go  unchallenged. 
They  had  at  least  the  visible  tokens  of  the  indwelling 
of  the  Holy  Spirit  in  the  hearts  of  their  Greek  or  Gala- 
tian  converts  to  strengthen  their  own  convictions  and 
confirm  their  policy,  and  to  them  this  seemed  clearly  to 
supersede  any  other 
authority.  Hence  they 
sturdily  resisted  the 
argument  of  the  Juda- 
izers,  until  the  per- 
p  1  e  X  e  d  church  at 
Antioch  deputed  the 
two  evangelists  and 
some  others  unnamed 
to  go  to  Jerusalem  and 
have  the  question  set- 
tled there  before  the 
Twelve. 

According  to  Gala- 
tians,  second  chapter, 
Paul  at  one  time 
went  up  to   Jerusalem 


Paul,  the  Cliampioii  of  Christian  Liberty. 

By  Raphael. 


with  Barnabas  for  a  private 
conference  with  the  leaders,  his  purpose  being  to  make 
sure  that  they  were  in  reasonable  sympathy  with  his 
plans  of  evangelization.  He  took  along  Titug  as  an 
object  lesson  of  the  obvious  fact  that  a  Gentile  could 
become  a  Christian.  In  spite  of  the  opposition  of  cer- 
tain intruders  of  legalistic  temperament,  these  leaders 
were  large-minded  and  generous.     They  saw  that  Paul 


68  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

was  by  nature  and  training  the  herald  of  a  Gentile 
gospel,  a  work  which  their  own  predilections  and  heri- 
tage made  very  difficult  for  them.  They  indorsed  his 
purpose,  only  urging  that  he  instruct  his  converts  to 
remember  the  poor. 

Most  authorities  identify  this  visit  with  the  one 
described  in  the  fifteenth  chapter  of  Acts.  Identifica- 
tions are  always  precarious.  It  is  quite  possible  that 
in  Galatians  Paul  refers  to  an  earlier  visit  to  Jerusalem, 
even,  as  Bartlet  thinks,  before  the  visit  of  Acts  11  :  30. 
The  private  nature  of  it  would  have  been  reason  enough 
for  entire  omission  in  the  Acts  narrative,  which  is 
admittedly  meagre  until  we  reach  the  travel  narrative. 
The  question  is  not  one  of  supreme  importance.  Paul 
might  well  have  wondered  how  he  would  come  out  at 
Jerusalem,  had  this  earlier  understanding  with  the 
apostles  never  taken  place. 

It  exhibits  the  large-mindedness  of  Paul  in  an 
attractive  light  when  he  consented  to  go  to  Jerusalem. 
He  was  willing  to  run  the  risk  of  being  misconstrued 
as  one  who  needed  to  'submit  to  the  judgment  of  the 
Twelve,  if  only  he  could  thus  draw  the  two  branches  of 
the  church  together.  His  dearest  wish  was  to  have  his 
Gentile  converts  and  his  brethren  in  the  faith  at 
Jerusalem  see  eye  to  eye. 

All  the  way  up  to  Jerusalem  the  deputation  told 
their  wonderful  story,  to  which  the  simpler-minded 
Christians  in  the  villasfes  responded  with  great  joy. 
This  shows  that  the  Judaizers  were  not  the  real  repre- 
sentatives of  the  church  at  lar^e. 

At  Jerusalem  they  were  received  by  the  whole  com- 
munity of  believers,  v/ho  listened  to  the  stirring  narra- 
tive of  their  experiences.  One  whose  soul  has  been 
thrilled  by  some  great  missionarv  speaker,  describing 
the  things  he  has  seen  and  the  wonderful  works  of  the 
Lord,  can  readily  imajiine  how  Paul  by  his  eloquent 
tongue  moved  the  very  souls  of  all  present.  For  that 
very  reason  the  Pharisaically  trained  auditors  broke  in 
wnlh  the  doelnration  tliat  to  attain  fulnop>  of  Christian 


Chapter  18.     The  Council  at  JenisaUm  69 

experience  these  converts  must  be  made  subservient 
to  the  law.  The  discussion  was  adjourned,  but  only  to 
provoke  an  acrimonious  debate.  If  Lightfoot  is  correct, 
the  experiences  of  Gal.  2 : 1-10  probably  occurred  at 
this  time.  When  the  discussion  had  spent  itself  and  the 
time  for  decision  seemed  to  have  come,  Peter  and  James 
turned  the  scale.  The  former  referred  to  his  own 
experience  that  God  had  accepted  Gentiles,  and  this 
without  waiting  for  them  to  Judaize.  Was  it  right, 
therefore,  to  lay  upon  them  the  wearisome  bondage  of 
Judaism?     Not  so  had  Jesus  taught. 

After  Paul  and  Barnabas  had  emphasized  again  the 
clear  manifestations  of  divine  grace  in  their  experi- 
ences of  Gentiles,  James  summed  up  what  he  saw  was 
the  prevailing  sentiment.  It  was  not  desirable  to  ham- 
per the  coming  of  the  Gentiles  to  Christ,  but  only  to 
urge  them  to  be  scrupulous  to  abstain  from  the  gross 
defilements  which  every  Jew  held  in  horror. 

With  thankful  hearts,  accompanied  by  delegates  who 
would  deliver  the  authoritative  message,  they  returned 
to  Antioch.  Galatians  2:11-21  describes  a  visit  of 
Peter  which  apparently  followed.  Following  Paul's 
example  Peter  without  especial  thought  ate  with  Gen- 
tiles. For  this  the  Jerusalem  church  was  not  quite 
prepared.  They  criticised,  and  Peter  withdrew,  to  Paul's 
indignation.  The  latter  saw  that  the  whole  principle  of 
Christian  freedom  was  involved,  and  the  question  of 
salvation.  There  was  only  one  way  of  salvation,  by 
faith  in  Christ. 

These  incidents  well  exhibit  the  generosity  and  the 
keenness  of  Paul.  He  would  voluntarily  surrender  all 
sorts  of  liberty,  if  such  a  surrender  was  of  value  to  a 
brother  man,  but  he  stood  like  a  rock  for  that  which  he 
believed  to  be  fundamental  truth  and  wavered  in  no 
presence. 


70  The  Aposfolic  Leaders 

Chapter  19.    Paul  in  Troas  and  PhlHppi.    Acts  15:  36— 
16:15.    About  A.  D.  51. 

When  Paul  and  Barnabas  returned  to  Antioch  of 
Syria  it  was  with  the  definite  intention  of  continuing 
their  missionary  labors  in  the  rich  field  which  they  had 
opened.  Their  heart  was  burdened  by  the  thought  of 
the  struggling  churches  which  they  had  founded,  which 
were  in  sore  need  of  comfort  and  encouragement,  and 
perhaps  even  more  by  the  waiting  world,  so  ready  for 
the  Gospel,  to  which  it  would  be  their  privilege  to 
minister. 

It  was  Paul  who  made  the  proposition,  after  a  short 
sojourn  at  Antioch,  that  they  should  at  once  revisit  the 
churches  which  they  had  founded.  Barnabas  was 
willing  but  desired  to  take  Mark  along  again.  Paul 
demurred  at  this,  for  the  possible  reason  that  he  thought 
of  this  revisitation  as  only  a  preliminary  to  a  wider 
work,  necessarily  undefined  in  its  scope.  Mark  had  once 
abandoned  an  expedition  of  this  sort  and  he  did  not 
regard  him  as  dependable.  So  strenuously  did  they 
differ  regarding  ]\Iark  tiiat  they  concluded  to  part  com- 
pany, Barnabas  taking  his  relative,  Mark,  and  sailing 
for  Cyprus,  where  he  was  at  home,  while  Paul  chose  a 
new  companion,  Silas,  one  of  the  two  delegates  from 
Jerusalem  to  the  churches. 

This  separation  was  not  an  unmixed  calamity.  Each 
'  apostle  had  qualities  of  leadership,  which  he  exercised 
thereafter  for  the  benefit  of  the  church.  Moreover, 
Mark  was  apparently  made  more  diligent  and  earnest 
by  reason  of  Paul's  disapprobation.  In  later  days  the 
great  apostle  cherished  for  him  the  deepest  affection 
and  referred  to  him  (Col.  4: 10,  11)  as  of  much  value. 

It  was  no  small  gain  that  Silas  was  added  to  the 
number  of  the  avowed  missionaries  to  the  Gentile  world. 
He  had  probably  given  evidence  of  his  fitness  for  'such 
work,  not  alone  by  his  preference  for  Antioch  over  Jeru- 
salem as  a  religious  home,  but  by  his  tact  and  efficiency 
in  dealing  with  Jewish  Christians  on  the  one  hand  and 


Chapter  19.     Paul  in  Trua^  and  Fhilipjji  71 

with  Gentile  converts  on  the  other.  Like  Paul  he  was 
a  Hebrew  of  high  standing,  held  in  honor  by  the  Jeru- 
salem church  (Acts  15:  22)  ;  like  him  also  Silas  was  a 
Koman  citizen  (Acts  16  :  37).  In  character  he  was  such 
another  as  the  great-hearted  Barnabas,  beloved  of  all 
the  disciples. 

The  two  set  out  for  Galatia  by  the  overland  route, 
visiting  the  churches  of  Syria  and  Cilicia  by  the  way, 
passing  probably  through  the  ^'Cilician  Gates"  and  com- 
ing first  in  order  to  Derbe  and  then  to  Lystra.  At  the 
latter  city  an  event  of  great  importance  took  place. 
Here  lived  Timothy,  a  young  man  of  good  family,  whose 
father  was  a  Greek.  From  his  youth  he  had  been 
trained  in  the  Scriptures  by  his  mother  and  grand- 
mother (2  Tim.  1:5).  Doubtless  he  had  been  a  con- 
vert to  Paul's  earlier  preaching  and  one  of  his  active 
supporters,  and  had  also  been  a  valued  member  of  the 
church  in  his  own  city,  winning  golden  opinions  from 
all  the  Christians  there  and  in  the  vicinage.  This 
young  man  Paul  took  to  be  his  companion  and  helper. 
As  a  preliminary  he  circumcised  him,  not  because  it  was 
an  essential  to  salvation,  but  as  expedient  in  view  of 
their  constant  contact  with  Jews  as  well  as  Greeks.  The 
fact  that  Timothy  submitted  to  it  at  his  age  would 
afford  the  clearest  evidence  that  both  he  and  his  spirit- 
ual father  did  not  despise  the  Abrahamic  covenant, 
and  would  predispose  loyal  Jews  to  listen  to  him.  By 
selecting  Timothy  Paul  added  to  himself  a  loyal  and 
loving  friend,  who  greatly  lightened  his  labors  and 
gladly  shared  his  perils. 

Wherever  Paul  and  Silas  went  in  Galatia  they  deliv- 
ered the  decree  of  the  Jerusalem  council  and  urged  upon 
the  members  of  the  congregations  a  compliance  with  its 
spirit.  Everywhere  they  found  the  churches  in  vigor- 
ous condition,  growing  in  numbers  and  increasing  in 
definiteness  and  fulness  of  faith. 

Thus  the  little  group  passed  through  the  whole 
region  with  which  Paul  at  least  was  so  familiar,  until  at 
last  having  visited  Antioch  of  Pisidia  and  its  outlying 


72 


The  Apostolic  Leaders 


churches  the  question  was  where  they  should  go  next. 
PauFs  hopes  seem  to  have  turned  toward  Ephesus,  the 
most  important  city  of  the  great  province  of  Asia,  but 
in  some  way  it  was  made  clear  that  such  a  visit  was  not 
permitted  by  God.  They  then  planned  to  spend  some 
time  in  the  province  of  Bithynia,  where  later  on  Chris- 
tianity became  so  strongly  planted,  but  again  it  was 
made  clear  that  this  was  not  the  divine  will.  Passing 
therefore  through  Mysia  they  came  to  Troas,  a  Roman 
colony  and  important  port  of  entry  in  northwestern 
Asia  Minor. 

The  reason  that  led  Paul  to  go  to  Troas  is  not  made 
clear  bv  the  narrative,  but  the  reason  that  led  God  to 


Troas,  the  Place  of  Paul's  CaU  to  Macedonia. 

send  him  there  is  made  very  plain.  Here  he  met  some 
one  who  became  his  intimate  companion,  and  whose 
diary  of  events  was  one  of  the  most  valuable  sources  of 
information  utilized  by  the  author  of  the  book  of  Acts. 
Not  all  students  agree  in  calling  this  unnamed  com- 
panion Luke,  but  it  seems  at  least  highly  probable  that 
he  was  the  Luke,  the  beloved  physician,  who  played  a 
m.ore  or  less  important  part  in  the  life  of  Paul  there- 
after. 

At  Troas  Paul  had  a  vision  which  defined  for  him 
tlie  purpose  of  God.  He  saw  a  man  of  Macedonia  beck- 
oning to  him  and  asking  that  he  should  come  over  and 
evangelize.  Such  a  vision  may  well  have  accompanied 
and  concluded   a  growing  conviction  formed  through 


Ckayiev  19.     Faal  in  Troas  and  Philiijpi 


'3 


conversations  with  men  who  knew  the  Macedonian  coun- 
try that  the  way  was  absolutely  clear  for  a  fruitful  tour 
of  missionary  service  there. 

With  characteristic  promptness  the  apostle  and  his 
associates  started  for  the  opposite  shore.  The  writer  of 
the  diary  rarely  fails  to  describe  the  voyages  which 
ensued.  They  made  a  straight  run  to  Samothrace,  and 
on  the  day  following  came  to  Neapolis,  the  harbor  of 
Philippi.  Desiring  to  reach  the  latter  city  Paul  did  not 
delay  at  the  seaport.  Philippi  was  an  interesting  city, 
the  leading  one  in  that  division  of  Macedonia,  and 
with  the  status  of  a  Eoman  colonia.  At  this  city  the 
party  made  quite  a  stay,  although  not  as  extended  a  visit 


Heapolis,  PanPs  First  Landinir-place  in  Earope. 

as  they  themselves  desired.  On  the  first  Sabbath  they 
sallied  forth  to  find  the  place  of  prayer  which  served 
in  place  of  a  S3magogue  for  the  small  Jewish  com- 
munity. Here  they  preached  to  an  audience  composed 
m.ainly  of  women,  one  of  whom  was  a  woman  of  impor- 
tance, engaged  in  business  as  the  agent  of  the  purple- 
dyed  garment  makers  of  Thyatira.  With  her  they 
found  a  hearty  hospitality  and  a  very  sincere  faith. 

The  independence  of  Lydia  and  her  occupation 
impress  the  casual  reader  with  surprise.  But  the 
records  of  those  days  make  it  very  evident  that  women 
in  ^>[acodonia  occupied  positions  of  considernhle  frrr- 
dom  and  of  social  influence  combined  with  entire 
Tospoctability.     Moreover,  the  extent  of  commerce  and 


74  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

business  transacted  was  very  great.  The  business  in 
which  Lydia  was  engaged  required  a  good  deal  of 
capital  and  she  was  probably  prosperous. 

Her  household  joined  with  her  in  gladly  accepting 
the  teachings  of  Paul,  and  she  insisted  that  the  mis- 
sionary party  should  become  her  guests. 

The  dominant  impression  of  these  events  upon  the 
writer  of  Acts  was  the  good  guidance  of  God.  Even 
the  deplorable  difference  between  Paul  and  Barnabas 
gave  occasion  for  a  wider  evangelization  and  for  the 
addition  of  two  notable  men  to  the  circle  of  apostolic 
workers.  Moreover,  Paul's  ideas  grew  steadily  broader 
and  more  far-reaching  because  of  a  pressure  which  he 
recognized  as  coming  from  God  and  which  prevented  his 
settling  down  to  tasks  which  seemed  congenial,  con- 
venient, and  promising. 


Chapter  20.    Paul  at  Phillppi.    Acts  16:  16=40,    About 
A.  D.  51. 

One  day  Paul  and  his  companions  were  met 
by  a  slave  girl  who  possessed  the  power  of  sooth- 
saying and  brought  to  her  masters  much  gain  by 
her  predictions.  "Her  unstrung  mind,  rendered  the 
more  abnormal  by  her  very  belief  in  its  own  super- 
natural possession,  was  hyper-acute  in  its  perceptions, 
especially  as  regarded  the  moral  magnetism  of  strong 
personalities.'^  She  felt  strangely  moved  by  tlie  pres- 
ence of  these  great-souled  men  of  God,  and  followed 
them  for  many  days  crying  out,  proclaiming  that  they 
were  true  servants  of  the  Most  High.  Paul  endured 
this  annoyance  stoically  for  some  time,  but  at  last, 
tried  beyond  endurance,  he  commanded  the  spirit  in  the 
name  of  Christ  to  come  out  of  her.  The  result  was 
immediate  and  radical  and  she  ceased  to  be  of  any  profit 
to  her  owners. 


Chapter  20.    Pwul  at  Philip  pi  75 

This  deed  put  the  work  of  the  apostles  into  a  new 
light.  So  long  as  they  had  confined  themselves  to 
preaching  and  social  intercourse  with  a  few  women  and 
others,  no  one  cared  to  oppose  them,  but  when  they 
interfered  with  the  golden  harvests  of  some  of  the 
people,  they  met  with  bitter  opposition  at  once.  The 
men  who  had  owned  the  slave  lost  their  comfortable 
income.  She  no  longer  had  any  power,  and  people 
ceased  to  come  to  her  to  have  their  fortunes  told  or  to 
get  help  in  finding  things  that  they  had  lost.  This 
deprivation  angered  them  and  they  haled  Paul  and  Silas 
before  the  rulers  of  the  city. 

The  charge  brought  against  the  apostles  was  that 
they,  being  Jews,  were  disturbing  the  city  and  urging 
customs  which  no  Eoman  could  receive  or  observe.  It 
was  intentionally  vague,  yet  skilfully  worded.  With 
the  reputation  which  the  city  must  necessarily  sustain  it 
was  a  dangerous  charge.  Paul  and  Silas  were  given  no 
real  chance  to  defend  themselves.  The  praetors  or  mag- 
istrates, spurred  on  apparently  by  the  clamors  of  the 
mob  which  the  accusers  had  raised,  commanded  that 
they  be  stripped  and  given  a  cruel  scourging.  Amidst 
the  confusion  no  protests  could  be  heard,  or  if  heard 
they  were  unheeded.  It  was  the  judgment  of  a  mob, 
not  a  deliberate  trial  by  judges  who  asked  for  evidence. 

There  was  a  widespread  prejudice  against  all  Jews, 
which  made  this  act  of  violence  possible.  Komans  and 
Greeks  alike  felt  for  the  race  only  hatred  and  contempt. 
This  was  due  in  part  to  the  cleverness  and  business 
acumen  of  the  Jew,  which  made  him  the  easy  superior 
of  any  rival  in  commercial  intercourse,  and  in  part, 
also,  to  the  attitude  of  exclusiveness  and  to  the  peculiar 
practices  of  the  Jew.  Only  a  renegade  Jew  could  be  a 
true  companion  for  a  Roman  or  Greek.  So  little 
impression  had  been  made  on  Philippi  as  a  city  by  the 
missionaries  that  the  inhabitants  made  no  discrimina- 
tion whatever  between  Paul  and  Silas  and  any  other 
Jews,  although  tliese  men  represented  a  wholly  different 
attitude  toward  the  world. 


76" 


The  Apostolic  Leaders 


The  fierceness  of  the  mob  and  the  high-handed  action 
of  the  praetors  finds  explanation  in  the  character  of  the 
city.  Its  inhabitants,  whether  native  Greeks  or  Roman 
colonists,  were  people  of  privilege,  who  were  proud  of 
their  position.  The  introduction  of  any  elements  of 
disturbance  they  would  not  tolerate  for  an  instant,  lest 


The  Site  of  PMlippi. 

they  seem  unfaithful  to  the  imperial  trust  and  lose  the 
distinction  in  which  they  took  such  pride. 

After  the  scourging  the  hapless  prisoners  were  thrust 
into  the  prison  with  a  command  to  the  jailer  to  keep 
them  safely.  He  then,  to  make  sure,  placed  them  in 
the  most  secure  portion  of  the  jail,  a  small  cell  without 
openings  except  the  doorway,  and  fastened  their  feet  in 
stocks. 

No  situation  could  be  less  inviting,  but  the  brave 
souls  of  the  prisoners  were  not  depressed.  Eather  were 
they  seeking  strength  in  prayer  and  praise  to  God  when 
an  earthquake  shook  the  prison,  opened  the  doors,  and 
released  the  prisoners.  As  Ramsay  has  remarked,  no 
one  who  is  familiar  with  Turkish  prisons  to-day,  which 
do  not  differ  materially  from  public  prisons  of  the 
Oriental  past,  need  wonder  at  the  results.  The  earth- 
quake by  forcing  the  door  posts  apart  would  cause  the 
bars  to  drop  out,  and  by  loosening  the  stones  in  the 
rough  prison  wall  would  detacli  the  chains  or  stocks 
which  secured  the  prisoners. 

Awed  by  the  earthquake,  the  prisoners  scarcely  had 
time  to  realize  that  they  might  escape  when  the  jailer, 


Chapter  20.     Paul  at  FhiUpiJi  77 

awakened  suddenly,  saw  that  the  outer  door  was  open. 
Bather  than  meet  the  disgraceful  penalt}^  of  remissness 
he  would  have  committed  suicide,  but  Paul  from  the 
inner  room  called  out  that  all  were  present,  and  stayed 
his  purpose.  Calling  for  lights,  and  going  to  the  inner 
prison,  the  trembling  jailer  did  his  best  to  show  his 
reverence  for  Paul  and  Silas.  He  was  convinced  that 
the  maiden  had  spoken  truly  concerning  them,  and  that 
they  were  real  messengers  of  God.  He  was  within  his 
rights  in  treating  them  kindly,  since  they  were  merely 
in  his  custody  until  the  morning.  His  heart  was  now 
open  to  their  teachings,  and  both  he  and  his  household 
became  glad  and  eager  followers  of  the  Lord. 

The  next  morning  early  the  pisetors  sent  their  lictors 
with  an  order  to  release  the  two  prisoners,  which  the 
jailer  transmitted  to  them.  But  to  slip  away  in  such 
fashion,  as  if  glad  to  be  released  and  as  if  accepting  a 
boon,  was  not  the  way  of  Paul.  He  stood  upon  his 
rights,  thinking,  no  doubt,  for  his  converts  and  their 
standing  in  the  city  as  well  as  for  himself.  He  declared 
that  the  praetors  had  violated  all  law  and  justice  in 
dealing  with  them,  free  Eoman  citizens,  without  inves- 
tigating the  charges  against  them.  These  words  hum- 
bled the  praetors  and  caused  them  to  come  in  person  and 
release  the  prisoners,  apologizing  for  their  ovi^n  disre- 
gard of  law.  They  then  urged  Paul  and  Silas  to  leave 
the  city,  with  which  request,  after  conferring  with  the 
disciples  and  exliorting  them  to  remain  faithful,  they 
complied. 

Short  as  was  their  stay  at  Philippi,  it  had  been  worth 
while.  A  church  had  been  founded  which  was  loyally 
and  continuously  active  for  many  years.  The  converts 
were  mostly  Greeks.  One  was  a  business  woman  of 
good  standing,  one  a  jailer,  with  their  dependents.  The 
congregation  with  its  leaders  was  a  striking  illustration 
of  the  universality  of  the  Gospel  of  Christ. 

Apparently  it  enlarged  the  thought  of  Paul  until  he 
began  to  study  the  evangelization  of  the  great  Roman 
world.     The  mob,  the  scourging,  the  unfair  magistrates, 


78  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

were  all  as  nothing  to  sncli  as  lie,  in  view  of  those, 
though  they  were  few,  who  had  become  genuine  follow- 
ers of  Christ. 


Chapter  21.    Paul  at  Thessalonlca  and  Beroea.    Acts  17: 
1  =  15;  1  Thef.2:  1-12.    About  A.  D.  52. 

With  heavy  hearts  the  little  company  must  have  left 
Philippi,  where  they  had  found  so  warm  a  welcome. 
The  loyalty  of  the  church  which  began  in  the  household 
of  Lydia  was  marked  and  strong.  For  years  to  come 
in  manifold  ways  it  ministered  to  the  great  apostle 
(Phil.  1:5;  4:15,16)  in  times  of  need,  not  alone  by 
material  gifts  but  by  manifestations  of  comradeship  and 
interest.  Probably  it  would  be  fair  to  say  that  the 
church  at  Philippi  was  on  the  whole  the  oiie  for 
which  Paul  cherished  the  deepest  affection  and  in  which 
he  placed  the  most  unswerving  confidence. 

They  passed  along  westward  over  the  famous  road, 
the  Yia  Egnatia  of  Horace,  which  was  the  continuation 
through  Macedonia  of  the  Appian  Way.  Had  Paul 
thought  of  it,  he  was  on  his  way  directly  to  Kome.  But 
at  the  present  he  thought  rather  of  the  cities  near  at 
hand.  The  narrative  refers  to  their  passage  through 
Amphipolis  and  Apollonia,  cities  at  natural  stages  of 
the  hundred  mile  journey  to  Thessalonica.  Amphipolis 
was  a  natural  rival  of  JPhilippi,  disputing  with  it  the 
pre-eminence.  It  is  not  at  all  impossible  that  Paul  and 
liis  party  preached  in  these  cities,  'since  Acts  does  not 
purport  to  relate  more  than  a  part  of  Paul's  work. 
Moreover  there  are  references  in  his  letters  to  the 
churches  of  these  parts,  which  fairly  imply  the  found- 
ing of  more  than  three  or  four  in  Macedonia.  But  in 
any  case  the  stop  in  these  cities  could  not  have  been 
long;  the  apostle  was  really  aiming  at  the  political  and 
commercial  center  of  ]\rncodonia. 


Chapter  21.     Paul  at  Thessalonica  and  Beroea     79 


1  ,,. 

^^^^ 

=        '        \- 

J.  k\ 

^iAC   ,  ^  i^^ ' '  — ^3nll^^S 

^S 

»1^^ 

^^m 

^ — ^^ 

Ancient  Clmrcli  in  Thessalonica. 


Thessalonica  was  then,  as  now  and  since  Paul's  day, 
a  city  of  natural  importance.  Founded  about  300  B.  c.^, 
it  became  in  146  b.  c.  the  real  capital  of  the  region. 
It  was  situated  at  the  head  of  the  gulf  of  Salonica,  the 
natural  distribut- 
ing center  for  the 
imports  and  ex- 
ports of  a  large 
and  populous  re- 
gion, a  Roman 
naval  station,  in 
direct  communica- 
tion with  West 
and  East  by  land 
or  sea.  Because  of 
its  support  Octav- 
ius  made  Thessa- 
lonica a  free  city 
ruled   by   its   o\\ti 

assembly  (Acts  17:  6)  and  by  its  own  magistrates,  the 
"politarchs."  WTien  Paul  reached  the  city  he  found 
it  populous  and  prosj^erous.  Being  such  a  commercial 
center,  Thessalonica  had  attracted  a  large  colony  of 
Jews,  who  had  built  a  synagogue.  Naturally  the  mis- 
sionaries went  first  to  this  place  of  advantage  and  began 
to  declare  their  message.  Judaism  seems  to  have  made 
a  better  impression  at  Thessalonica  than  at  Philippi, 
since  through  the  synagogue  Paul  came  into  ready 
contact  with  the  better  classes  among  the  Greeks. 

The  narrative  of  Acts  taken  by  itself  would  perhaps 
lead  the  reader  to  suppose  that  the  apostles  were  at 
Thessalonica  only  three  weeks  or  so.  But  the  fourth 
verse  of  chapter  seventeen  must  cover  at  least  as  many 
months.  Ramsay  thinks  that  the  party  remained  at 
Thessalonica  about  six  months.  Philippians  4:16  and 
1  Thessalonians  1 : 8  clearly  imply  a  far  longer  period 
than  a  few  weeks.  It  is  highly  probable  that  after  three 
Sabbaths  of  preaching  in  the  synagogue,  the  opposition 
of  the  more  rigid  Jews  became  so  pronounced  that  Paul 


So  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

■Ras  obliged  to  carry  on  his  work  in  other  ways.  By 
that  time  he  had  won  the  respect  and  attention  of  the 
enlightened  and  responsive  Greeks  of  culture  and  refine- 
ment, who  had  formerly  repaired  to  the  s}Tiagogue,  and 
thus  was  able  to  inaugurate  a  work  of  real  and  perma- 
nent importance.  He  founded  a  church  chiefly  of 
Gentiles  (1  Thes.  1:9)  which  began  to  co-operate  with 
him  boldly  from  the  very  start.  Into  this  work  Paul 
threw  his  whole  soul  (1  Thes.  2  :  8,  9). 

In  course  of  time  the  hostile  Jews  determined  to 
drive  Paul  from  the  city.  They  persecuted  him  and  his 
converts  (1  Thes.  1 :  6 ;  2 :  2, 14-lG ;  3 :  3)  in  many  ways 
without  avail.  Finally  they  hired  or  excited  a  number 
of  the  rabble  which  is  readily  available  in  any  large 
commercial  center,  gathered  a  mob  and  stirred  up  a 
riot,  assaulting  the  house  of  Jason,  the  leading  member 
of  the  Christian  church,  hoping  to  find  Paul  and  his 
associates  there. 

Not  finding  the  missionaries  at  Jason's  house,  the 
mob  dragged  him  with  other  prominent  Christians 
before  the  politarchs,  as  the  rulers  of  Thessalonica  were 
called.  This  title  is  not  a  common  one  and  its  use 
threw  for  a  long  time  some  suspicion  upon  the  accuracy 
of  the  narrative  of  Acts.  Eesearch,  however,  has  con- 
firmed the  declaration  that  the  magistrates  of  Thes- 
salonica had  this  peculiar  designation. 

The  charge  which  Paul's  opponents  made  before  these 
politarchs  was  one  to  which  the  magistrates  were  very 
sensitive.  It  was  not,  as  at  Philippi,  a  charge  that  they 
were  introducing  religious  innovations,  but  a  much  more 
serious  matter.  It  was  declared  that  the  missionaries 
were  bent  on  treasonable  agitation.  The  Roman  rulers 
were  so  afraid  of  such  political  disturbance  that  they 
punished  severely  the  slightest  indications  of  a  revoH, 
whether  apparent  or  real. 

The  magistrates  seem  to  have  been  unconvinced  of 
the  guilt  of  Paul  and  his  company,  but  they  dared  not 
refuse  to  take  action.  They  came  to  an  ingenious  and, 
for  Paul,  perplexing  solution  of  the  matter.     They  put 


Chapter  21.    Paul  at  Thessalonica  and  Bero^a     Si 

the  leading  Christians  under  bonds  to  keep  the  peace, 
and  dismissed  the  case.  Probably  a  part  of  the  contract 
was  the  departure  of  Paul  from  the  city.  At  least  he 
writes  later  on  to  the  Thessalonian  church  that  "once 
and  again''  he  was  only  prevented  from  visiting  them 
'^y  Satan.''  By  this  he  must  mean  some  device  so 
crafty  and  effectual  that  it  must  have  been  inspired  by 
the  devil  himself.  Such  would  have  been  the  arrange- 
ment that  his  return  would  involve  the  leaders  of  the 
church  in  legal  penalties. 

From  Thessalonica  the  party  went  to  Beroea,  where 
for  a  while  the  work  went  very  well.  The  tfews  of 
Beroea  were  less  jealous  and  unreasonable  than  those  of 
Thessalonica.  They  were  eager  to  consider  Paul's 
instruction.  Here,  too,  many  of  the  better  class  of  the 
Greek  population  became  deeply  interested.  But  when 
the  Thessalonian  Jews  heard  of  Paul's  successful  work 
in  Bercea,  they  sent  emissaries  who  aroused  another 
mob  against  him  and  drove  him  from  the  city,  doubt- 
less under  the  same  charge  that  occasioned  his  expulsion 
from  Thessalonica. 

From  the  letters  written  by  Paul  to  his  churches  at 
Philippi  and  at  Thessalonica  we  know  that  an  exten- 
sive work  was  promoted  at  this  time  and  later  through- 
out the  Macedonian  region.  Either  Paul  visited  more 
than  the  three  cities  mentioned  in  Acts,  or  he  made 
these  cities  the  working  center  of  a  far-reaching  activ- 
ity. Probably  the  latter  was  the  actual  course  of  action. 
It  was  the  method  of  evangelization  organized  by  Paul 
in  the  province  of  Asia  from  Ephesus  as  a  center,  later 
on,  a  method  fully  approved  by  him.  Paul  planted 
himself  in  the  large  commercial  centers,  where  men 
were  always  coming  and  going.  Many  of  them  became 
his  messengers. 

There  is  reason  to  think  that  he  regarded  the  syna- 
gogue preaching  mainly  as  introductory  to  the  wider 
audience  of  thoughtful  Greeks  whom  he  longed  to  evan- 
gelize. For  them  in  particular  he  had  a  message,  which 
set  his  heart  aglow. 


82  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

Neither  he  nor  his  companions  counted  the  rough 
usage  of  these  months  as  an  indication  that  the  work 
should  cease.  It  was  rather  an  indication  that  results 
were  being  achieved  of  such  moment  that  their  enemies 
were  becoming  vindictive.  The  best  evidence,  often,  for 
a  movement  for  evangelization  or  for  reform  is  the 
character  of  the  opposition  it  arouses. 


Chapter  22.    Paul's  Address  at  Athens.    Acts  17  :  16-34. 
About  A.  D.  52. 

By  his  hurried  exit  from  Beroea  Paul  brought  appar- 
ently to  an  abrupt  close  his  work  in  Macedonia.  But 
we  have  seen  evidence  that  it  had  already  been  more 
firmly  established  and  more  broadly  extended  than  the 
meagre  narrative  of  the  book  of  Acts  would  lead  us  to 
infer.  The  great  apostle  had  really  accomplished  a 
second  great  provincial  foundation,  the  one  for  which  he 
afterward  cherished  the  tenderest  affection. 

He  went  to  the  coast,  leaving  Silas  and  Timothy  at 
Beroea,  and  probably  uncertain  as  to  his  own  move- 
ments, but  on  reaching  the  harbor,  twenty  miles  away, 
he  determined  to  go  to  Athens.  From  there  he  'sent 
word  to  them  to  join  him  as  speedily  as  possible.  After 
they  reached  him,  he  despatched  Timothy  to  visit  and 
encourage  the  Thessalonian  church  (1  Thes.  3  : 1,  2)  and 
bring  him  word  again;  and  probably  sent  Silas  on  a 
similar  errand  to  some  other  Macedonian  church,  per- 
]\aps  the  one  at  Philippi,  for  we  are  told  of  their  rejoin- 
ing him  at  Corinth  a  few  weeks  later  (Acts  18:5). 

He  was  practically  alone  at  Athens,  and  had  there 
a  unique  and  humbling  experience.  There  is  some 
reason  to  think  that  he  needed  or  at  least  strongly 
craved  constant  companionship.  He  should  have 
reached  the  city  refreshed  by  the  easy  voyage  of  two 
hundred  miles,  all  the  time  in  sight  of  land  and  with 
noble  mountain  ranges  within  view. 

Paul  could  not  long  remain  quiet.     He  soon  began 


Chapter  22.     FauVs  Address  at  Athens  SS 

to  examine  the  city  in  which  he  found  himself.  He 
was  well  used  to  Greek  cities,  but  Athens  represented  a 
type  which  exceeded  them  all.  Stokes  has  called  atten- 
tion to  the  description  of  Athens  made  by  Pausanias 
within  the  century  following  PaiiFs  visit  and  when  the 
city  was  practially  unchanged  from  its  aspect  in  PauFs 
day.  In  that  century  Athens  was  at  the  very  height  of 
its  literary  glory  and  architectural  splendor.  It  was  the 
leading  university  city  of  the  world,  adorned  by  admir- 
ing devotees  of  science  and  philosophy  with  temples, 
palace  and  statues. 

These  manifestations  of  outward  splendor  and  beauty 
aroused  in  the  great  apostle  a  sort  of  horror  at  the  com- 
pleteness with  which  these  philosophers  and  their  dev- 
otees were  given  up  to  the  contemplation  of  the  purely 
aesthetic  or  the  merely  superficial  aspects  of  the  divine 
life  in  the  world.  He  was  no  stranger  to  university 
ways,  having  been  familiar  with  and  probably  a  student 
of  the  university  of  Tarsus,  reputed  to  be  the  third 
greatest  in  the  world  of  his  day.  But  his  interest  in 
the  academical  glories  of  the  city  was  overmastered  by 
his  indignation  at  its  spiritual  condition.  It  was 
packed  with  images.  He  understood  of  course  the  real 
purpose  of  these  statues,  but  was  made  sick  at  heart  by 
his  realization  of  the  character  of  the  religion  which 
took  delight  in  them.  As  usual  he  began  at  once  to  take 
part  in  the  life  around  him  as  opportunity  offered,  in 
the  synagogues  among  the  Jews  and  the  proselytes,  and 
in  the  Agora  among  those  with  whom  he  could  converse. 
The  Agora  was  the  busy  central  square  of  the  city,  lined 
with  beautiful  porticoes,  adorned  with  priceless  statues, 
crowded  at  all  hours  with  a  varied  group  of  men  of 
every  nationality,  every  one  in  search  of  a  new  sensa- 
tion. Some  of  the  leaders  among  them  were  among  his 
hearers,  and  either  they  or  the  bystanders  made  the 
petulant  remark  that  Paul  was  but  one  who  aped  the 
ways  and  words  of  true  philosophers,  retailing  their 
views  at  second  hand.  Still  others,  misunderstanding 
what  he  said  about  Jesus  and  His  resurrection,  thought 


S4 


The  Apostolic  Leader, 


that  he  was  talking  about  two  more  gods.  Ramsay 
thinks  that  the  recognized  guild  of  lecturers  at  the 
university,  looking  on  Paul  as  a  new  candidate  for  their 
privileges,  then  brought  him  before  the  Areopagus,  or 
council,  which  meeting  not  on  the  hill  necessarily  but 
also  in  the  Agora,  could  take  cognizance  of  questions 
bearing  on  public  teaching  in  the  city.  Before  this 
august  body  they  desired  him  to  state  his  case.  Sur- 
rounded by  these  critics  and  listened  to  by  others  who 
were  idly  interested,  he  responded  to  their  request  to 
explain  more  in  full  his  point  of  view  and  teaching. 

The  passing  remark  of  the  author  about  Athenian 
interest  in  novelties  was  very  keen  and  characteristic. 
They  w^ere  restlessly  inquisitive,  as  their  own  great 
orator,  Demosthenes,  once  declared.  But  Paul  thereby 
had  his  chance,  which  he  was  very  eager  to  improve  to 
the  utmost,  to  declare  unto  them  the  God  whom  he 
served. 

This  Areopagus  address  is  tlie  only  recorded  address 
delivered  to  an  educated  Greek  audience.     It  can  hardly 


The  Areopagas,  Athens. 


have  been  the  only  one,  and  it  must  have  been  a  fairly 
representative  one.  It  was  clearly  an  address  rather 
than  a  defense,  and  made  with  consummate  skill  in  view 
of  the  varieties  of  culture  and  belief  in  the  audience. 
More  than  that,  it  is  a  broad  and  orencrous  recognition 
of  the  best  that  is  in  the  natural  man  along  with  a 
searching  avowal  of  the  realities  of  sin  and  judgment. 


Chapter  22.     Paul's  Address  at  Athens  So 


UrNcozTcjeeai 


r 


Its  reception  gives  the  clearest  evidence  of  the  spiritual 
poverty  of  the  pagan  religious  thought  of  the  time. 

Paul  began  by  expressly  commending  their  religious 
zeal,  their  great  respect  for  things  divine.  He  instanced 
among  other  objects  of  worship  which  had  attracted  his 
notice  an  altar  inscribed  to  "Ax  uxKNOwisr  God/*  and 
declared  that  the  deity 
thus  blindly  and  vague- 
ly worshiped  was  the 
very  One  about  whom  he 
came  to  preach.  He 
was  not,  however,  a 
Deity  to  be  noted  with 
scant  attention.  He  was 
the  one  true  God,  Maker 
of  the  universe,  uncon- 
fined  in  space  or  time, 
in  need  of  nothing  but 
loyal  service  from  the 
world  of  His  creation, 
for  which  He  manifests  a  loving  providence,  thereby 
helping  toward  the  light  of  conviction  and  contact  those 
who  are  stretching  out  feeble  hands  of  faith  and  grop- 
ing their  way  along.  In  Him  men  discover  the  true 
significance  of  life.  Being  His  spiritual  children,  how 
assuredly  ought  men  to  scorn  the  unworthy  repre- 
sentatives of  the  Godhead  suggested  by  the  images ! 
Such  devices  might  have  been  excused  in  the  olden  days 
of  ignorance,  but  now  God  calls  upon  all  men  to  come 
into  direct  personal  relationship  to  Him,  forsaking  all 
that  will  hinder;  and  He  will  hold  men  to  their 
responsibility  for  the  truth  proclaimed  through  Him 
whom  He  raised  from  the  dead. 

Paul's  mention  of  a  resurrection  was  greeted  with 
scofiing  and  evasion.  At  best  he  had  made  a  slight 
impression  upon  his  audience.  The  philosophers 
regarded  him  as  a  religious  enthusiast,  too  much  in 
earnest  to  be  of  a  true  philosophical  temper.  Paul's 
experience  had  enlightened  him  as  well.     He  saw  thnt 


Altar  to  an  Unknown  God. 


B6  TliQ  AiwstoUc  Leaders 

his  audience  took  delight  in  unpractical  discussion,  and 
that  one  who  preached  to  them  must  confine  himself 
to  the  simple  natural  realities  of  sin,  its  bondage  and 
deliverance. 

The  accredited  results  of  his  brief  stay  at  Athens  were 
meagre.  Dionysius  seems  to  have  been  a  man  of  high 
standing,  but  he  had  no  associates.  A  church  was 
ultimately  founded  at  Athens,  but  probably  not  by  Paul, 
who  at  least  makes  no  further  reference  to  one.  On  the 
whole  he  seems  to  have  been  grievously  disappointed  by 
the  outcome  of  his  visit.  He  had  done  his  best,  adapt- 
ing himself  with  dignity,  aptness  and  force  to  those 
whom  he  would  persuade,  only  to  find  them  uncon- 
cerned and  unmoved. 

But  Paul's  extremity  became  God's  opportunity. 
Paul's  very  humiliation  led  him  to  determine  to  deal 
with  all  men  as  needy  sinners  to  whom  he  would  carry  a 
simple  Gospel.  Thus  began  a  new  phase  of  his  won- 
derful career. 


Chapter  23.     Paul's  Long  Stay  at  Corinth        87 

Chapter  23.    Paul's  Long  Stay  at  Corinth.    Acts  18:  1- 
22;  1  Cor.  2:  1—3:2.    About  A.  D.  52'>54. 

Paul  had  probably  intended  to  remain  at  Athens; 
until  his  companions  could  rejoin  him;  but  in  view  of 
the  slight  impression  which  he  was  able  to  make  upon 
that  self-admiring  city,  he  abandoned  his  purpose  and 
went  to  Corinth,  some  forty-five  miles  away,  the  politi- 
cal and  commercial  capital  of  Achaia.  From  the  stand- 
point of  location,  near  the  neck  of  land  between  the 
eastern  and  the  western  seas,  and  of  importance,  Cor- 
inth far  outclassed  Athens,  although  the  latter  never 


The  Acro-Corintlias,  at  Corintb. 

The  temple  of  Venus,  the  chief  deity  of  Corinth,  was  on  the  summit  of  this  hill. 


lost  its  intellectual  ascendency.  Corinth  was  a  city 
devoted  to  business  and  to  pleasure.  It  had  a  popula- 
tion which  represented  the  whole  Mediterranean  shore. 
Externally  very  beautiful  and  abounding  in  material 
wealth,  it  was  noted  for  open,  unblushing  profligacy  of 
every  sort.  The  city  has  been  called  the  London  and 
Paris  combined  of  the  first  century. 

At  Corinth  Paul  found  a  congenial  friend,  Aquila,  a 
Jew  born  in  Pontus,  who  had  long  been  a  citizen  of 
Eome.  The  emperor  Claudius  had  issued  an  edict 
against  the  Jews  which  led  to  their  departure  from 
Rome  and  settlement  m  Corinth.  (Apparently  this 
edict  was  never  fully  executed  because  of  the  numbers 
of  Jews  in  Rome.)     Wliether  Aquila  was  a  Christian 


88  The  Aijostolic  Leaders 

when  in  Rome  is  uncertain,  but  not  unlikely.  His  wife 
Priscilla  was  evidently  a  woman  of  refinement  and  edu- 
cation. She  is  given  a  prominence  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment which  testifies  indirectly  to  her  ability  and 
influence.  The  apostle,  being  largely  dependent  on 
his  own  exertions  for  support,  and  going  for  work  to 
the  haunts  of  the  tent  makers,  came  quickly  and  nat- 
urally into  contact  with  these  fellow  citizens,  who 
proved  to  be  such  helpful  companions. 

As  usual  Paul  began  at  the  synagogue,  preaching 
earnestly  and  aiming  to  persuade  all  whom  he  found 
there,  both  Jews  and  proselytes,  of  the  truth  of  his 
message.  After  a  time  he  was  joined  by  Silas  and 
Timothy  (whereupon  he  became  completely  absorbed  in 
the  work  of  preaching).  Their  message  of  cheer  may 
have  heartened  him  so  that  he  seemed  to  redouble  his 
energies.  In  the  first  epistle  to  the  Corinthians,  Paul 
declares  that  when  he  went  to  Corinth  it  v>^as  to  preach 
a  straightforward,  simple  message  of  salvation  through 
the  crucified  Christ.  All  thought  of  a  philosophical 
presentation  of  truth  he  set  aside,  and  addressed  him- 
self to  the  plain  convictions  of  men  as  he  met  them. 

A  more  than  usually  determined  opposition  among 
the  Jews  was  encountered  by  him  at  this  time.  Some 
of  them  put  themselves  in  bitter  opposition,  so  that 
Paul  at  last  lost  all  patience,  and  with  a  gesture  which 
emphasized  his  idea  he  declared  that  he  would  no  longer 
continue  his  attempt  to  preach  the  Gospel  to  them,  but 
would  turn  with  a  clear  conscience  to  the  welcoming 
Gentiles. 

Paul  no  longer  made  use  of  the  synagogue  ])ut  set  up 
an  opposition  place  of  worship  next  door  with  a  former 
ruler  of  the  synagogue  as  one  of  his  prominent  con- 
verts. Eamsay  remarks  that  Titus  Justus,  his  host, 
was  evidently  a  Latin  of  the  coloni  in  Corinth.  Through 
him  Paul  was  doubtless  able  to  get  a  hearing  among  the 
more  cultivated  citizens  of  Corinth. 

In  due  time  he  had  great  success  in  his  Corinthian 
ministry,  but  it  was  ncbievod  amid  manv  discourage- 


Chapter  2S.     Faurs  Long  >)iay  at  Corintii        89 

ments.  His  vision  of  encouragement  implied  that  he 
had  some  reason  to  fear  opposition.  That  this  was 
exceedingly  bitter  one  would  infer  from  some  of  the 
expressions  in  Thessalonians,  written  by  Paul  at  about 
this  time.  Paul  does  not  refer  more  specifically  to 
these  experiences;  but  his  words  in  First  Corinthians 
2 :  3,  "And  I  was  with  you  in  weakness,  and  in  fear,  and 
in  much  trembling,"  imply  that  they  were  such  as  to 
give  pause  to  most  men,  and  sutiicient  to  aifect  even 
the  stout-hearted  apostle. 

But  as  at  other  critical  moments  of  his  career,  the 
apostle  received  from  God  an  assurance  of  protection 
and  support  which  gave  him  courage  to  endure  and 
labor  on.  With  continuing  coniidence  he  prolonged 
his  ministry  in  Corinth  for  many  months.  It  was  a 
very  successful  ministry.  Paul  won  a  great  number  of 
disciples  and  left  behind  him  a  well-organized  and 
enduring  church.  He  drew  his  converts  from  all  ranks 
of  society,  but  in  the  main  from  the  poor  and  humble. 
''Not  many  wise  after  the  flesh,  not  many  mighty,  not 
many  noble."  As  a  church,  however,  they  included 
some  men  of  capacity  and  influence.  Moreover,,  the 
community  was  able  to  be  generous  to  the  brethren  at 
Jerusalem,  and  therefore  could  not  have  been  poverty- 
stricken. 

Such  success  as  this  among  the  Gentile  population 
so  inflamed  his  Jewish  opponents  that  they  attempted 
to  get  Paul  into  trouble  by  accusing  him  before  the 
judgment  seat  of  Gallio,  the  proconsul  of  Achaia. 
Gallic  was  the  brother  of  Seneca,  the  famous  philoso- 
pher. He  was  an  easy-going,  affable  man,  and  the  Jews 
possibly  supposed  that  he  could  readily  be  deceived. 
But  he  seems  to  have  penetrated  their  motives  and  to 
have  been  imdisturbed  by  their  insinuations.  He  was 
no  country  magistrate,  fearful  of  being  reported  as  lax 
in  maintaining  the  honor  of  the  state.  Declaring  that 
their  hostility  to  Paul  was  a  matter  only  of  concern  to 
them  and  not  in  the  least  of  concern  to  the  empire,  he 
flismissed  the  complaint  and  had  them  driven  from  his 


90  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

coiu-t.  The  discomfiture  of  Paul's  opposers  was  com- 
plete, when  the  Greek  rabble,  delighted  at  their  rejection 
by  the  proconsul,  seized  their  leader,  Sosthenes,  and 
gave  him  a  severe  beating  in  the  very  presence  of 
Gallic,  who  did  not  interfere. 

There  was  considerable  significance  in  the  attitude  of 
Gallio,  It  indicated  nothing  as  to  his  attitude  toward 
Christianity  itself ;  it  merely  exhibited  the  fundamental 
policy  of  Rome  to  give  the  right  to  freedom  of  speech 
and  action,  so  long  as  they  were  consistent  with  loy- 
alty to  Eome.  Such  a  decision  made  Christianity's 
pathway  an  open  one,  and  its  range  as  wide  as  the  civ- 
ilized world.  Eamsay  is  right,  therefore,  in  regarding 
this  episode  as  noting  an  epoch  not  alone  in  Paul's 
career  but  in  the  development  of  Christianity.  It 
created  a  most  valuable  precedent. 

A  while  after  this  episode  Paul  took  leave  of  the 
church  which  had  grown  so  dear  to  him  and  sailed  for 
Syria.  With  him  went  his  two  beloved  and  loyal 
friends,  Aquila  and  Priscilla.  At  the  harbor  of  Cen- 
chreae  Paul  cut  his  hair,  which  had  been  allowed  to 
grow  long  during  the  fulfilling  of  some  vow,  such  as 
people  made  freely  in  his  day.  It  may  have  been  in 
connection  with  his  own  safety  at  Corinth  that  he 
made  it. 

Reaching  Ephesus  he  left  his  companions  there,  but 
before  departing  southward  he  preached  in  the  syna- 
gogue. Much,  no  doubt,  to  his  own  surprise,  the  Jews 
received  him  cordially  and  urged  him  to  remain  awhile. 
He  felt  the  pressure  of  duty,  however,  and  merely 
promised  that  he  would  return.  Going  on  to  Caesarea, 
he  went  up  hastily  to  Jerusalem  and  then  returned  to 
Antioch.  Thus  concluded  a  long,  adventurous  and 
most  fruitful  tour,  which  had  established  two  ne^v 
groups  of  churches. 

The  assuring  vision  in  Corinth  represented  the  domi- 
nant impression  of  the  tour.  His  life  was  beini: 
directed  and  protected  by  a  power  which  exceeded  his 
own  or  tliat  of  his  foes,  to  which  he  could  trust.     No 


Chapter  2^.    The  Epistles  to  the  Thessalonians    91 

wonder  that  his  ideas  broadened  and  his  courage  deep- 
ened. The  world  could  not  resist  a  friendly  attack  of 
such  a  combination. 


Chapter  24.  Paul's  Letters  to  the  Church  at  Thessalonica. 
Selections  from  1  Thessalonians.  Written  from  Cor- 
inth, about  A.  D.  53. 

The  return  of  Timothy  from  Thessalonica,  whither 
he  had  gone  to  visit  the  little  church  and  bring  Paul 
word  of  its  condition,  was  a  joyful  event  for  the  great 
apostle.  It  gave  him  assurance  that  his  work  there  had 
not  been  in  vain,  and  that  although,  as  he  had  feared, 
the  little  Christian  community  had  been  exposed  to 
much  persecution,  it  had  bravely  withstood  all  attacks 
and  even  been  active  in  evangelistic  labors.    He  was 


Thessalonica,  Modern  Salonica. 


Frovi  a  photo'jraph. 


likewise  reassured  in  regard  to  the  personal  regard  of 
the  church  for  him  as  its  spiritual  father.  Its  members 
were  eager  to  see  him  and  were  thoroughly  loyal. 

It  is  evident  that  Timothy  reported  to  Paul  that  the 
Thessalonians  were  discussing  the  question  whether 
those  who  died  before  the  coming  of  the  Lord  would 
share  in  the  glories  of  that  day.  Like  other  Christian's 
of  that  age,  Paul,  in  fact,  being  among  the  number, 
they  were  expecting  a  not  distant  coming  of  Christ  and 
a  conclusion  of  the  existing  world.     They  all  inter- 


92  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

preted  the  declaration  of  Jesus  in  regard  to  His  future 
manifestations  in  a  most  literal  way.  Since  the  Thessa- 
lonian  Christians  believed  that  the  coming  of  the  Lord 
was  not  far  ahead,  they  had  an  additional  reason  for 
mourning  the  death  of  one  of  their  number,  who  would 
thereby  be  deprived  of  the  joy  of  welcoming  his  Lord 
and  the  new  dispensation.  The  immediate  cause  of 
PauPs  delightful  letter  was,  consequently,  the  relief  of 
this  anxiety. 

First  Thessalonians  was  unquestionably  written  at 
Corinth.  The  apostle,  Silas  and  Timothy  (1  Thes.  1: 
1)  are  together.  Timothy  (1  Thes.  3:6)  had  just 
returned  from  a  visit  to  Thessalonica  (Acts  18:5), 
bringing  the  assurances  which  rejoiced  Paul's  heart. 
He  also  reported  the  incidental  trials  which  the  Chris- 
tian community  were  bearing  so  bravely  and  the  per- 
plexities over  which  they  were  concerned.  The 
sympathies  of  the  thoughtful  and  loving  apostle  were 
kindled,  so  that  he  wrote  to  the  church  without  delay 
this  affectionate,  inspiring  letter,  so  ideal  in  its  com- 
bination of  direct  instruction  with  inspiring  suggestion 
that  the  church  could  never  let  it  cease  to  be  used  as  a 
stimulus  to  Christian  growth. 

This  letter  began  with  an  expression  of  thanksgiving 
to  God  for  the  splendid  qualities  which  they  had  man- 
ifested since  their  conversion — their  faith  and  love  and 
steadfastness.  From  the  outset  their  religious  life  had 
been  strong.  They  had  not  merely  listened  to  Paul's 
preaching  with  eagerness,  but  had  shown  in  abundance 
every  proof  of  spiritual  power.  Despite  the  sufferings 
the}^,  like  their  Lord  and  His  apostle,  had  been  obliged 
to  endure,  they  had  been  the  means,  through  their  cheer- 
ful resoluteness,  of  preaching  the  Gospel  wherever 
Greek  speaking  peoples  were  to  be  found.  Paul  had  no 
need  of  telling  elsewhere  the  story  of  their  conversion. 
He  found  it  everywhere  known  that  he  had  won  them 
to  Christ  from  their  idols  and  that  they  had  come  to 
believe  in  the  resurrection  and  the  second  coming  of 
Christ  and  in  His  savin":  work. 


Chapter  ^Jf-.     The  Epistles  to  the  Thessatonians    93 

Paul  then  recalled  the  circumstances  of  his  first  visit 
to  Thessalonica.  It  was  well  that  he  had  come  there, 
bruised  but  not  disheartened,  ready  to  begin  again  the 
work  of  preaching.  No  base  motives  kept  him  at  that 
task,  but  an  assurance  of  a  message  for  men  and  of 
responsibility  to  God  for  its  delivery.  He  did  not 
seek  selfishly  to  please  others  or  to  gratify  himself^  or  to 
claim  the  consideration  which  was  his  natural  due. 
Instead  he  dealt  with  them  tenderly,  imparting,  along 
with  the  message  of  truth,  as  it  were  his  heart  too.  He 
had  no  mercenary  motive,  for  he  toiled  zealously  early 
and  late  to  support  himself.  They  could  themselves 
testify  to  his  pure  and  righteous  life  among  them,  not 
that  of  a  master  with  his  disciples,  but  of  a  father  with 
his  children,  seeking  to  warn,  encourage,  and  enlighten 
them,  training  them  for  adequate  serviceableness  to  God. 

They  had  received  his  message  of  repentance  and 
salvation  as  a  call  from  God  to  righteousness  and  stead- 
fastness, and  had  bravely  endured  all  manner  of  perse- 
cution from  their  countrymen,  such  as  the  Jewish 
Christians  suffered  in  Judea.  Paul  had  longed  to  see 
them  many  a  time,  but  was  prevented  in  a  way  that 
grieved  his  very  soul.  He  had  therefore  despatched 
Timothy  to  visit  them  and  give  them  comfort.  They 
had  reason  to  anticipate  affUction,  and  Paul  feared  for 
their  constancy  as  untried  Christians.  Judge,  there- 
fore, of  his  delight  when  Timothy  reported  such  endur- 
ance and  affection.  It  gave  him  a  new  lease  of  life,  and 
new  occasions  for  thanksgiving.  The  apostle  cherished 
two  great  desires,  to  see  them  face  to  face  and  to  know 
of  their  Christian  perfection. 

The  apostle  then  addressed  himself  to  certain  evils  of 
character  to  which  the  Greeks  were  particularly  liable. 
In  the  fulness  of  Christian  experience  to  which  they 
were  called  there  was  no  room  for  unchastity  or  sharp 
practice.  Brotherly  love  they  had  already  manifested. 
He  exhorted  them  to  make  it  grow  and  to  be  ambitious 
to  exhibit  it  as  a  normal  element  in  a  peaceable,  indus- 
trious and  independent  life. 


94  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

He  theu  referred  to  the  matter  that  was  troubling 
them,  assuring  them  that  those  believers  who  had  died 
would  have  an  equal  share  with  those  who  were  alive  at 
Christ's  second  coming.  The  order  of  events  would  be 
that  first  the  Lord  would  come  from  heaven  with 
accompaniments  denoting  His  power;  secondly  would 
be  the  resurrection  of  the  Christian  dead;  then  those 
who  were  alive  would  be  made  to  enter  into  a  blessed 
and  eternal  fellowship  with  Christ.  That  day  will  come 
unexpectedly,  but  those  who  are  looking  for  it  will  not 
be  afraid. 

Some  valuable  practical  hints  conclude  this  letter, 
which  must  have  been  followed  after  no  long  interval 
by  the  second  one.  Paul's  teaching  in  his  first  letter 
had  apparently  been  misunderstood  in  some  particulars. 
The  Thessalonians  had  inferred  that  the  Lord's  coming 
was  to  be  expected  at  once,  and  in  consequence  some 
liad  ceased  to  work  and  were  giving  themselves  to  gossip 
and  folly  (2  Thes.  3 :  10-12).  Paul  wished  to  set  them 
right  in  the  matter. 

In  the  second  letter  he  corrected  the  misapprehen- 
sions aroused  by  the  first.  They  were  not  to  cease  from 
daily  performance  of  duty  because  of  the  coming  of 
Christ,  but  to  remain  continuously  fruitful. 

These  are  two  remarkable  letters.  They  reveal  the 
great  soul  of  the  apostle.  He  wished  his  spiritual  chil- 
dren to  attain  to  real  heights  of  experience,  to  ''abound" 
in  all  things.  He  believed  in  recognizing  fully  what 
they  had  already  achieved,  as  a  basis  for  encouraging 
them  to  iTiOre  earnest  efforts. 

There  are  many  problems  to-day  just  as  acute.  We 
are  often  tempted  to  cease  our  efforts  for  their  solution. 
Paul's  advice  would  be  to  make  the  best  of  the  situation 
and  to  keep  on  working  and  praying. 


Chapter  2-5.     TJie  Epistle  to  the  Galatians        95 

Chapter  25.  Paul's  Letter  to  the  Churches  in  Qalatia. 
Selections  from  Qaiatians.  Written  about  A.D.  53 
or  54.    Place  uncertain. 

To  set  a  date  for  this  wonderful  letter  of  the  great 
apostle  is  not  easy,  since  the  essential  conditions  might 
have  been  fulfilled  at  various  times.  Paul  somehow 
heard  that  the  Judaizers  (Acts  15:1,24)  had  again 
gotten  among  his  converts  and  were  poisoning  their 
minds  against  him  and  inculcating  their  narrow  ideals 
as  those  which  were  alone  fitting  for  genuine  Christians. 

They  were  declaring  that  he  was  a  sort  of  second- 
hand apostle.  He  had  not,  they  claimed,  been  with  the 
Master  during  His  ministry.  He  had  gotten  his 
information  and  ideas  from  the  others,  who  had  had 
better  advantages.  How  absurd  for  him  to  set  up  his 
opinions  in  contradiction  to  theirs  who  went  in  and 
out  with  Jesus !  Yet  they  all  were  good  Jews,  being 
careful  to  keep  the  law,  while  Paul  was  seeking  to 
ignore  it. 

The  Judaizers  must  have  stated  in  effect  that  while 
there  might  be  salvation  without  circumcision,  yet  a 
first-class  Christian  would  'seek  to  keep  the  whole 
Mosaic  law.  Do  not  all  the  leaders  of  the  church  do 
thus,  they  would  say;  was  not  Jesus  careful  to  main- 
tain the  ordinances  ?  Is  Paul  likely  to  be  right  in  this 
matter,  standing,  as  he  does,  practically  alone? 

These  specious  arguments  had  made  great  havoc  of 
the  group  of  churches  in  Galatia  which  were  so  dear 
to  Paul.  Possibly  he  got  word  of  the  situation  through 
Timothy,  who  went  up  from  Ephesus  and  rejoined  Paul 
in  Antioch  of  Syria.  A  flame  of  indignation  arose  in 
his  soul  over  the  meanness  of  the  tactics  of  his  oppo- 
nents and  the  strange  forgetfulness  of  his  disciples. 
He  wrote  while  at  white  heat  a  letter  to  the  latter 
which  for  directness  and  vigor  and  dignity  could  hardly 
be  surpassed. 

We  must  not  be  unfair  to  the  Judaizers  in  our 
sympathy  for  the  position  which   Paul  took.     It  was 


00  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

but  natural  that  among  the  earliest  Christians  there 
should  be  many  sincere  believers  in  Christ  who  could 
not  forget  their  training  from  childhood  in  the  belief 
that  God  approved  of  men  in  proportion  to  their  strict 
observance  of  the  Mosaic  law.  It  is  easier  for  some 
minds  to  estimate  religion  through  its  forms  than 
through  its  principles.  They  had  adopted  a  new  prin- 
ciple, but  had  never  realized  the  consequences.  They 
did  not  dream  of  denying  that  faith  in  Christ  was 
essential  to  every  Christian,  but  they  insisted  that  the 
keeping  of  the  law  was  just  as  essential  to  the  com- 
pleteness of  the  Christian  life. 

Paul  therefore  had  a  great  doctrinal  point  to  argue 
and  this  was  the  leading  motive  for  his  letter,  but  he 
sought  first  of  all  to  meet  the  petty  insinuations  regard- 
ing himself  by  which  his  opponents  had  sought  to 
weaken  his  influence  over  his  Galatian  converts.  He 
addressed  himself  at  once  to  the  question  of  his  own 
authority,  independence,  consistency  and  fulness  of 
experience. 

The  salutation  (1:1-5)  of  the  letter  was  not  to  be 
misunderstood.  "As  an  apostle  who  received  his  com- 
mission and  his  message  from  none  other  than  the 
risen  Lord  Himself,  I  give  you  greeting  in  the  name  of 
Jesus  Christ,  who  sacrificed  Himself  for  our  thorough- 
going deliverance  from  the  bondage  of  sin."  Paul  thus 
announced  his  double  thesis  that  his  message  was  God- 
given  and  that  it  was  adequate. 

All  students  of  Galatians  have  noted  the  omission  of 
the  customary  courteous  acknowledgment  of  the  divine 
goodness  toward  Paul's  correspondents  or  toward  him- 
self or  the  expression  of  his  thankfulness,  which  we 
find  in  other  letters  written  by  Paul.  The  stress  under 
which  he  wrote  is  indicated  by  the  abruptness  with 
which  he  began.  He  was  amazed  that  they  were  giving 
heed  to  a  new  gospel  and  pronounced  a  curse  upon  any 
one  responsible  for  its  introduction. 

By  an  autol)ioo-raphical  review  of  the  facts  relating  to 
his  first  presentation  of  the  Gospel  to  the  Galatians  he 


Chapter  £o.     The  Epiath  to  ih.c  Galaiians        97 

proceeded  to  show  that  it  was  not  derived  from  any 
earthly  source.  Before  his  conversion  he  was  an  over- 
zealous  Jew.  Immediately  thereafter  he  retired  to 
Arabia.  In  the  third  year  he  made  a  brief  visit  to 
Peter  at  Jerusalem.  In  the  fourteenth  year  he  again 
went  to  Jerusalem  to  confer  with  the  apostles,  and  was 
treated  by  them  as  their  equal,  charged  with  a  Gospel 
for  the  Gentiles,  At  another  time,  when  Peter  at  Antl- 
och  yielded  to  the  criticisms  of  these  JudaizerH,  Paul 
was  independent  enough  to  reprove  him  to  his  face  in 
public. 

Paul's  summary  of  what  he  said  to  Peter  on  that 
occasion  shades  imperceptibly  into  a  general  consid- 
eration of  the  basis  on  which  Gentiles  and  Jews  alike 
would  be  assured  of  salvation.  Its  ideas  are  repeated 
in  the  chapters  which  follow. 

The  apostle  now  addresses  himself  directly  to  his 
hearers.  He  planned  to  show  thom  that,  as  a  matter  of 
fact,  his  Gospel  had  been  effective  in  bringing  them 
into  the  spiritual  life.  "Were  you  not,  0  GalatiaDS, 
converted  at  the  beginning?  Do  you  need  to  begin  tlie 
slavery  of  the  works  of  the  law  in  order  to  attain  a 
higher  stage  of  religious  life  ?  As  Abraham's  faith  was 
counted  to  him  for  righteousness,  so  your  faith  in  Jesus 
was  counted  to  you.  Men  of  faith  are  sons  of  Abra- 
ham. Now  a  covenant,  or  will,  must  be  maintained. 
The  promises  were  made  by  God  to  Abraham  and  to  his 
seed.  His  true  seed  was  Christ,  that  is,  the  whole  body 
of  Christians,  who  are  therefore  the  heirs  of  the  prom- 
ises. The  law  was  given  by  God  as  a  preparation  for 
the  fulfilment  of  the  promises.  It  promoted  a  clear 
consciousness  of  sin.  It  has  been  a  sort  of  guardian 
keeping  charge  of  us  until  the  day  of  Christ  should 
come.  Every  heir  needs  such  guardianship;  moreover, 
as  children  we  must  be  guided  under  rules.  When 
Christ  came  into  the  world,  it  was  to  assure  men  of 
sonship  and  possession.  Should  we  then  voluntarily 
return  to  the  old  bondage?     You  seem  to  be  so  doing. 

"On  my  first  vivit  you  gave  me  an  unusually  cordial 


98  The  Aposlolic  Leaders 

reception  and  rejoiced  over  yonr  good  fortune.  Am  T 
your  enemy  when  I  warn  you  of  faults  existing  among 
you?  These  missionaries  are  zealous  indeed,  but  not 
to  your  real  advantage. 

"You  suppose  that  the  Jews  are  the  true  sons  of 
Abraham  and  that  you  ought  to  make  yourselves  like 
them.  But  the  Scriptures  referring  to  this  must  be 
treated  allegorically,  not  literally.  The  Jews,  enslaved 
to  the  law,  are  the  children  of  Hagar;  we  Christians 
are  sons  of  Sarah  and  children  of  the  promise.  As 
Isaac  was  persecuted  by  Ishmael,  so  are  we  by  the  Jews. 
Our  deliverance  from  sin  was  that  we  might  be  spir- 
itually free. 

"If  you  adopt  circumcision  you  commit  yourselves  to 
the  legal  method  of  salvation  and  must  go  on  to  do  aU 
that  the  law  requires.  Circumcision  itself  is  nothing, 
but  it  proves  that  you  no  longer  trust  to  Christ.  AVlio 
drew  you  into  this  disloyalty  ?  Surely,  no  messenger  of 
God!  I  am  sure  that  you  will  recover  your  sense,  but 
your  leader  will  be  properly  punished.  Would  that  all 
such  might  dispose  of  themselves ! 

"As  Christians  you  are  free.  Be  not,  however,  law- 
less, but  lovingly  helpful.  Those  who  are  disputatious 
cannot  maintain  fellowship. 

^^My  advice  is:  Make  the  Spirit  your  guide  and  you 
will  not  live  the  sensual  life.  They  are  in  conflict,  but 
the  spirit  will  be  victorious.  You  can  see  on  every  side 
the  vices  which  come  from  gratifying  natural  impulse 
and  how  incompatible  they  are  with  membership  in  the 
kingdom.  Notice  also  the  fruitage  of  the  Spirit  which 
needs  no  law  for  its  realization.  Let  us  therefore  de- 
termine to  make  the  spiritual  life  our  own. 

"The  law  of  love  requires  kindly  and  thoughtful 
treatment  of  one  who  has  sinned.  Share  each  other's 
sorrows  and  cares.  Remember  your  obligations  to  all 
men,  particularly  to  the  Christian  brethren. 

"The  Judaizers  desire  your  circumcision  that  they 
may  prove  their  zeal.  I  glory  only  in  the  cross  of 
Christ,  in  whom  is  newness  of  life.     The  proof  that  I 


ChaiJter  26.     rianting  of  the  Gentile  Churvhea     99 

am  His  I  carry  on  my  scarred  body.     His  grace  be  witli 
you  all." 

This  letter  is  scarcely  argumentative;  it  is  rather 
invigorative.  It  appealed  to  their  quickened  con- 
sciences. Its  glorious  keynote  is  Christian  freedom. 
Its  distinctive  purpose  was  to  protest  against  the  idea 
that  Gentile  Christians  would  attain  a  higher  grade  of 
spiritual  development  by  becoming  obedient  to  the  law. 
It  saved  the  growing  Gentile  church  from  shipwreck. 


Chapter  26.     The  Planting  of  the  Qentile  Churches  In 
Galatia,  Macedonia  and  Greece :  A  Review. 

The  series  of  events  from  the  conversion  of  Saul  of 
Tarsus  to  the  end  of  the  second  missionary  tour  cover 
approximately  twenty  years.  Half  of  the  period  was 
spent  in  comparative  obscurity;  during  the  other  half 
he  was  growing  by  leaps  and  bounds  into  great  prom- 
inence as  the  acknowledged  leader  of  Gentile  Christians. 

Looking  backward  from  the  standpoint  of  his  mis- 
sionary service  one  can  see  the  great  value  of  his  train- 
ing as  a  young  man  and  as  a  waiting  disciple.  He 
came  to  know  Judaism  through  and  through,  and  from 
the  inside.  It  was  his  life.  Taught  by  its  noblest 
scholars,  associating  with  its  acknowledged  leaders,  set 
apart  for  its  important  missions,  selected  finally  as  its 
defender,  Saul  was  possessed  of  all  that  Judaism  had 
to  offer  by  way  of  experience  or  instruction.  As  one  of 
its  chosen  champions  he  learned  in  active  debate  against 
men  like  Stephen  to  use  every  argument  which  in  later 
years  he  would  need  to  be  able  to  refute.  As  a  young 
man  favored  by  the  Jewish  leaders  and  populace  alike 
he  became  intimately  acquainted,  stranger  to  Jerusalem 
as  he  was,  with  the  plans  and  feelings  of  those  who 
controlled  Judaism. 


100  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

But  keen  as  must  have  been  the  disappointment  of 
these  leaders  when  they  heard  that  Saul  of  Tarsus  had 
joined  the  hated  sect  of  Nazarenes,  not  even  they  could 
realize  the  significance  of  the  act.  His  conversion  was 
important.  From  it,  as  Ramsay  urges,  he  thenceforth 
dated  the  occurrences  of  his  life.  But  of  even  greater 
importance,  so  far  as  his  future  work  was  concerned, 
were  the  years  which  intervened  before  Barnabas 
sought  him  out  at  Tarsus  and  took  him  to  Antioch. 
These  were  years  of  readjustment  and  ripening,  spent 
mainly  in  comparative  obscurity,  yet  Saul  filled  them 
full  of  experience.  He  went  to  Antioch  a  man  re- 
markably trained  for  service  with  Gentiles  and  Jews 
alike,  for  a  ministry  to  the  churches  or  for  diplomatic 
struggles  with  Jews  or  Judaizers.  At  that  time  he 
could  hardly  have  been  fully  conscious  of  his  mission 
to  the  Gentiles  except  so  far  as  he  realized  that  he  would 
be  unable  to  work  in  Palestine  and  for  his  fellow  coun- 
trymen. Such  a  passage  as  Acts  26 :  17, 18  may 
express  a  commission,  which  began  at  that  moment  to 
be  realized,  although  it  was  not  consciously  executed 
until  after  the  lapse  of  years. 

At  Antioch  Barnabas  and  Saul  worked  with  such 
success  and  were  so  manifestly  fitted  for  evangelizing 
enterprise,  that  in  due  time  the  church  solemnly 
ordained  them  to  go  forth  to  the  regions  beyond. 
Apparently  their  first  plan  was  a  tour  through  Cyprus, 
across  to  the  main  land  and  down  along  the  coast  to 
Antioch  again. 

Now,  at  last,  Saul  was  where  he  belonged.  He  took 
the  leadership  at  once,  became  known  by  his  Gentile 
name  rather  than  by  his  Jewish  one,  and  R-ave  himself 
in  whole-souled  fashion  to  the  work.  Having  com- 
pleted the  tour  of  Cvprus  and  reached  the  Pamphilian 
coast,  the  apostles  determined  for  some  reason,  per- 
haps Paul's  physical  need,  to  jro  to  the  highlands  of 
Pisidia.  In  the  cities  of  this  res^ion,  Antioch,  Tconium; 
Lystra  and  Derbe,  with  their  dopondencies,  Paul  and 
Bnrnnba^J    did    a    notable    and    si<]:nificant    work.     Not 


Chaptered.     Planting  of  the  Gentile  CJiurches      101 

alone  did  they  win  large  numbers  to  the  Christian 
faith,  principally  Gentiles,  but  they  definitely  con- 
cluded that  God  was  setting  them  apart  for  such 
service.  Their  work  was  thorough-going.  It  resulted 
in  the  organization  of  churches  which  were  permanent 
and  vigorous.  Paul  was  no  novice.  He  knew  his  peo- 
ple and  he  knew  his  own  mind.  In  the  letter  to  the 
Galatians  (1:6,8,9,11,12)  he  refers  to  the  Gospel 
which  he  preached  to  them  at  the  first,  that  is,  at  this 
visit.  It  was  the  message  of  redemption  through  the 
crucified  Christ  (Gal.  3:1)  to  the  life  of  the  Spirit. 
They  received  it  and  gave  abundant  manifestations  of 
its  hold  upon  their  lives. 

When  Paul  and  Barnabas  returned  to  Antioch  of 
Syria  with  the  story  of  the  triumphs  of  the  Gospel 
among  the  Gentiles  it  produced  both  rejoicing  and  con- 
cern. The  more  liberal  Christians,  especially  those 
who  were  of  non-Jewish  birth,  were  unfeignedly  glad. 
Those,  however,  who  had  been  trained  as  strict  Jews 
and  still  conformed  rigidly  to  the  law  were  troubled. 
They  rested  upon  the  divine  origin  of  the  law  and  con- 
cluded that  it  would  be  needful  for  all  Gentiles  to 
adopt  its  regulations  in  order  to  become  true  Chris- 
tians. Paul  and  Barnabas  strenuously  resisted  any 
such  declarations.  The  question  was  one  of  prime  im- 
portance and  was  finally  discussed  at  Jerusalem  by  a 
delegation  from  the  Antioch  church,  headed  by  the  two 
apostles.  At  this  council  a  reasonable  spirit  prevailed. 
The  facts  of  the  actual  conversion  of  Gentiles  in  great 
numbers  and  of  their  spiritual  living  could  not  be 
gainsaid.  It  was  therefore  agreed  to  receive  the  Gala- 
tian  Christians  as  true  brethren,  urging  them  merely  to 
refrain  from  practices  which  would  distress  and  outrage 
their  Jewish  associates. 

The  way  was  thus  made  wide  open  for  a  continuation 
of  the  work  of  evangelization.  The  apostles  could  not 
long  remain  at  Antioch,  when  their  duty  was  so  clear. 
Dividing  their  forces  because  of  the  unseasonable  strife 
regarding  Mark,  Barnabas  went  to  Cyprus,  while  Paul, 


102  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

taking  Silas  as  his  comrade  and  selecting  Timothy  as  a 
helper,  began  a  second  great  enterprise.  He  had  planned 
to  preach  at  and  near  Ephesus,  but  God  had  other  plans 
for  him.  Baffled  in  one  purpose  and  another,  he  was 
led  along  through  Asia  Minor  until  he  came  to  Troas, 
where  the  meaning  of  his  experiences  became  clear.  God 
intended  that  he  should  enter  Macedonia. 

The  campaign  in  Philippi,  Thessalonica  and  Bercea 
involved  much  hardship  for  Paul  and  Silas,  but  led  to 
permanent  and  valuable  results.  The  Macedonian 
churches  became  strongholds  of  Christianity,  centers  of 
evangelistic  activity  and  active  supporters  of  Paul  in 
his  work  elsewhere. 

Forced  out  of  that  region  by  circumstances  which  he 
could  not  control,  Paul  went  to  Athens  and  Corinth. 
In  the  former  city,  following  the  precedents  of  his 
varied  life,  he  'sought  to  adapt  himself  to  his  environ- 
ment, and  present  his  message  in  a  way  which  would 
appeal  to  those  of  pliilosophical  temperament.  He  dis- 
covered that  the  philosophers  were  more  concerned  over 
speculative  questions  than  over  a  change  of  heart  and 
life,  and  that  they  would  not  listen  to  instruction  which 
opposed  their  preconceptions.  Departing  to  Corinth, 
Paul  gave  himself  to  a  plain,  straightforward  appeal  to 
the  hearts  of  those  who  heard  him.  His  work  was 
chiefly  among  the  Greeks.  Wlien  the  Jews  sought  to 
bring  it  to  an  end,  they  were  stayed  by  the  clear-sighted 
justice  of  Rome,  whose  representative  would  not  lend 
his  aid  to  persecution. 

Thus  to  three  great  regions,  not  counting  the 
churches  of  Syria  and  Cilicia,  Paul  introduced  the  Gos- 
pel during  a  decade  or  so.  Well  might  he  have  been 
satisfied  with  what  he  had  accomplished,  but  his  vision 
enlarged  with  each  new  conquest  of  faith.  He  now 
realized  that  Christianity  was  of  universal  scope, 
adapted  to  all  peoples.  He  thought  of  Rome,  the  cen- 
ter of  the  political  world,  as  the  natural  point  of 
departure  for  the  world's  evangelization. 

His  experiences  had  taught  hira  that  human  opposi- 


Chapter  27.     Paul  cU  Epliesxis  103 

tion  could  be  absolutely  ignored.  His  was  a  divinely 
directed  work.  At  times  of  crises  his  way  had  been 
and  would  be  made  clear.  In  this  confidence  he 
advanced  serenely  to  face  the  great  crises  of  his  career. 


Chapter  27.     Paul  at  Ephesus,     Acts   18:23  —  19:22. 
About  A.D.  54-56. 

Paul  was  not  a  man  who  could  take  his  ease  when 
duty  called  him,  and  we  may  assume  that  he  did  not 
make  a  long  stay  at  Antioch  after  his  return  thither 
from  his  visit  to  Jerusalem.  He  longed  to  see  his  Ga- 
latian  converts  and  to  be  assured  of  their  willing  re- 
sponse to  his  letter. 

The  apostle  now  saw  his  way  made  clear  to  the 
achievement  of  a  purpose  which  had  been  in  his  mind 
for  years.  He  was  fixed  in  his  intention  to  go  to  Ephe- 
sus and  begin  a  Y\^ork  in  that  active  center  of  trade  and 
religion  in  the  province  of  Asia.  The  region  of  whose 
life  Ephesus  was  the  focus  was  the  one  remaining  im- 
portant region  in  which  the  Gospel  message  was  not  be- 
ing preached. 

Paul  made  his  way  thither  by  way  of  Galatia.  He 
was  surely  received  by  the  churches  and  people  there 
with  overflowing  penitence  and  good  will.  Nothing 
further  do  we  hear  in  Galatia  regarding  the  influence 
of  the  Judaizing  Christians,  who  had  nearly  wrecked 
his  work.  Some  time  may  have  elapsed  before  he  left 
the  Galatic  region  and  betook  himself  to  Asia. 

Meanwhile  an  interesting  series  of  events  was  taking 
place  at  Ephesus.  A  Jew,  named  Apollos,  a  very 
learned  and  eloquent  as  well  as  deeply  spiritual  man, 
had  come  thither  and  taken  a  prompt  and  helpful  share 
in  the  work  which  was  going  on.  He  believed  in  Jesus, 
but  knew  no  more  about  Him  than  he  had  received  from 
disciples  of  John  the  Baptist.     Priscilla   and   Aquila 


104 


The  Apostolic  Leaders 


met  him  and  gave  him  additional  instruction,  which 
he  received  with  sincere  joy  and  great  access  of  power. 
Hearing  of  the  growing  church  at  Corinth,  he  desired 
to  put  his  gifts  to  service  there.  The  Christians  at 
Ephesus  encouraged  him  in  this  resolve,  and  gave  him 
hearty  letters  of  introduction  which  insured  him  imme- 
diate recognition.  Apollos  thus  found  a  congenial  field. 
Corinth  was  such  a  battle  ground  as  he  would  choose. 
He  was  a  trained  rhetorician  and  philosopher,  able  to 
discuss  in  the  fashion  the  Greeks  loved  the  ideas  of  the 
faith.  He  was  thus  able  to  render  a  real  service  to  the 
Corinthian  church,  at  the  very  time  when  it  was  needed. 
He  soon  gained  distinction  as  a  powerful  debater  and 
helpful  preacher. 

When  Apollos  was  well    settled    at    Corinth    Paul 
reached  Ephesus  and  went  to  v.^ork.     His  first  experi- 


^"^'•^>--:::v:;^;^gg^^ig 


Ruins  at  Lpiicius.   Sometimes  Called  tHe  Gate  of  Persecution. 

cjice  was  a  novel  one.  He  met  a  dozen  men  who  called 
themselves  Christians,  but  who  had  not  been  converted 
under  apostolic  preaching.  Like  Apollos  they  vaguely 
believed  on  Jesus  as  the  expected  Messiah.  They  had 
been  baptized,  like  John's  disciples,  unto  repentance  and 
expectancy,  but  had  no  notion  regarding  the  gift  of  the 
Spirit.  Paul,  thereupon,  gave  them  instruction,  so 
that  they  thankfully  received  Christian  baptism  and 
immediately  exhibited  the  customary  tokens  of  tlu' 
Spirit's  presence.  These  two  instances  of  earnest  and 
zealous  bnt  half-taught,  crude  Cliristians  were,  probably, 
only  illustrations  of  a  common  happening. 


Chapter  27.     Paul  at  Epkesus  105 

Following  his  usual  custom  Paul  made  free  use  of 
the  synagogue^  so  long  as  he  was  unhampered  in  his 
work  there.  It  was  after  all  the  ideal  place  for  the 
preacher.  To  the  synagogue  resorted  those  who  were 
keen  to  consider  matters  of  religion  among  the  Greeks 
as  well  as  among  the  Jews.  But  Paul's  bold  and  broad 
preaching  produced  the  inevitable  result.  After  three 
months  the  opposition  of  some  of  the  Jews  became  so 
bitter  and  unfair  that  he  found  it  expedient  to  cluinge 
to  the  adjacent  lecture  room  of  a  teacher  named  Tyran- 
nus.  Since  he  was  vrorking  daily  in  self-support 
(50:34),  his  hours  for  public  disputation  Ramsay  has 
reckoned  as  between  eleven  in  the  morning  and  four 
in  the  afternoon,  these  not  being  the  customary  hours 
of  either  labor  or  trade. 

The  two  years  thus  spent  were  not  merely  years  of 
constant  activity.  They  were  years  of  striking  inci- 
dents. Among  these  the  narrative  of  Acts  has  pre- 
served the  mention  of  two.  So  deep  an  impression  did 
Paul  make  on  the  community  that  it  was  devoutly  be- 
lieved that  he  could  exercise  at  will  all  magical  powers. 
People  even  vied  in  touching  his  person  with  pieces  of 
clothing  which  were  then  regarded  as  possessed  of 
magical  virtue.  Paul  himself  had  healed  some  at  least 
in  the  name  of  the  Lord  Jesus.  Imitating  him,  the 
seven  "sons  of  one  Sceva,  a  Jew  of  high  repute,  under- 
took to  perform  acts  of  healing.  Two  of  them  experi- 
mented upon  a  demented  man  with  serious  personal  re- 
sults to  themselves,  but  to  the  increased  fame  of  Paul. 
Many  of  those  who  had  made  a  living  by  the  practice  of 
magical  arts  publicly  confessed  their  trickery  and  be- 
came devoted  Christians.  Thus  the  repute  of  the  Chris- 
tian body  grew  apace. 

Such  notable  incidents  provoked  brutal  opposition. 
There  can  be  little  doubt  that  these  years  were  the  years 
of  greatest  personal  danger  for  the  intrepid  apostle. 
His  Jewish  opponents  would  stop  at  nothing.  The 
Ephesian  mob  had  no  manner  of  scruples.  When  the 
apostle  remarked  that  he  ^^died  daily,"  he  hinted  at  the 


lOU 


The  AjjoatoUc  Leaden 


humiliations,  the  threatenings,  the  insults,  the  perils  of 
which  he  never  had  any  lack.  Nothing  but  the  hope  of 
a  resurrection  could  nerve  him  for  such  experiences. 

Yet  they  were  years  of  rapidly  extending  influence. 
Paul  was  not  alone  at  Ephesus.  He  nowhere  calls  the 
roll  of  his  loyal  followers  who  were  with  him  there. 
Silas,  Timothy,  Titus,  Sosthenes  he  mentions,  but 
others  were  doubtless  at  his  command,  for  the  work 
carried  on  was  quite  extensive.  As  the  riot  which 
closed  his  career  in  the  city  imputed,  the  missionary 
work  of  the  band  had  made  itself  felt  far  and  wide. 
The  churches  mentioned  in  the  first  chapters  of  the 
Revelation  were  probably  planted  during  this  period  of 
activity  as  well  as  others  nowhere  directly  mentioned. 


^^ 

^m^^m 

J^v^^^^^^ 

^^^^^^^^S 

^ — ~^^ 

sT^^:^!^^^^ 

^^H 

p?^:.^^fc 

1^     ■ 

^^ 

S^^i^S^ffi^ 

Ruins  of  an  Aqueduct,  at  Epliesus. 


At  last  Paul  felt  that  he  had  reached  the  end  of  his 
^vork  at  Ephesus.  He  purposed  to  carry  into  effect  the 
visit  which  he  had  been  planning  to  make  to  Jerusalem, 
the  home  of  Christianity  and  of  the  mother  church.  He 
had  exhorted  each  of  the  national  groups  to  lay  by  lib- 
eral contributions  toward  a  fund  which  they  were  to 
give  in  common  to  the  church  at  Jerusalem.  The  great- 
hearted apostle  longed  to  reconcile  his  converts  and  the 
brethren  at  Jerusalem,  and  to  bring  about  a  willing  and 
hearty  recognition  where  now  there  existed  a  forced  one. 
Tn  order  to  take  the  last  steps  in  the  collection  of  the 
fund  Paul  determined  to  visit  Macedonia  and  Achaia 
before  sailing  for  Jerusalem.     He  had  likewise  the  de- 


Chapter  28.     The  Riot  at  Ephesus  107 

sire  to  come  to  an  understanding  with  the  church  at 
Corinth,  with  which  he  had  been  obliged  to  take  severe 
measures,  stretching  to  the  utmost  his  apostolic  author- 
ity. Having  achieved  thiS;,  he  would  turn  with  a  sense 
of  blessed  relief  to  the  duty  of  drav/ing  together  the  two 
great  wings  of  the  Christian  church. 

These  two  years  reveal  Paul  at  his  best.  During 
this  time  he  probably  wrote  three  letters  to  the  Cor- 
inthians,— our  First  Corinthians  and  two  which  are  lost, 
unless  perhaps  the  last  one  is  included  in  the  present 
Second  Corinthians.  He  was  harassed,  but  not  cast 
down;  opposed,  but  only  to  the  forming  of  broader  and 
finer  purposes;  supported  by  loyal  friends  without  be- 
coming vainglorious;  attested  by  the  manifestation  of 
spiritual  power,  yet  true  to  his  Master.  He  was  great 
in  serviceableness,  declaring  unto  men  "the  whole  coun- 
sel of  God,"  holding  not  his  life  of  any  account. 


Chapter  2S.     The   Riot  at  Ephesus.     Acts   19:23-41. 
About  A.  D.  57. 

One  of  the  most  interesting  and  truly  instructive 
pictures  of  social  life  in  a  great  Asiatic  city  is  afforded 
by  the  narrative  in  the  book  of  Acts  Avhich  describes 
the  great  riot  which  arose  in  Ephesus  ]3€cause  of  the 
successful  work  of  Paul  in  that  city  and  its  extended 
environs. 

Ephesus  was  a  focus  of  all  kinds  of  life.  The  East 
and  the  West  blended  there  as  at  Corinth.  It  was  a  ral- 
lying center  for  the  commercial  and  educational  inter- 
ests and  the  religious  ambitions  of  all  Asia.  A  city 
proud  of  its  culture,  Ephesus  nevertheless  inclined  to 
the  showy  and  the  sensual.  Religion  was  over  in  evi- 
dence, but  was  oi>enly  ministering  to  superstition  and 
sorcerv,  to  selfishness  and  sensationalisju.     Paul  could 


108 


The  Aposiolic  Leaders 


liave  had  but  little  sympathy  with  the  worship  of  Arte- 
mis, or  Diana,  to  use  the  Roman  name  adopted  in  the 
English  text.  Doubtless  he  took  a  more  aggressive  atti- 
tude in  relation  to  the  worship  of  the  goddess  than  he 
had  taken  at  Athens  to  the  general  worship  of  deities  by 
way  of  their  images.  At  all  events  the  worshippers 
of  the  goddess  had  a  real  grievance  against  him. 

The  great  temple  at  Ephesus  was  dedicated  to  the 
goddess  Diana.  Worshipers  at  her  shrine  were  accus- 
tomed to  carry  away,  as  tokens  of  their  attendance  and 
as  amulets  which  would  preserve  their  good  fortune, 
little  shrines,  the  most  perfect  and  costly  ones  exe- 
cuted in  silver,  representing  the  great  shrine  of  Diana 


Temple  of  Diana,  at  Ephesus,  Restored. 

with  the  statue  of  the  goddess  within.  Citizens  and 
strangers  alike,  those  whose  worshipful  motives  were 
unmistakable  and  those  who  were  merely  visitors  to  this 
wonder  of  the  world,  purchased  these  miniature  temples 
and  often  wore  them  as  ornaments.  Those  who  could 
not  afford  the  shrines  made  from  silver  purchased  those 
made  from  terra  cotta  or  marble. 

Various  trades  v/ere  thus  affected  by  the  decline  in 
the  demand  for  the  shrines  by  pilgrims.  It  was  suf- 
ficiently serious  to  awaken  their  genuine  alarm  and 
solicitude.  Each  trade  had  its  well  organized  guild, 
that  of  the  workers  in  silver  being  perhaps  the  most 
important.  Demetrius  was  possibly  the  master  of  thi-^ 
guild  for  the  year,  thus  liaving  the  power  to  convene  it 


Chapt&r  28.     The  Riot  at  Ephesus  lOi) 

for  any  purpose.  To  judge  from  his  opening  remark 
to  his  fellow  craftsmen  he  and  they  were  men  of  sub- 
stantial wealth,  the  source  of  which  Paul  had  seriously 
undermined. 

The  narrative  of  Acts  taken  alone  would  give  au 
inadequate  idea  of  the  extent  of  Paul's  work  in  the 
province  of  Asia,  were  it  not  for  the  report  of  this 
movement  on  the  part  of  Demetrius  and  his  fellow 
craftsmen.  Paul's  missionary  efforts  must  have  taken 
a  far  wider  range  than  the  city  of  Ephesus.  Through 
his  lieutenants  he  evangelized  far  and  near,  founding, 
probably,  not  a  few  churches,  and  developing  a  new 
group  as  distinct  as  either  of  the  other  three  groups  of 
churches  organized  by  him.  No  one  could  anticipate  the 
extent  of  his  work  and  the  remarkable  results  from  it. 
There  was  real  reason  for  the  panic  and  the  determined 
action  of  the  guild  of  shrine-makers. 

The  superstition  of  all  Asia  seemed  to  be  con- 
centrated at  Ephesus,  yet  it  was  the  interests  of  this 
business  which  first  caused  an  alarm,  Demetrius  clev- 
erly aroused  the  fears  of  his  fellow  craftsmen  by 
reminding  them  that  their  continuing  prosperity 
depended  upon  the  persistency  of  the  reverence  paid  to 
the  great  goddess,  the  patron  of  their  city,  and  that  Paul 
had  made  such  progress  with  his  missionary  endeavors 
that  he  was  likely  to  achieve,  not  merely  their  ruin,  but 
the  collapse  of  the  whole  system  of  stately  and  splendid 
worship,  and  the  yielding  by  their  city  of  its  great 
influence  and  prosperity. 

The  city  mob  in  Ephesus  was  readily  stirred  against  a 
Jewish  or  Christian  preacher.  The  rage  of  the  undisci- 
plined, uncontrollable  mob,  acting  on  behalf  of  a  pre- 
tended loyalty  to  home  or  sovereign,  was  always  the 
most  dangerous  foe  which  Christian  leaders  had  to 
face.  It  may  or  may  not  have  been  the  'T^easts  at 
Ephesus"  of  which  Paul  had  written  a  little  earlier,  but 
no  more  dreaded  experience  could  well  have  been  his. 

The  craftsmen,  stirred  to  their  souls  by  the  words  of 
Demetrius,  rushed  out  of  the  guild  hall  into  the  street 


110 


The  Apostolic  Leaders 


exclaiming,  "Great  is  Diana  of  tlie  Ephesians!"  The 
crowd  took  it  up  and  re-echoed  it,  until,  under  the  spell 
of  an  excitement  which  was  irrepressible,  they  rushed 
into  the  great  theatre  capable  of  holding 
twenty-five  thousand  people,  to  hear  fur- 
ther from  their  leaders,  and  plan  con- 
certed action.  On  the  way  they  picked 
up  two  of  Paul's  companions,  known  to 
belong  to  his  company. 

The  apostle  heard  the  uproar  and  with 
a  courage  that  kindled  in  the  face  of  dan- 
ger he  determined  to  enter  the  theatre 
and  say  what  he  could  in  defense  of  his 
friends  and  of  his  policy.  This  would 
simply  have  been  signing  his  own  death 
warrant  in  the  inflamed  condition  of  the 
public  mind,  hence  the  responsible  of- 
ficials called  Asiarchs  sent  word  to  him 
to  do  nothing  of  the  sort. 

These  Asiarchs  were  officials,  partly 
political,  partly  religious.  They  de- 
veloped out  of  the  necessity  of  devis- 
ing forms  of  worship  which  should  have  a  political  value. 
The  Romans  understood  to  the  full  the  art  of  thus  bind- 
ing together  loyalty  and  religious  entertainment.  Each 
province  of  the  empire  was  organized  on  a  politico- 
religious  basis.  Of  the  polity  thus  developed  the  Asi- 
archs were  the  recognized  heads.  They  were  leading 
citizens  given  this  high  position  because  their  elevation 
afforded  them  satisfaction  and  honor  and  thus  com- 
mitted them  to  the  use  of  their  influence  in  maintaining 
loyalty  and  preventing  disturbance. 

The  mob  was  not  in  the  mood  to  listen  to  any  one 
who  could  not  command  their  obedience.  The  Jews 
were  in  fear  that  the  mob  would  turn  upon  them 
and  put  forward  a  countryman,  Alexander,  to  speak, 
but  he  was  not  allowed  to  do  so.  Then  the  secretary  of 
the  city,  a  very  important  official,  realizing  the  growing 
.crn.vitv  of  the  situation,  took  it  upon  himself  to  quell  the 


Diana     cf     the 
Ephesians. 

From  an  alabaster 
ima»e  in  the  museum 
at  Naples. 


Chapter  28.     The  'Riot  ai  Ephemis  111 

populace.     Probably  he  was  the  most  influential  man 

in  Ephesns.  It  was  his  business  to  collect  and  hold  the 
public  revenues  and  to  serve  as  the  medium  of  communi- 
cation between  the  imperial  government  and  that  of  the 
city.  He  was  neither  influenced  by  the  shouting  of  the 
citizens,  nor  blind  to  the  probable  innocence  of  Paul, 
nor  unaware  of  the  serious  consequences  of  the  report  of 
such  proceedings  at  Eome.  Declaring  that  Paul  was 
guilty  of  no  disrespect  either  in  act  or  langu^tge  to  the 
goddess  of  the  city,  and  warning  them  that  the  Eoman 
authorities  were  wont  to  uphold  the  rights  of  every 
citizen  or  visitor,  he  bade  them  disperse  and  quelled  the 
disturbance.  But  Paul  could  no  longer  continue  his 
work  of  evangelization.  He  left  with  as  little  delay  as 
possible  for  Macedonia. 

Rome's  impartial  justice  had  saved  Paul  more  than 
once  in  his  career,  and  it  saved  him  again.  A  strong 
and  stable  government  is  the  foundation  of  all  true 
religious  development,  compelling  men  to  consult  their 
reason  instead  of  their  prejudices,  to  follow  wise  leaders 
rather  than  act  from  impulse. 


112 


The  Apostolic  Leaders 


Chapter  29.     The  Primitive  Church  at  SchooJ.     1  Cor. 
chs,  1°11.    VVrittcu  from  Ephesus,  about  A.  D,  57. 

WMle  Paul  was  busily  engaged  at  Ephesus  he  did 
not  forget  tlue  churches  he  had  founded.  Their  inter- 
ests "were  very  dear  to  him,  and  without  doubt  he  kept 
in  far  closer  touch  with  their  development  than  our  ex- 
isting information  would  indicate. 

The  church  at  Corinth  was  not  far  away  and  for  its 
troubles  he  had  full  sympathy.  It  was  growing  up 
under  conditions  which  menaced  its  fruitfulness  and 
spiritual  life.  In  a  general  vv^ay  every  one  of  the  Chris- 
tian churches  was  exposed  to  such  conditions,  but  not  to 
the  degree  of  that  at  Corinth.    The  Corinthian  church 


Old  Temple  in  Corlntli. 


From  a  photograph. 


This  temple  was  built  in  the  ^seventh  century  before  Christ,  and  was  probably  in 
perfect  condition  in  the  time  of  Paul. 

members  were  mainly  Gentiles  (1  Cor.  12:2)  and  for 
the  most  part  were  recruited  from  the  humbler  classes 
(1  Cor.  1:26).  From  infancy  these  men  and  women 
had  been  accustomed  to  a  freedom  of  speech  and  action 
which  bordered  on  the  immoral.  Corinth  was  noted 
in  that  age  for  its  general  depravity.  A  Corinthian 
was  a  synonym  for  dissoluteness  on  the  stage.  Under 
these  circumstances,  we  need  not  wonder  that  excesses 
of  one  kind  and  another  liad  to  be  dealt  with  in  the 
Jittle  church  in  that  wicked  city,  and  that  the  apostle 
centered  all  his  energy  in  the  struggle  with  them. 
A  variety  of  causes  were  at  work  in  the  church  to 


Chapter  29.     The  Frimitive  Church  of  School    lis 

disturb  its  harmonious  growth.  On  the  one  hand,  as  a 
cursory  reading  of  the  first  few  chapters  reveals,  there 
were  some  who  were  criticising  Paul,  comparing  him 
to  the  eloquent  Apollos  or  denying  his  right  to  have  any 
authority  over  them,  even  questioning  his  apostolate 
(1  Cor.  ch.  9).  Evidently  the  Judaizing  bacillus  had 
made  its  way  across  the  sea  to  Corinth,  and  had  begun 
its  secret  work  of  disparagement  and  the  breaking  down 
of  the  loyalty  of  PauFs  churches  to  their  leader. 

There  was  also  a  manifest  tendency  to  split  into  war- 
ring factions,  each  adopting  the  name  and  striving  to 
uphold  the  claims  to  supremacy  of  Paul,  Apollos  or 
Peter,  while  a  fourth  faction  refused  to  honor  any 
human  leader  and  declared  that  they  foUov/ed  Christ 
only.  Equally  important  to  check  were  the  excesses, 
born  of  untutored  impulse  and  long-prevailing  habits, 
manifested  even  in  religious  exercises  and  in  church 
relations,  while  on  doctrinal  matters  there  was  con- 
tinual necessity  of  simple  instruction.  The  Corinthian 
Christians,  as  Paul  declared,  were  a  set  of  little  chil- 
dren as  regards  Christian  experience.  They  needed 
leadership. 

Practically  no  one  denies  the  authenticity  of  the  two 
epistles  of  Paul  to  the  Corinthian  church.  There  are 
many  who  think  w^e  find  trustworthy  evidence  in  our 
present  epistles  for  the  writing  of  at  least  four  letters 
by  Paul  to  the  Corinthian  Christians.  First  Corinthians 
5:9  points  to  a  note,  at  least,  which  was  sent  to  the 
church  before  its  own  receipt.  Our  First  Corinthians 
would  then  be  the  second  writing  which  passed  from 
Ephesus  to  Corinth. 

The  immediate  cause  of  the  writing  of  First 
Corinthians  is  plain  to  one  who  reads  the  letter.  It 
was  clearly  in  reply  to  one  from  the  church  (7:1)  ask- 
ing for  the  apostle's  opinion  regarding  a  number  of 
questions  which  were  dividing  the  church.  It  had  been 
sent  over  by  the  hands  of  a  deputation  of  three  (1  Cor. 
16 :  17)  and  was  answered  categorically  by  the  apostle. 

But  he  had  also  gotten  word  concerning  the  church 


llJi-  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

from  others  who  had  come  from  Corinth  to  Ephesus, 
and  was  deeply  moved  by  their  report  of  factionalism, 
selfislmess,  excesses,  the  denying  of  the  resurrection, 
and  of  flagrant  immorality  tolerated  by  the  church. 

The  apostle  without  delay  wrote  a  letter  which  placed 
these  problems  in  a  way  for  being  correctly  solved. 
With  great  wisdom  he  did  not  utter  a  fiat  and  seek  to 
compel  every  church  member  to  obey.  He  rather  aimed 
to  reveal  the  broad  spiritual  principles  under  which 
each  particular  difficulty  found  its  free  solution.  Paul's 
idea  of  a  Christian  was  not  one  developed  by  obedience 
to  rules,  but  tather  by  the  application  to  life's  condi- 
tions of  great  principles.  He  would  remove  the  tempta- 
tion to  the  misuse  of  the  body  by  exalting  it  as  a  temple 
of  the  Holy  Spirit,  never  to  be  defiled  in  such  ways. 

The  letter  begins  witli  a  beautiful  salutation,  as 
Christ's  ambas'sador  to  those  who  had  consecrated  them- 
selves to  a  holy  life  of  service,  continuing  with  the  gra- 
cious expression  of  his  joy  in  their  Christian  vitality 
and  enthusiasm. 

Paul  then  turned  at  once  to  the  troubles  of  which  he 
had  been  made  aware.  He  first  gives  attention  to  the 
factionalism  which  was  wrecking  the  unity  of  the 
church  and  sapping  its  strength  (1:10 — 4:21).  He 
met  it  by  declaring  the  pre-eminence  of  Christ,  the 
only  Saviour  of  men.  Paul  could  be  a  father  of  the  lit- 
tle churches;  A  polios  and  Peter  could  build  them  up; 
but  the  crucified  Christ  was  their  one  and  only  Head 
and  Saviour.  He  also  declared  that  by  following  one 
teacher  and  shutting  out  the  others  they  were  impover- 
ishing and  defrauding  themselves,  listening  to  a  re~ 
stricted  message. 

The  next  case  noted  is  one  of  open  immorality, 
(ch.  5)  of  a  type  which  not  even  the  Greeks  would  ap- 
prove. The  sinner  was  a  member  of  the  church.  Paul's 
opinion  regarding  him  was  explicit.  The  guilty  one 
should  be  excommunirater!.  until  he  manifestecl  re- 
pentnnce.  Moreover,  church  members  should  keep  out 
of  the  intimate  companion>hip  of  people  of  loose  lives. 


Chapter  29.     The  FriinUive  CJmrch  at  School     110 

Anotlier  matter  which  required  advice  was  the  grow- 
ing habit  of  taking  disputes  to  the  courts  for  settle- 
ment. The  Corinthian  Christians  were  in  danger  of 
forgetting  that  they  were  brethren  in  Christ  (6: 1-11). 
They  quoted  Paul's  own  glowing  words  of  spiritual 
freedom  in  defense  of  license,  apparently  of  immor- 
ality. But  the  apostle  reminds  them  that  Christian 
liberty  asks  two  questions  rather  than  one.  It  not 
alone  considers  what  may  be  lawful  but  also  what  is 
best.  Our  bodies  belong  to  God;  let  us  glorify  Him 
through  them.  He  who  longs  to  honor  God  will  settle 
the  question  of  fornication  forever. 

The  apostle  then  replies  in  succession  to  the  details 
of  the  questions  of  the  church  in  the  deputation's  let- 
ter. The  first  one  related  to  marriage  (ch.  7).  Paul 
considers  this  from  a  practical  point  of  view.  Those 
who  were  unmarried  and  could  give  themselves  con- 
tentedly and  wholly  to  active  service  he  advised  to  re- 
main single.  This  capacity  for  celibacy  was  a  gift,  but 
one  without  moral  value.  The  married  he  directed  to 
remain  faithful,  not  making  a  change  of  heart  the  ex- 
cuse for  separation. 

The  next  question  was  a  delicate  one.  Corinthian 
society  was  partly  Christian  and  partly  pagan.  Among 
the  latter  every  meal  was  consecrated  by  offering  'some 
small  portion  in  private  or  public.  It  signified  that  the 
meal  was  shared  by  the  god.  All  public  feasts  were 
thus  hallowed.  A  Christian  often  felt  obliged  to  choose 
between  patriotism  and  fidelity  to  his  religious  convic- 
tions. With  regard  to  this  there  was  an  honest  differ- 
ence of  opinion  among  Christians.  Paul  stood  by  the 
doctrine  of  liberty  (ch.  8)  but  tempered  it  by  love.  He 
believed  in  being  guided  by  one's  own  convictions,  yet 
pleaded  for  Christian  considerateness. 

His  own  example  (ch.  9)  was  in  point.  Having  all 
apostolic  rights,  he  did  not  enforce  them,  because  he 
desired  to  preach  the  Gospel  without  remuneration, 
that  he  might  serve  all  men  alike,  and  make  his  own 
salvation  sure. 


116  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

Finally  (10:  l—il:  1)  he  declares  that  the  Christian 
life  is  arduous.  It  is  a  fulfilment  of  earnest  purposes, 
^len  cannot  be  Christians  and  pagans  at  tlie  same  time. 
It  calls  for  clear  vision  and  deliberate  choice.  He  who 
truly  seeks  the  glory  of  God  is  apt  to  do  right. 

The  eleventh  chapter  discusses  two  more  faults  in  the 
church:  the  indecorous  behavior  of  the  women  (vss. 
2-16)  and  the  disorderliness  at  the  celebration  of  the 
Lord^s  Supper  (vss.  17-34).  Each  is  settled  by  a  prin- 
ciple. Let  women  do  that  which  is  seemly.  Let 
brethren  beware  of  turning  the  cup  of  remembrance 
into  a  cup  of  intoxication,  and  remember  that  they  are 
brethren  indeed. 

Thus  in  this  noble  letter  the  great  apostle  shows  the 
Corinthians  the  larger  and  better  way.  He  lifts  them 
out  of  petty  and  selfish  interests  into  the  realm  of  the 
eternal. 


Chapter  30.    The  Supreme  Gift.    1  Cor.  chs.  12-15. 

While  the  whole  of  the  First  Epistle  to  the  Corin- 
thians was  of  great  value  to  those  for  whom  it  was  writ- 
ten, the  closing  chapters  have  more  of  continuing  value. 
In  them  the  apostle  reveals  the  simple  grandeur  of  his 
thinking  and  the  depth  of  his  experience.  It  is  Paul, 
the  constructive  Christian  thinker,  who  could  deal  with 
the  religious  disorders  of  his  day,  admitting  the  ele- 
ments of  sincerity  and  reality,  eliminating  that  which 
was  useless  and  emphasizing  that  which  was  essential. 
He  was  at  his  best  in  a  kind  of  crisis.  The  necessity 
of  making  clear  the  distinction  between  excesses  and 
exercises,  or  between  religious  self-glorification  and 
spiritual  gifts  acted  as  a  stimulus  to  his  mind.  With- 
out criticising  the  cruder  manifestations  of  religious 
zeal,  or  denying  their  legitimacy,  he  revealed  the  larger 
value  of  the  heavenly  grace  of  love,  nnd  quickened  an 


Chapter  30.     The  Supreme  Gift  117 

aspiration  toward  its  complete  embodiment  in  each 
Christian  experience.  Thus  Paul  made  the  crisis  at 
Corinth  the  occasion  for  the  most  remarkable  charac- 
terization of  spiritual  realities  to  be  found  in  Scripture. 

It  has  often  been  said  that  the  First  Epistle  to  the 
Corinthians  is  likely  to  disabuse  the  mind  of  the  reader 
of  to-day  of  the  notion  that  the  primitive  church  was  a 
continuous  love  feast  and  prayer  meeting,  entirely  free 
from  the  troubles  which  harass  the  churches  of  the 
twentieth  century.  It  was  rather  a  body  of  meagerly 
educated  believers  who  had  to  be  trained  slowly  iato  a 
comprehension  of  the  necessity  or  the  value  of  many 
things  which  we  take  for  granted.  The  members  of 
these  churches  had  passed  through  varied  experiences. 
Many  were  slaves;  many  were  very  humble  people,  des- 
perately poor  and  quite  unrefined;  their  religious  ca- 
pacity was  often  limited;  they  varied  greatly  in  the 
methods  by  which  they  gave  their  emotions  expression. 

A  superficial  reading  of  the  epistle  might  lead  one 
to  say  that  the  church  at  Corinth  was  in  need  of  re- 
construction. Jealousies,  partizanship,  the  condoning 
of  flagrant  immorality,  the  growth  of  contentions  at 
law  one  with  another,  profligacy,  license,  indecorous 
behavior,  even  at  the  celebration  of  the  Lord's  Supper, 
questioning  of  the  truth  of  the  resurrection,  rivalry  in 
regard  to  religious  usefulness  and  recognition, — what 
a  row  of  crudities,  contentions  and  evils !  We  have  to 
remember  that  they  were  but  the  manifestations  of  a 
quickened  life,  and  of  a  progressing  redemption  from 
ignorance  and  idolatry. 

Among  such  men  and  women  there  were  certain  to 
be  misjudgments.  They  set  a  disproportionate  value 
upon  some  manifestations  of  spiritual  power.  As  in 
earlier  days  and  in  frontier  communities  in  this  coun- 
try the  quiet  and  meditative  or  the  useful  aspects  of  re- 
ligious life  were  obscured.  People  honored  unduly 
those  who  could  "speak  with  a  tongue.'' 

What  this  really  was  is  not  wholly  clear.  According 
to  our  present  narrative  in  Acts  ch.  2,  it  was  at  Pente- 


Its  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

cost  the  power  of  speaking  in  a  foreign  tongue  so  as  to 
be  intelligible  to  any  one  who  understood  that  language. 
This  ability,  if  given,  seemed  to  be  of  no  permanent 
value.  It  did  not  enable  apostles  to  preach  the  Gospel 
in  other  lands.  It  was  at  best,  and -whatever  form  it 
actually  took,  a  sign  of  possession  by  the  Spirit  of  God. 
So  far  as  we  may  judge  by  the  scattered  references  in 
the  New  Testament  and  by  such  a  letter  as  this,  the  gift 
of  tongues  ordinarily  was  manifested  in  ecstatic  utter- 
ance which  need  not  have  been  wholly  meaningless  but 
was  not  likely  to  be  coherent  or  logical.  Often  it  was 
really  unintelligible  to  the  average  listener,  but  could 
be  given  a  meaning  by  one  in  perfect  sympathy  with  the 
one  who  was  haranguing.  Occasionally,  when  believers 
who  had  the  gift  of  speech  gave  it  freedom  all  at  once, 
it  seemed  (1  Cor.  14:23)  to  one  unused  to  such  out- 
bursts like  a  very  Bedlam. 

The  apostle  did  not  undervalue  the  speaking  with 
tongues  but  sought  to  give  it  an  appropriate  emphasis 
and  setting  in  the  three  wonderful  chapters  of  First 
Corinthians  which  follow  the  twelfth.  He  first  called 
attention  to  a  certain  test  of  the  reality  of  the  spiritual 
experience  back  of  the  gifts.  Absolute  loyalty  to  Jesus 
as  Lord  would  characterize  the  true  Christian  believer. 
This  loyalty  might  manifest  itself  in  various  ways. 
One  man  has  certain  distinctive  traits;  another  man 
may  greatly  differ  from  him;  each  may  be  wholly  sin- 
cere in  his  religious  life  and  truly  devoted  to  Christ. 
True  Christianity  involves  the  free  and  joyous  co-opera- 
tion of  all  for  the  promotion  of  their  common  interests 
and  for  the  glory  of  God.  Each  one  should  have  his 
place  and  his  responsibility.  His  success  should  rest 
upon  his  actual  usefulness  within  his  proper  sphere. 

Spiritual  gifts  are  bestowed  for  edification  of  others, 
not  for  the  exaltation  of  the  individual.  The  ones  most 
to  be  coveted  are  tho?e  which  are  most  profitable. 
Prophesying,  by  which  Paul  meant  either  preaching  or 
the  giving  of  testimony,  is  far  preferable  to  the  speak- 
inof  with  tongues,  because  it  does  good  to  all.     When 


Chapter  30.     The  Supreme  Gift  119 

men  get  together  for  spiritual  stimulus,  each  gift  is 
needed,  and  should  have  expression,  but  in  orderly 
fashion  and  with  Christian  courtesy  and  forbearance. 

Paul  thought  that  all  gifts  were  worth  coveting,  but 
he  longed  to  have  his  disciples  get  the  very  best.  Hence 
he  showed  "a  more  excellent  way"  in  the  immortal 
chapter  about  love.  Without  it  all  other  gifts,  however 
brilliant,  are  profitless.  It  heals  and  sweetens  every 
form  of  life,  it  develops  every  grace.  It  is  always 
effective,  always  stimulating  improvement,  always  hope- 
ful, the  mainspring  of  life,  the  test  of  condition,  the 
reward  of  faithfulness.  Life  can  bring  us  to  no  better 
achievement  than  an  abiding  spirit  of  love.  It  is  the 
best  of  gifts. 

One  other  great  theme  the  apostle  considered  before 
bringing  his  letter  to  a  close.  It  seemed  to  him  a  mat- 
ter of  prime  importance,  which  he  must  not  overlook. 
It  concerned  the  resurrection  of  Christ.  There  were 
those  in  the  church  at  Corinth  who  denied  the  resur- 
rection. To  them  the  apostle  declared  first  that  a  belief 
in  the  resurrection  was  fundamental,  and  second  that 
the  resurrection  as  a  fact  was  adequately  attested 
(1  Cor.  15:1-19).  Those  who  denied  it  declared 
thereby  that  the  apostles  were  false  witnesses,  that 
Christ  Himself  had  not  risen,  that  our  hope  in  Him 
must  be  confined  to  this  life,  and  that  it  was  supremely 
foolish  to  live  a  life  of  privation  and  toil  in  ordei  that 
men  should  be  transformed  in  their  lives. 

Paul  touches  here  on  a  supreme  value  of  the  truth  of 
the  resurrection.  Why  should  men  suffer  now,  unless 
supported  by  the  assurance  of  a  future  inheritance 
unfading  and  uncorruptible?  A  few  men  and  women 
will  spend  their  lives  in  human  service  irrespective  of 
any  other  gain  than  that  of  doing  good  to  those  in 
need.  But  the  majority  of  men  would  live  an  earthly 
life,  reckless  and  sensual,  if  they  had  no  conception  of 
immortality,  no  thought  of  a  life  beyond. 

But  the  question  raises  itself,  what  will  the  resurrec- 
tion life  be  like  ?     Paul  did  not  answer  this  except  in  a 


I'^O  Tha  Apostolic  Leaders 

negative  way,  and  by  analogy.  A  seed  by  death  attains 
its  true  development  into  a  very  different  form.  So 
through  d.eath  may  be  set  free  a  far  better  body  than  our 
souls  have  at  present.  What  that  body  will  be  who  can 
say?  God's  resources  are  infinite.  It  will  know  no 
decay,  no  weakness,  it  will  be  spiritual!  This  new 
life  will  thus  be  the  fruition  of  our  old,  natural  life. 
Thus  death  may  be  faced,  not  merely  with  confidence 
and  courage,  but  with  a  sense  of  triumph.  Wc  are 
entering  upon  an  experience  of  endless  and  boundless 
satisfaction. 

How  could  the  sanity  and  cheer  of  normal  Christianity 
be  more  clearly  manifested  than  in  the  deliberate  judg- 
ment of  these  four  chapters?  It  is  a  service.  It 
calls  for  discriminating  and  unselfish  co-operative  effort, 
which  gives  every  one  his  place,  which  affords  room 
for  the  exercise  of  every  gift,  which  supremely  honors 
usefulness  and  which  deliberately  continues  to  the  end 
in  the  clear  consciousness  of  a  process  of  character 
building  for  eternity. 


C/wpkt  SI.     The  Greal  Collection  121 

Chapter  31 .    The  Great  Collection.    1  Cor.  16 : 1«4 ;  2  Cor. 
ch5.  8,  9.    About  A.  D.  57. 

One  theme  which  never  left  the  mind  of  the  great 
apostle  during  the  controversies  or  triumphs  of  these 
days  was  the  very  practical  question  of  taking  a  generous 
collection  in  the  churches,  which  he  had  been  instru- 
mental in  founding,  for  the  benefit  of  the  poor  of  the 
mother  church  at  Jerusalem.  To  accomplish  this  suc- 
cessfully was  very  near  to  PauFs  heart  during  the  whole 
of  the  third  missionary  tour,  ever  since  leaving  Antioch 
for  Galatia.  In  every  letter  written  by  him  during 
this  period  the  subject  is  mentioned  and  one  or  another 
group  of  disciples  stirred  to  a  generous  emulation.  The 
Galatians  had  already  responded,  the  Macedonian.s  like- 
wise. The  Corinthian  church  had  yet  to  complete  its 
quota. 

It  was  not  uncharacteristic  of  the  apostle  to  connect 
the  matter  with  the  glorious  argument  just  brought  to 
a  close.  His  wonderful  study  of  the  future  life  con- 
cluding with  the  glorious  fact  of  the  Christian's  expected 
transformation  and  victory  over  death,  a  thought  which 
should  stir  him  to  worthily  accomplish  his  life's  work, 
carried  his  readers  far  above  the  atmosphere  of  parti - 
zanship  or  discussion,  of  sensuality  or  social  rivalry,  of 
selfishness  and  pettiness  to  seat  themselves  in  heavenly 
places  in  Christ  Jesus.  He  urged  them  while  still 
influenced  by  the  spell  of  his  appeal  to  have  in  mind  the 
"collection  for  the  saints"  at  Jerusalem. 

The  apostle  must  have  gone  about  this  enterprise  with 
great  hopefulness  but  without  assurance  as  to  the  result. 
No  more  unreasonable,  dogged  and  obstinate  people  ever 
lived  than  the  Jews.  They  were  always  the  more  con- 
firmed in  their  likes  and  hatreds,  because  they  thought 
that  they  were  honoring  God  thereby.  The  average  Jew 
at  Jerusalem  held  a  special  aversion  for  Paul,  because 
he  was  regarded  as  an  apostate,  one  who  was  entrusted 
with  the  confidential  missions  of  Judaism  and  distin- 
guished with  its  honors,  only  to  suddenly  abandon  his 


122  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

own  people  for  the  despised  Christians.  Many  Christian 
Jews  hated  him  just  as  actively  and  bitterly  because 
they  believed  him  to  be  undermining  the  confidence  of 
Christians  in  the  things  ordained  of  God  and  subbtitut- 
ing  for  Judaistic  Christianity  something  entirely  dif- 
ferent and  vastly  inferior. 

Even  the  more  liberally  inclined  realized  that  Paul 
was  not  in  their  class,  that  he  stood  for  a  type  of  think- 
ing to  which  they  were  unable  to  conform,  yet  because 
of  the  manifest  presence  of  the  Spirit  in  the  hearts  of 
his  Gentile  converts  they  were  not  unwilling  to  recog- 
nize them  as  fellow  Christians. 

Paul's  day-dream  was  that  he  miglit  turn  this  latter 
class  into  hearty  fraternization  with  his  disciple;-;  and 
might  at  least  induce  those  who  hated  him  to  assume  an 
attitude  of  passive  approval.  These  enemies,  however, 
he  could  not  fathom.  They  might  urge  that  the  contri- 
bution be  refused ;  they  might  consider  it  a  sort  of  bribe 
in  return  for  which  Paul's  opposition  to  the  law  was  to 
be  condoned  and  the  "equal  standing  of  his  upstart 
churches  acknowledged."  Romans  15  :  31  indicates  the 
uncertainty  of  his  mind  regarding  this.  Possibly  the 
Jerusalemites  would  fail  to  see  in  the  gift  any  brotherly 
love  whatever. 

Yet  he  would,  as  always,  do  his  full  dut}^,  and  let 
God  take  care  of  the  rest.  It  was  while  he  was  making 
this  gift  and  taking  the  utmost  pains  to  conciliate  this 
fierce  Jewish  temper  at  any  cost  to  himself  that  he  lost 
his  liberty.  Doubtless  he  often  wondered  when  at 
Cassarea  in  prison  why  God  should  have  cut  him  off  thus 
abruptly  from  his  active  career  of  service  and  while  per- 
forming the  most  gracious  and  forgiving  of  deeds.  But 
we  who  look  back  over  his  life  and  read  the  rich  treas- 
ure of  Christian  thought  packed  into  the  three  letters 
which  Paul  wrote  at  Rome  after  several  years  of 
enforced  reflection  can  see  rendily  the  reason  in  the 
divine  mind.  Paul's  immediate  purpose  may  never 
haA-e  been  gained ;  curiously  enough,  the  writer  of  Acts 
leaves  us  in  complete  suspense  as  rogarcls  that  matter 


Chapter  81.    The  Great  Collection 


12S 


as  well  as  others  of  much  interest;  but  the  influence  of 
the  scheme  and  its  outworking  on  his  own  character 
and  life  was  not  slight. 

The  collection  had  evidently  been  completed  when 
the  letter  to  the  Eomans  was  written  (Rom.  15 :  25-32). 
Paul  took  great  satisfaction  in  the  fact.  Every  one  of 
his  provincial  churches  had  responded  to  his  appeal. 

We  cannot  wonder  that  the  Christians  at  Jerusalem 
could  be  regarded  as  in  need.  1  Thes.  2 :  14  rather 
implies  a  recent  Judean  persecution.  Jerusalem  gave 
little  opportunity  for  the  earning  of  a  living  except  by 


Iconium 


Philippi. 


Beroea.  Corinth.  Ephesus. 

Coins  from  the  Cities  ia  which  Paul  Gathf-rtd  Money  for  the  Great 
CoUection. 

Several  of  these  are  from  specimens  in  the  British  Museum. 


ministering  to  the  needs  of  those  who  were  there  on 
pilgrimage  or  by  purveying  for  Jerusalemites.  In 
either  case  an  avowed  Christian  was  likely  to  be  at  a 
disadvantage.  Few  of  the  community  were  rich;  many 
of  these  had  been  driven  away  by  persecution  at  one 
time  or  another.  Doubtless  Paul  had  good  reason  to 
think  that  the  gifts  were  really  needed.  Whether  they 
would  be  accepted  was  another  question, 


124  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

Paul  urged  the  Corinthians  more  than  once  to  activity 
in  raising  this  gift.  Many  of  the  members  were  slaves 
without  any  stated  income.  Paul  suggested  that  each 
one  at  his  own  home  should  lay  aside  each  Lord's  day, 
when  the  action  could  be  deliberate,  the  sum  which  he 
could  spare.  He  did  not  himself  wish  to  raise  the 
money  by  appeals  in  person,  but  to  have  it  a  "grace"  on 
the  part  of  those  who  should  give,  a  gift  conscientiously 
made,  a  true  act  of  worship  to  God. 

Paul's  discussion  of  giving  in  2  Cor.  chs.  8,  9  was 
a  marvelous  handling  of  a  delicate  theme.  How  deftly 
he  praised  the  Macedonians  for  their  generosity,  declar- 
ing it  to  be  a  fit  expression  of  their  joy  in  Christ !  How 
beautifully  he  instanced  the  sacrificial  life  of  Jesus  as 
motive  for  Christian  generosity  even  to  the  pomt  of 
self-sacrifice;  how  wisely  he  declared  the  freedom,  the 
readiness  and  the  fraternity  which  must  work  true 
liberality.  He  was  true  to  his  habit  of  giving  great 
reasons  for  ordinary  acts.  To  him  this  Christian  liber- 
ality ranked  as  an  act  of  faith  and  of  brotherhood. 

The  pri\dlege  of  giving  is  an  idea  reserved  for 
Christian  thought.  Men  have  always  been  liberal,  but 
for  selfish  reasons.  If  it  is  to  be  a  "grace,"  there  must 
be  no  other  end  in  view  than  the  promotion  of  the 
kingdom  and  the  blessing  of  men.  Many  have  then 
realized  the  truth  of  the  word  of  our  Lord  which  the 
apostle  quoted  that  to  give  is  far  more  blessed  than  to 
roceive. 


Chapter  S^.     Paul's  Appeal  to  the  Corinthians    125 

Chapter  32,  Paul's  Tender  Appeal  to  the  Church  at 
Corinth.  2  Cor.  4  ;  16  —  6  :  10.  Written  during  the 
second  tour  In  Greece,  about  A*  D,  57. 

No  epistle  written  by  Paul  is  simpler  of  construc- 
tion and  easier  to  comprehend  than  Second  Corinthians, 
yet  none  raises  more  questions  of  an  interesting  if  not 
absolutely  vital  character.  One  who  reads  it  carefully 
notes  with  some  surprise  the  marked  changes  of  theme 
which  indicate  its  three  great  sections.  Each  of  these 
sections  is  complete  in  itself,  and  might  be  taken  quite 
by  itself  as  an  independent  production.  The  first  sec- 
tion consists  of  chapters  one  to  seven  inclusive.  It  takes 
for  granted  a  real  repentance  on  the  part  of  the  church, 
explains  Paul's  failure  to  visit  them  at  the  appointed 
time,  expresses  gratification  over  the  outcome  and 
declares  a  continuing  and  deepening  affection  which 
gives  the  apostle  new  courage  in  his  work. 

There  were  those  in  the  Corinthian  church  who  had 
been  bitter  against  him,  not  hesitating  to  decry  his 
right  to  reprove  its  members,  on  the  ground  that  he  was 
no  real  apostle,  but  only  one  permitted  by  the  apostles 
to  engage  in  mission  work.  While  refuting  this  charge 
Paul  makes  a  noble  declaration  concerning  the  glorious 
work  of  the  minister  of  Christ  Jesus. 

The  second  section  includes  chapters  eight  and  nine. 
It  refers  wholly  to  the  generous  gift  which  Paul  desired 
his  churches  to  make  to  their  poorer  brethren  at 
Jerusalem. 

The  third  section  consists  of  chapters  ten  to  thirteen. 
It  differs  widely  in  tone  and  in  intensity  from  the  sec- 
tion preceding.  Some  students  have  realized  this  differ- 
ence so  keenly  as  to  pronounce  it  impossible  that  Paul 
could  have  written  these  chapters  as  a  part  of  a  letter 
to  which  chapters  one  to  seven  belonged.  These  later 
chapters  take  up  distinctly  the  charges  made  against  the 
apostle  and  with  indignation  and  scorn  elaborate  a 
defense.  While  we  sympathize  with  the  great  leader, 
wounded  to  the  quick  by  the  sneers  of  those  who  once 


120  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

had  been  proud  to  receive  his  notice,  v>e  cannot  but  be 
glad  that  he  was  given  occasion  to  make  so  niagnihcent 
a  self-defense.  Paul's  words  furnish  a  side-light  upon 
his  career  of  the  greatest  value  to  his  biographer. 

These  last  four  chapters  correspond  in  subject  matter 
to  the  letter  to  which  Paul  refers  in  the  eighth  verse  of 
chapter  seven,  a  "stern  and  highly  painful  letter."  One 
of  such  a  character  must  have  been  written  by  the  apos- 
tle between  First  and  Second  Corinthians.  The  ref- 
erences in  the  early  chapters  of  Second  Corinthians 
cannot  fairly  refer  to  the  first  epistle.  This  last  letter 
may  be  represented  by  2  Cor.  chs.  10-13,  or  the  sudden 
change  in  attitude  in  the  epistle  between  chapter  seven 
and  chapter  ten  must  be  explained  by  a  resumption  of 
his  unfinished  task  by  the  apostle  when  in  a  very 
different  and  far  more  militant  mood  than  that  which 
filled  his  soul  when  dictating  the  earlier  chapters.  The 
question  is  in  no  way  important.  Paul  beyond  question 
wrote  at  least  four  letters  to  the  Corinthian  church. 
That  portions  of  two  of  these  letters  became  united  as 
one  is  not  an  impossible  supposition. 

The  great  theme  of  the  first  seven  chapters,  called  out 
by  the  glad  news  brought  by  Titus  to  Macedonia,  is 
apostleship.  Paul  declares  that  there  is  no  need  that 
he  should  commend  himself,  since  his  Corinthian 
Christians  themselves  were  his  living  letters  of  com- 
mendation. They  by  their  lives  were  continuous  testi- 
monials to  his  apostolic  power,  for  they  had  been  its 
result.  God  had  given  him  the  needful  wisdom  and 
strength  and  made  him  adequate  to  his  ministry. 

Thus  the  apostle  comes  to  a  setting  forth  of  his  own 
conception  of  "the  ministry  of  Christ,"  its  character, 
motive,  and  persisting  support  (3:5 — 6:10),  which 
has  given  inspiration  and  confidence  to  generations 
without  number  of  those  who  have  followed  in  his  steps. 

Paul's  idea  of  the  Gospel  which  he  was  preach mg  is 
suggested  by  the  descriptive  terms  he  uses.  He  glories 
in  being  the  minister  of  a  "new  covenant"  (3:6),  not 
of  the  letter  but  of  the  spirit,,  aiming  not  at  mechanical 


Chapter  82.    PauVs  Appeal  to  the  Corinthians  J 2/ 

fidelity  to  God  but  to  impart  real  loyalty.  This  new 
ministry  far  surpasses  tlie  old  because  instead  of 
declaring  penalties  it  aims  to  upbuild  in  righteousness 
(3:9)  and  to  bestow  forgiveness  and  freedom  from  sin. 
The  law  was  glorious,  but  its  glory  is  not  to  be  com- 
pared with  the  surpassing  splendor  of  the  Gospel. 
Moreover,  the  herald  of  the  Gospel  may  speak  without 
reserve  or  concealment.  His  message  makes  for 
freedom.  He  seeks  for  nothing  but  the  truth  as  it  is 
gloriously  revealed  through  Christ.  Contemplating 
that  ideal  he  is  gradually  transformed  into  its  likeness. 

One  with  such  a  theme  has  no  reason  for  cunning  or 
deceit  or  lack  of  courage.  It  is  "veiled"  (4:3)  only 
to  those  who  have  become  self-blinded  through  delib- 
erate sin.  The  heavenly  vision  of  the  glorious  face  of 
Jesus  is  like  the  gift  of  light  on  the  creative  morning 
(4:6). 

My  ministry,  continues  Paul,  is  one  of  weakness  and 
tribulation,  but  these  things  are  cheerfully  endured 
because  of  the  ends  in  view  (4:1-15).  He  who  has  a 
vision  of  God  and  of  the  abiding  glory  of  the  life  to 
come  looks  upon  sufferings  or  disappointment  as  but 
trifles  (4:16-18).  Moreover,  our  certainty  through 
God's  assurance  that  bodily  death  is  but  an  immediate 
entrance  into  the  presence  of  Christ  makes  it  our  one 
ambition  to  do  that  which  is  well-pleasing  to  Him 
(5:1-10). 

"Whatever  my  motives  may  seem  to  be,  I  am  aiming 
to  win  men  to  holy  living.  The  sense  of  Christ's  great 
love  for  men  has  been  the  compelling  motive  of  my 
service,  ever  since  I  saw  that  His  saving  death  meant 
that  they  whose  lives  are  transformed  through  Him 
should  henceforth  live  unselfishly  and  for  His  sake. 
One  who  knows  Christ  in  spiritual  fellowship  observes 
the  world  from  a  new  and  higher  point  of  view.  To 
bring  this  about  is  my  constant  aim"  (5: 11-17). 

This  ministry  is,  therefore,  one  of  reconciliation  and 
fellowship  with  God.  Do  not  cripple  or  thwart  it  by 
unchristian  lives.    "That  it  has  been  sincere  and  zeal- 


128  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

ous  I  have  given  abundant  proof  through  sufferings  and 
toils,  through  the  purity,  gentleness  and  godliness  of 
my  life,  through  the  success  of  my  service  with  men. 
Whatever  my  experiences,  they  have  only  served  to 
quicken  and  define  my  ministry  unto  all." 

These  glorious  yet  touching  words  of  the  apostle  have 
given  inspiration  to  many  a  one  who  has  sought  to 
become  one  that  ministers  to  his  fellow  men.  They  give 
expression  to  the  joy  and  confidence  which  belongs  with 
the  higher  life  of  unselfish  faith.  Their  message  is  for 
every  Christian  man  and  woman  who  is  struggling  to 
serve. 


Chapter  33.    Paul's  Defense  of  his  Apostolic  Authority. 
2  Cor.  11  :  21  — 12:  13. 

The  apostle  Paul  was  one  of  those  who  achieve  the 
aims  which  they  set  before  themselves  but  hesitate  to 
speak  of  what  they  have  done.  No  theme  was  of 
less  interest  to  him  than  the  question  of  his  own  merits. 
But  the  time  may  come  for  any  great  leader,  when  he 
must  make  clear  his  position  and  his  right  to  lead  or 
else  yield  much,  if  not  all,  that  he  has  gained  to  those 
whose  enmity  and  criticism  is  due  to  their  jealousy. 

Paul  did  not  expect  to  have  all  men  adopt  his  point 
of  view.  He  met  honest  opposition  without  complaint. 
He  endured  like  a  soldier  the  hardships  entailed  by  his 
spiritual  campaigns,  serene  in  the  belief  that  his  would 
be  the  ultimate  victory.  He  was  sensible  enough  to 
presume  that  one  who  represented  ideals  such  as  his 
would  meet  with  every  species  of  persecution.  F>ut  he 
was  sensitive  over  accusations  that  raised  any  barrier 
between  him  and  his  converts,  putting  him  before  them 
in  a  false  light. 


Chapter  38.    Paul's  Defense  of  his  Apostleship    129 

His  enemies  in  the  Corinthian  church  had  been  par- 
ticularly bitter  and  contemptible  in  their  metliods. 
The  spirit  of  factionalism  had  led  them  into  habits  of 
disparagement,  the  full  effect  of  which  Paul  encoun- 
tered. The  calumnies  which  he  had  silenced  in  the 
Galatian  churches  were  given  renewed  expression  at 
Corinth  with  additions.  Here,  as  there,  his  enemies 
declared  that  he  was  only  a  second-hand  apostle,  deriv- 
ing his  authority  and  even  his  message  from  the  '^pre- 
eminent'' (2  Cor.  11:5;  12:11)  apostles.  They  thus 
excused  themselves  for  opposing  his  will.  They  went 
on  to  declare  that,  because  of  his  own  conscious  inferi- 
ority, he  feared  to  come  to  Corinth  to  confront  his  oppo- 
nents, as  a  true  apostolic  leader  would  do,  and  that, 
for  the  same  reason,  he  did  not  venture  to  claim  the 
support  which  was  always  accorded  an  apostle.  Thus 
Paul's  own  tenderness  for  the  converts  who  were  dear 
to  him  and  his  generosity  toward  the  church  gave  occa- 
sion for  charges  that  could  not  but  rankle  in  the  mind 
of  one  accused. 

They  also  seem  to  have  spoken  slightingly  of  his 
personality  and  of  his  courage,  saying  that  Paul  was  a 
terrible  fellow  a  long  way  off  from  the  scene  of  action, 
putting  all  manner  of  brave  words  into  a  letter 
(2  Cor.  10: 10),  but  a  humble  and  apologetic  figure  in 
the  presence  of  those  who  knew  him  well.  His  retort 
(10:13-15)  is  a  masterpiece  of  mingled  irony  and 
plain  speaking.  He  was  at  all  events  a  match  for  the 
Corinthian  church. 

Much  of  this  kind  of  talk  the  great  apostle  would 
have  turned  aside  with  a  keen,  well-chosen  thrust, 
serving  to  put  the  argument  of  his  opponents  into  a 
ridiculous  light — a  species  of  verbal  warfare  at  which 
he  was  apt — but  when  they  went  so  far  as  to  decry  his 
spirituality,  declaring  that  he  "walked  in  the  flesh,'' 
pursuing  his  own  worldly  and  selfish  ends,  he  felt  that 
a  crisis  had  been  reached  and  that  he  must  declare 
himself. 

These  chapters  contain,  not  a  defense  of  himself  alone 


130  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

but  an  appeal  to  the  loyalty  of  his  converts.  Paul  was 
sure  that  when  they  gave  themselves  a  chance  to  reflect, 
the  truth  would  be  clear  to  them.  He  wrote  with  no 
vindictiveness,  but  "in  the  meekness  and  gentleness  of 
Christ."  He  was  willing  to  plead  with  them  to  so  order 
their  conduct  that  he  would  be  spared  the  necessity  of 
demonstrating  in  person  the  falsity  of  the  slanderous 
charges  against  him. 

But  the  crisis  indicated  by  these  chapters  was  an 
acute  one.  Severe  indeed  had  been  the  outbreak  of 
hatred  against  Paul  which  impeached  his  honesty  of 
purpose,  stopped  at  no  personal  slander,  and  sought  to 
make  him  a  reprobate  before  his  own  disciples.  It 
centered  evidently  in  a  little  coterie  of  men,  who  had 
possibly  come  in  from  the  outside,  representing  the 
Judaizing  faction  in  the  church  at  large,  had  intrigued 
for  leadership  and  were  seeking  to  undermine  the  loyalty 
of  the  church  at  Corinth  toward  Paul.  His  stirring 
appeal  brought  the  church  to  its  senses  again,  and  put 
an  end  to  the  influence  of  the  disturbers.  Wliether 
these  chapters  are  to  be  counted  as  the  third  episUe  to 
the  Corinthians  and  regarded  as  the  letter  referred  to 
in  the  first  section  (2  Cor.  2:4;  7:8),  the  epistle  of 
commendation  (2  Cor.  3:1),  or  are  to  be  considered  as 
a  part  of  the  fourth  letter  to  the  church,  the  third  hav- 
ing been  entirely  lost,  is  a  question  sufficiently  argued 
in  the  last  chapter. 

Out  of  a  full  heart  bursts  the  apostle's  first  long 
sentence  (2  Cor.  10:1,2).  His  indignation,  its 
restraint,  his  resentment  at  the  imputation  of  cowardice 
and  his  resolve  to  return,  if  need  be,  to  administer  pun- 
ishment are  given  simultaneous  expression.  They 
charged  him  with  "walking  after  the  flesh,"  that  is, 
with  working  for  his  personal  interests.  He  replies  that 
of  course  he  is  but  human  and  vet  that  in  his  Christian 
warfare  he  uses  divinelv  powerful  weapons.  Their  out- 
look had  become  pitifully  narrow  (10:7).  They  were 
forgetting  that  when  it  came  to  evangelistic  compari- 
sons it  was  not  Paul  who  would  be  shamed   (10:8). 


Chapter  38,    PauVs  Defense  of  his  Apostleship .    131 

Without  presuming,  however,  to  claim  a  place  by  the 
side  of  his  detractors  (10:13),  he  would  remind  the 
Corinthians  that  he  at  least  measured  up  to  them,  for 
they  were  his  spiritual  children. 

His  motive  in  rehearsing  his  services  to  the  church 
was  impersonal.  He  feared  that  the  church  would 
accept  another  *%ospeF'  and  cease  to  be  unwaveringly 
loyal  to  Christ.  Except,  perhaps,  in  skill  of  speech,  he 
yielded  precedence  to  no  one.  He  differed  from  other 
teachers  only  in  that  he  supported  himself.  He  did  this 
that  he  might  imitate  the  self-sacrifice  of  Christ.  In 
contrast  to  the  violent  behavior  of  his  critics  toward  the 
church  (2  Cor.  11:19-21)  his  demeanor  may  have 
seemed  weak.  But  in  whatever  they  were  glorying,  he 
surpassed  them,  be  it  in  lineage,  knowledge,  experience, 
sufferings,  or  sympathy  for  all  in  need  (11:22-28). 
Nay,  he  had,  many  years  before,  been  through  a  sacred, 
indescribably  blessed  experience  in  heavenly  places,  a 
secret  of  his  inspiration  for  service,  a  temptation  to 
spiritual  pride,  the  cause  of  his  sharpest  trial,  some 
humiliating  and  recurrent  malady,  the  nature  of  which 
we  can  only  conjecture.  But  along  with  the  painful 
reminder  came  the  cheering  assurance  of  God's  abiding 
grace  and  help  (2  Cor.  12:2-10). 

Once  more  Paul  appeals  to  their  good  sense.  Wherein 
had  his  ministry  failed?  His  one  objective  was  their 
souls'  good.  "Not  yours,  but  you"  (12: 14).  He  also 
declares  explicitly  that  if  he  finds  the  church  on  his 
arrival  upholding  sins  of  self-will  and  self-indulgence, 
he  will  use  his  disciplinary  authority  without  reserve 
(12:19—13:10). 

This  "apology"  is  a  powerful  argument  for  Paul's 
nobility  of  character.  He  exalts  Christ,  not  himself; 
he  glories  in  serviceableness  not  in  supremacy;  he 
reproves,  yet  with  the  gentleness  of  a  true  Christian 
pastor;  he  rejoices  that  God's  grace  keeps  pace  with 
every  affliction.  It  went  to  the  heart  of  his  converts; 
they  remained  thereafter  wholly  loyal. 


132 


The  Apostolic  Leaders 


Chapter  34.  Paul's  Letter  to  the  Church  at  Rome.  Rom. 
1:1-17;  15  :  M°33.  Written  from  Corinth  about 
A.  D.  58. 

Paul  did  not  long  delay  in  following  his  last  letter  to 
the  Corinthian  church  from  Macedonia  to  Corinth. 
There  he  remained  three  months  (Acts  20 :  3).  During 
these  months,  and  probably  during  the  last  one,  he 
wrote  the  wonderful  epistle  to  the  church  at  Rome 
which  an  early  writer  regarded  as  presenting  '*the  whole 
tenor  of  the  Scriptures." 

Ever  since  he  was  at  Ephesus,  Paul  had  been  looking 
forward  to  a  visit  to  Pome    (Acts  19:21).     He  was 


View  in  the  Rjsiaii  Forum 

The  seven  columns  in  thn  foreground  are  ail  that  remains  of  the  splendid  temple  of 
Saturn,  which  was  the  Roman  treasury  in  the  time  of  Paul. 

beginning  to  feel  that  his  pioneering  work  in  the  East 
was  well  along,  if  not  completed.  From  Jerusalem  and 
round  about  even  unto  Illyricum  he  had  "fully  preached 
the  gospel  of  Christ"  (Rom.  15:19).  No  longer  had 
he  any  available  new  territory  (Rom.  15:23)  to  ex- 
plore and  organize — territory,  that  is  to  say,  in  xvhich 
he  was  obviously  the  proper  type  of  missionary. 

He  had  many  reasons  for  desiring  to  visit  Rome.  A 
citizen  of  the  world  in  the  finest  sense  of  that  term,  he 
regarded  the  imperial  capital  as  the  great  center  of  all 
kinds  of  influence.  A  missionary  who  had  labored  with 
such  success  at  Antioch,  Corinth  and  Ephesus  would  be 
strongly  attracted  to  the  queen  city  of  all. 


Chapter  34-     Paul's  Letter  to  the  Bomuns    ISS 

We  do  not  know  how  strongly  he  was  drawn  to  the 
church  itself,  for  we  know  practically  nothing  about  its 
history.  The  traditions  concerning  it  are  certainly  of 
little  value,  while  conjectures  are  varying.  It  may  have 
originated  through  those  who,  when  "scattered  abroad 
went  everywhere  preaching  the  word''  (Acts  8:4). 
Christians  drifted  to  Rome  and  gradually  got  together, 
forming  a  church.  From  the  allusions  in  the  epistle  it 
may  be  conjectured  that  the  bulk  of  the  members  were 
Gentiles,  so  that  without  hesitation  the  apostle  might 
send  to  them  a  letter  of  this  kind. 

The  epistle  is  a  many-sided  one,  hardly  to  be  summed 
up  in  one  word.  It  is  more  of  a  deliberate  unity  than 
any  letter  previously  written.  It  is  the  systematic  expo- 
sition of  the  Gospel  which  he  preached,  not  a  letter, 
really,  so  much  as  a  treatise.  Some  have  attributed 
this  peculiarity  of  Romans  to  the  importance  and  situ- 
ation of  the  church  at  Rome,  it  being  essential  that  it 
should  receive  a  correct  impression  of  all  that  Paul 
stood  for  in  view  of  his  approaching  visit  and  anxiety  to 
be  properly  understood  and  received.  Others,  having 
in  mind  the  perilous  journey  which  he  was  about  to 
undertake,  explain  its  completeness  of  argument  as  a 
sort  of  written  formulation  of  his  views  that  they  might 
be  preserved.  Still  other  interpreters  explain  the  char- 
acter of  Romans  as  an  attempt  on  the  part  of  the 
apostle,  in  view  of  rumors  that  had  come  to  him  (Rom. 
16 :  17-20),  to  forestall  the  divisive  and  disturbing  influ- 
ence of  some  Judaizers  who  were  making  themselves  felt 
in  the  church. 

Whatever  the  reason  that  impelled  Paul,  we  may  be 
profoundly  grateful  that  he  felt  himself  at  this  period  of 
his  career  compelled  to  state  in  exact  and  final  fashion 
his  reasons  for  preaching  salvation  through  Christ  alone. 
For  years  he  had  been  justifving  this  Gospel  to  congre- 
gations without  number.  Though  he  knew  it  not,  his 
controversial  career  was  nearins:  an  end.  The  letter  to 
the  Roman  Christians  put  into  permanent  form  the 
result's  of  these  years  of  argument.     It  gave  an  answer 


134  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

to  the  Jew  who  rested  upon  the  divine  origin  of  the  law, 
and  encouraged  the  Gentile  who  felt  in  his  heart  that 
forgiveness  had  been  given  him  through  the  grace  of  the 
Lord  Jesus.  It  expressed  the  present  and  prevailing 
duty  of  the  Christian  believer.  It  is  and  yet  is  not  the 
greatest  of  the  letters  of  Paul.  The  judgment  of  the 
student  regarding  it  will  be  determined  by  his  bent  of 
mind.  The  admirer  of  a  well-sustained  argument 
regarding  important  problems  in  religion  will  declare 
the  letter  to  the  Romans  a  masterpiece.  Nor  is  it 
devoid  of  deep  feeling  and  grand  enthusiasm.  The 
Paul  who  penned  it  was  not  a  recluse  bending  over  his 
manuscript,  but  a  mighty  pioneer  who  planned  to  win 
the  world  for  Christ.  His  majestic  religious  purpose  is 
as  impressive  as  his  argument. 

As  usual  the  letter  opens  with  an  elaborate  salutation 
and  thanksgiving.  In  the  former  (1:1-7)  Paul  declares 
his  apostolic  call  to  preach  the  Gospel;  in  the  latter 
(1:8-15)  he  recognizes  their  faithfulness  and  expresses 
his  desire  to  work  among  them  with  a  Gospel  message 
which  they  will  welcome,  viz.,  the  opportunity  of  salva- 
tion through  faith  for  every  man  (1:16,17)  whether 
Jew  or  Greek. 

The  apostle  then  exhibits  sin  as  a  universal  fact  to  be 
taken  for  granted,  not  alone  among  the  unevangelized 
heathen  (1:18-32)  but  among  the  instructed  Jews 
(ch.  2).  The  latter  have  an  advantage  (3:1,  2)  but 
their  unbelief  is  unjustifiable  (3  :3-8).  All  men  are 
guilty  in  God's  sight  (3:  9-18),  as  the  Scriptures  imply 
(3: 19,  20).  No  one  can  win  salvation  for  himself  by 
his  works. 

From  3 :  21  to  8 :  39  is  the  positive  argument  to  prove 
that  salvation  is  a  free  gift  of  God  bestowed  through 
faith  in  Christ  alone.  The  faith  method  of  salvation 
was  revealed  by  the  Old  Testament  and  accomplished 
through  Christ  (3:21-31).  Abraham  was  saved  by 
faith,  not  by  works;  and  believers,  his  spiritual  children, 
inherit  througli  faith  not  throudi  the  law  (ch.  4).  The 
nssnrance  of  salvation  slaves  peace  and  hope  and  joy  to 


Chapter  84^    Paul's  Letter  to  the  Romans    135 

every  on^.  It  will  be  made  complete  since  God^s  grace 
outmatches  the  power  of  sin  (ch.  5).  The  Christian  is 
not  thereby  enabled  to  disregard  the  moral  law,  but  as 
he  comes  into  fellowship  with  Christ  he  enters  upon  a 
life  of  holiness  (6:1-14).  His  freedom  from  the  law 
is  not  a  freedom  to  do  wrong  (6  :  15 — 7 :  6).  The  law 
was  merely  a  useful  instrumentality,  not  an  end  in 
itself.  It  reveals  the  character  of  sin  but  cannot  deliver 
men  from  sin  (7:  7-25).  The  Christian,  living  the  life 
of  the  Spirit,  is  assured  peace  and  immortality.  All 
the  resources  of  God's  grace  are  his  (ch.  8). 

Was  God's  providential  relationship  to  Israel  a 
failure?  Only  as  Israel  has  failed  to  accept  the 
Messiah.  But  the  true  Israel  is  the  result  of  a  historic 
selective  process,  and  God  in  rejecting  the  nation  is  not 
refusing  to  honor  His  pledge  (9:1-29).  The  Jewish 
race  sought  salvation  through  works  and  rejected  the 
easy  conditions  of  faith  (9:30—10:21).  Their  atti- 
tude hastened  the  salvation  of  the  Gentile  world,  that 
Gentile  and  Jew  alike  might  share  God's  final  blessing 
(ch.  11). 

In  view  of  the  divine  goodness  may  every  one  recon- 
secrate himself  (ch.  12).  Let  him  do  his  public  duties 
honorably  (ch.  13).  Let  him  deal  with  fellow  Chris- 
tians in  all  forbearance  (14 : 1 — 15  :  13) .  These  are  the 
ideals  I  am  longing  to  set  before  you  in  person 
(15:14-33). 

A  truly  noble  outline  of  a  world-wide  Gospel  of 
redemption  by  faith  and  re-creation  by  the  Spirit. 
"Verilv  no  man  can  read  it  too  oft  or  study  it  too 
well"  (Tyndale). 


136  Tlie  Apostolic  Lmders 

Chapter  35.     The  Assurance  of  the  Christian  Believer. 
Rom.  ch.  8. 

The  great  epistle  to  the  Eomans  cannot  be  dismissed 
in  one  quick  analysis.  Its  depth  of  thought  and  mar- 
velous insight  into  experience  is  realized  only  by  those 
who  take  the  argument  more  in  detail.  We  may  well 
afford,  therefore,  to  dwell  in  particular  upon  the  three 
great  chapters,  six  to  eight,  which  show  what  Paul 
really  meant  by  justification  by  faith.  Then,  as  now, 
the  zeal  of  men  for  phrases  and  arguments  not  infre- 
quently led  to  the  obscuring  of  actual  facts.  Paul's 
arguments  might  well  be  misunderstood  by  many  who 
heard  them  for  the  first  time,  and  regarded  as  encour- 
aging moral  wrong. 

After  setting  forth  the  universal  sinfulness  of  men, — 
Gentile  and  Jew  alike, — and  their  need  of  divine 
righteousness,  the  apostle  had  sho\Mi  that  this  right- 
eousness was  put  within  their  reach  through  the 
redemption  which  is  in  Christ,  that  it  is  appropriated 
through  faith  in  Him,  thus  giving  no  one  an  oppor- 
tunity to  boast  over  his  salvation,  and  making  it  free  to 
all  on  identical  terms.  He  further  showed,  citing  the 
example  of  Abraham  and  the  testimony  of  David,  that 
this  conception  of  salvation  not  only  does  not  upset  but 
rather  establishes  the  religious  relationship  under  which 
Abraham  lived;  it  illustrates,  extends  and  confirms  it. 
Happy,  then,  are  they  who  are  conscious  of  being  made 
right  with  God  through  faith.  The  love  of  God  becomeB 
very  real  and  present  to  them  and  their  future  blessed- 
ness is  assured. 

Passing  over  the  obscure  digression  (5: 12-21)  which 
draws  a  comparison  between  the  universal  reign  of  sin 
since  Adam  and  the  universal  forgiveness  through 
Christ,  we  note  that  the  apostle  in  the  next  three  chap- 
ters sought  to  address  the  moral  consciousness  of  human- 
ity and  to  show  that  justification  through  faith  in  Christ 
was  in  no  sense  whatever  a  warrant  for  license.  Dr. 
Denney  puts  the  argument  concisely  in  these  words: 


Chapter  3d.     The  Assurance  of  the  Believer     1S7 

'^Chapter  six  shows  that  the  Christian,  in  baptism,  dies 
to  sin ;  chapter  seven,  that  by  death  he  is  freed  from  the 
law,  which,  in  point  of  fact,  owing  to  the  corruption  of 
his  nature  perpetually  stimulates  sin;  chapter  eight, 
that  the  Spirit  imparted  to  believers  breaks  the  power 
of  the  fl.esh,  and  enables  them  to  live  to  God."  It  will 
be  worth  our  while  to  go  over  the  argument  more  in 
detail. 

Two  clever  rather  than  substantial  objections  to  Paul's 
theory  of  salvation  would  occur  to  one  brought  up  under 
a  theory  which  laid  full  stress  upon  man's  responsibility 
for  his  acts  and  the  bearing  of  tliose  on  his  relationship 
with  God.  If  God's  grace,  one  might  say,  keeps  pace 
with  human  sinfulness,  why  not  sin  the  more,  so  as  to 
evoke  the  more  grace?  Such  a  conception  ignores  the 
real  character  of  the  Christian  life.  The  Christian 
enters  into  a  fellowship  for  life  with  Christ  which  means 
a  complete  breaking  off  of  relations  with  the  old  life  of 
sin.  He  dies  to  sin  and  is  resurrected  to  holiness  and  a 
pure,  moral  life.  He  lives  henceforth,  like  Christ,  a 
Godly  life. 

Again,  such  an  one  might  say,  if  we  are  not  under 
law  but  under  grace,  are  we  not  free  to  sin?  Not  bo, 
because  we  are  servants  of  righteousness  and  bound  to 
conform  to  its  ideals.  Instead  of  using  our  bodily 
powers  for  selfish  and  wicked  ends  ^^•e  should  make  them 
promote  holiness  of  life,  a  life  which  becomes  eternal. 

Getting  free  from  the  bondage  of  the  Old  Testament 
law  is  accomplished  by  death.  Just  as  a  wife  is  made 
free  by  the  death  of  her  husband  to  enter  into  new  rela- 
tions with  another,  the  marriage  bond  being  dissolved 
by  death,  so  the  Christian  by  his  moral  death  to  sin  is 
freed  from  his  bondage  to  sin  and  made  free  to  serve 
his  new  Master,  Christ,  with  joy  and  serenity  (7;  1-6). 

Let  us  not  infer,  however,  that  the  law  is  evil.  Not 
at  all,  but  it  has  been  the  occasion  of  awakening  the 
consciousness  of  sin  (7:7-13).  Life  under  the  law 
comes  to  this  in  experience  that  when  one  wishes  to  do 
good^  evil  is  ever  present  with  him.  and  the  law  does 


138  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

not  enable  him  to  conquer  sinful  impulses.  In  fact, 
evil  propensities  gam  the  victory  often  over  deep  and 
true  moral  desires,  making  one  the  hopeless  slave  of  sm. 
There  is  no  release  except  through  Christ  (7: 14-;^5). 

Now  the  contrast  between  the  old  life  under  the  law 
and  the  blessed  life  which  the  Christian  may  lead  is 
sweepingly  complete.  The  life  of  the  Spirit  is  not  a 
life  of  continual  struggle  against  a  dominating  law.  In 
Christ,  God  sent  a  new  saving  power  into  the  world  and 
brought  to  an  end  the  claims  and  the  authority  of  sin 
for  those  who  are  united  to  Christ  (8: 1-4).  The  one 
who  has  been  justified  by  God's  grace  in  Christ  is  one 
who  has  surely  begun  to  live  a  good  life  in  the  Spirit 
(8:5-11). 

This  life  of  the  Spirit  creates  in  us  a  new  nature  By 
a  sort  of  adoption  we  become  a  part  of  the  true  family 
of  God,  a  relationship  that  quickly  becomes  more  and 
more  real.  As  God's  children  we  naturally  inherit  the 
great  blessings  of  His  kingdom,  and  therefore  share  in 
the  sufferings  which  a  faithful  adherence  entails 
(8:12-17). 

Of  the  blessedness  to  which  the  Christian  may  look 
forward  there  is  on  every  side  an  eager  expectation.  In 
some  sense  inanimate  creation  seems  to  be  awaiting  it; 
its  hope  and  promise  are  involved  in  the  very  constitu- 
tion of  things.  When  the  curse  is  wholly  lifted  from 
man,  it  will  be  lifted  from  nature  also,  and  man  will 
find  himself  in  a  new  world  matching  his  new  condi- 
tion (8:18-32). 

The  Christian,  too,  is  looking  always  ahead.  What 
he  has  already  experienced  is  but  the  foretaste  of  heaven 
itself.  Only  by  death,  when  he  has  exchanged  his  mor- 
tal body  for  an  immortal  one,  can  he  possess  the  full 
privileges  and  joys  of  sonship  (8:23-25). 

Moreover,  the  Holy  Spirit  intercedes  for  the  Cliristian 
in  his  deep  need,  understanding  and  expressing  that 
need  in  ways  which  only  God  can  fully  understand. 
This  is  the  Spirit's  constant  aim.  What  a  prospect  this 
extends  to  the  sincere  believer !     He  is  sure  of  the  fore- 


Chapter  35.    The  Assurance  #/  the  Believer    139 

seeing,  unchangeable  love  of  God,  which  follows  him 
continuously  {b:2(}'30). 

This  leads  to  a  glorious  conclusion.  In  the  light  of 
all  this  certain  blessedness,  how  insignificant  become 
the  sufferings  we  encounter!  Redemption  implies 
divine  care  for  the  redeemed.  When  God  gives  His 
Son,  He  gives  the  universe  too.  In  spite  of  all  impedi- 
ments, God's  chosen  ones  will  be  carried  through.  No 
one  can  condemn  them,  since  Christ  died,  rose,  and 
intercedes  for  them.  No  hardship  or  suffering,  not  even 
death,  nothing  that  God  has  made  can  do  more  than 
give  us  deeper  and  more  thrilling  experiences  of  the 
love  of  Christ  (8:31-39). 

One  great  thought  of  these  three  wonderful  chapters 
is  that  justification  and  moral  righteousness  are  co- 
existent and  inseparable.  The  new  life  in  the  Spirit 
begins  the  moment  a  real  forgiveness  from  sin  is 
attained.  The  evidence  of  the  deliverance  is  the  actively 
righteous  life. 

Another  thought,  equally  great,  is  that  of  the  place 
in  the  Christian's  life  of  the  victorious  spirit  of  love. 
Love  is  stronger  than  law.  The  one  who,  though  con- 
scious of  weakness,  deliberately  chooses  to  follow  the 
pathway  of  faith  and  love  and  holiness,  has  assurance 
of  success. 


140  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

Chapter  36.    The  Last  Journey  to  Jerusalem.    Acts  20;  3— 
21  :16,    About  A.  D.  58. 

The  subject  of  the  journeyings  of  the  apostle  Paul  to 
the  mother  city,  Jerusalem,  their  number,  dates  and 
purpose  is  one  which  may  never  be  decided  to  the  entire 
satisfaction  and  acceptance  of  New  Testament  scholars. 
Of  this  particular  journey  and  its  right  to  be  called  the 
last  one  which  the  apostle  made  to  Jerusalem  there  is 
no  question  whatever. 

It  was  a  journey  for  which  he  had  long  been  prepar- 
ing, and  to  which  he  had  alluded,  again  and  again,  in 
the  letters  of  these  active  years.  By  it  he  hoped  to 
carry  out  a  scheme  which  had  long  been  in  his  mind 
for  uniting  fraternally  his  churches  with  those  in 
Palestine.  He  desired,  if  possible,  to  be  the  means  of 
healing  the  breach  to  which  his  own  work  and  words 
had  given  the  chief  occasion.  He  hoped  to  make  such 
proof  of  the  genuineness  of  the  Christian  virtues  in  the 
hearts  of  his  converts  that  even  the  bigoted  and  deter- 
mined brethren  at  Jerusalem  would  be  unable  to  reject 
it  or  to  continue  their  attitude  of  suspicion. 

Paul  had  arranged  to  sail  from  Corinth  for  Jerusalem 
at  the  opening  of  navigation,  hoping  probably  to  reach 
Jerusalem  by  Passover,  but  the  discovery  that  a  Jewish 
plot  had  been  laid  against  him,  a  plot,  perhaps,  to  be 
executed  on  the  ship  which  would  have  been  crowded 
with  pilgrims,  Jews  of  Corinth  and  Asia,  his  sworn 
foes,  made  him  change  his  plans  so  as  to  reach  Jeru- 
salem by  a  different  route  and  at  a  later  date. 

Quite  a  number  of  men  were  preparing  to  accompany 
him.  These  were  the  chosen  representatives  of  the  vari- 
ous groups  of  churches,  sent  by  them  at  Paul's  request 
to  make  the  journey  with  him  and  to  witness  th-j  out- 
come, so  that  there  should  be  no  chance  for  such 
malicious  charges  as,  to  his  cost,  he  had  found  even  his 
own  converts  capable  of.  A  question  of  the  correct  read- 
ing of  Acts  20 : 4,  5  makes  the  actual  course  of  their 
getting  together  a  little  obscure,  but  it  is  cleat  that  they 


Chapter  36.     The  Last  Journey  to  Jerusalem    141 

all  met  at  Troas,  whither  Paul  came  after  a  hasty  visit 
to  the  churches  in  Macedonia. 

The  narrative  of  the  voyage  to  Jerusalem  is  vivid 
and  valuable.  It  is  again  in  tiie  words  of  an  eye  witness, 
for  the  interesting  hrst  personal  pronoun  hegins  once 
more  with  verse  five.  We  do  not  read  much  relating  to 
the  companions,  since  the  author  of  Acts  was  interested 
mainly  in  Paul,  the  leading  personality  in  all  these 
events.  Altogether  they  must  have  made  quite  a  com- 
pany, for  the  church  at  Corinth  and  perhaps  those  of 
Cilicia  and  the  mother  church  at  Antioch  were  sharers 
in  the  enterprise. 

The  stay  at  Troas  continued  for  a  week,  and  concluded 
on  Sunday  evening.  It  is  most  interesting  to  note  this 
earliest  reference  to  the  "first  day"  as  being  marked  out 
by  the  Christian  church  as  the  special  day  for  public 
worship  and  in  particular  for  the  regular  celebration  of 
the  communion  in  the  'n3reaking  of  the  bread."  It  was 
possible,  as  Eamsay  long  since  pointed  out,  for  the 
company  to  remain  with  the  church  at  Troas  even  until 
far  into  the  night,  since  the  proper  wind  from  the  north, 
with  the  advent  of  which  their  ship  would  set  sail,  could 
not  be  expected  before  daybreak.  The  rest  of  the  party 
joined  the  vessel  at  its  anchorage,  but  Paul  lingered,  in- 
tending to  go  overland  to  Assos,  below  the  cape  around 
which  the  vessel  had  to  sail. 

A  curious  incident  happened  at  Troas  during  the 
prolonged  service  of  the  evening.  A  young  man, 
belonging,  doubtless,  to  one  of  the  Christian  families  of 
Troas,  and  probably  coming  to  the  service  after  a  day  of 
toil,  was  so  overcome  by  drowsiness  that  he  fell  out  of  a 
window  and  was  taken  up  for  dead.  The  apostle  assured 
the  friends  that  he  would  live,  and  continued  the  dis- 
course. Wliether  the  narrative  intends  that  it  should 
be  understood  that  Paul  wrought  a  miracle  of  healing  is 
not  wholly  clear,  but  at  all  events  the  young  man  recov- 
ered, and  that  which  might  have  cast  a  blight  over  the 
farewell  of  Prail  to  his  followers  became  rathf^r  an 
occasion  of  rejoicing. 


142 


TJie  Apostolic  Leaders 


The  story  of  the  voyage  proceeds  clearly  enough  as 
far  as  Miletus.  Ramsay  explains  the  straight  course  to 
Miletus  and  the  delay  there  instead  of  at  Epheaus  by 
supposing  that  the  ship  in  which  the  company  took 
passage  from  Troas  was  due  to  make  one  stop  only 
between  Troas  and  Patmos,  and  that  at  Miletus.  The 
delay  at  Miletus  would  give  just  time  enough  for  com- 
munication with  Ephesus,  whereas  a  stop  at  Ephesus 
might  cause  a  considerable  delay,  not  to  mention 
possible  dangers  or  complications. 

He  lost  no  time  in  despatching  a  messenger  from 
Miletus  to  summon  the  leaders  of  the  church  at  Ephesus 
to  join  him.     They  responded  at  once,  so  that  he  had 


Ru.ni  at  Miietus. 

The  iirches  are  on  the  site  r.f  ihe  ancient  city.    The  harbor  iu  wliich  Paul's  sliip  lay 
was  in  the  central  part  of  ths  picture.    It  is  now  mostly  filled  up  with  mud. 


one  last  opportunity  for  an  interview,  which  none  among 
them  would  ever  forget. 

In  the  report  of  this  conference,  condensed  as  usual 
into  a  discourse  which  at  best  but  broadly  represented 
the  earnest  words  of  that  night  together,  Paul  gave 
frank  expression  to  the  forebodings  which  pressed  upon 
his  soul.  He  was  sure  that  it  was  the  Lord's  will  that 
he  should  go  to  Jerusalem,  but  he  also  realized  that  some 
fresh  test  of  his  courage  and  faith  would  present  itself. 
He  was,  like  a  true  pastor,  more  concerned  for  them, 
left  without  his  helpful  guidance,  than  for  himself. 
Reminding  them  of  the  zealous  and  unselfish  character 


Chapter  36.     The  Last  Journey  to  Jerusalem    143 

of  his  ministry  when  among  them,  and  declaring  that 
they  might  never  see  him  again,  he  aifectionateiy  and 
solemnly  appealed  to  them  to  be  faithful,  generous  and 
sincere  shepherds  of  the  flock  of  God,  praying  that  God 
would  uphold  them  in  their  service.  It  was  such  an 
address  as  we  might  expect  from  the  great  apostle, 
tender,  intense  and  stirring.  It  broke  their  hearts  to 
think  that  such  a  leader  was  going  to  nueet  a  fate 
unknown. 

Paul  did  not  lack  other  tests  of  his  fixedness  of  pur- 
pose and  courage.  At  Caesarea  he  received  unmistak- 
able confirmation  of  his  own  forecasts.  The  whole 
Christian  community  united  in  pleading  with  him  to 
keep  away  from  Jerusalem,  and  his  comrades  added 
their  petitions.  All  manner  of  specious  reasons  were 
adduced  for  permitting  his  companions  to  execute  the 
mission  and  saving  himself  for  the  needed  work  of 
evangelization.  No  doubt  they  urged  him  to  sail  for 
Eome,  promising  to  quickly  follow  him  thither  with  a 
message  of  success.  But  Paul  was  not  to  be  deterred 
from  following  his  conviction  that  he  himself  was  sum- 
moned to  Jerusalem.  So  at  last  they  yielded  and  all 
set  out  for  the  city  of  Jerusalem. 

This  voyage  narrative  throws  a  vivid  light  upon  the 
true  grandeur  of  Paul.  He  was  made  in  heroic  mould. 
The  prospect  of  sufferings  never  affected  his  course  in 
the  least.  He  was  not  his  own  man,  but  Christ's  man. 
He  found  his  highest  joy  in  executing  the  Master's  will, 
whatever  that  might  imply.  He  was  never  foolhardy, 
but  he  would  not  allow  danger  to  interfere  with  duty. 
AU  lives  may  be  made  heroic  on  this  simple  principle. 

It  meant  much  to  him  of  comfort  that  he  could  truly 
say  on  looking  back  that  no  one  could  accuse  him  of  a 
selfish  or  slack  or  superficial  ministry.  Always  he  had 
aimed  to  do  his  best  for  others,  entering  into  their 
experiences  and  leading  them  to  God.  There  is  no 
joy  in  life  quite  equal  to  that  of  the  con'sciousness  of 
first-rate  service  to  one's  fellow  men.  It  is  reachable 
by  all,  even  by  the  humblest  and  least  experienced. 


i^^  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

Jesus  Himself  said  it  was  but  the  giving  of  a  cup  of  cool 
water,  the  doing  for  the  love  of  it  of  simple  service  in 
the  Master^s  name. 


Chapter  37.     Paul's  Disappointing  Visit  to  Jerusalem. 
Acts  21  :  17—22:  22.    About  A.  D.  58. 

At  last  the  apostle  and  his  company  had  reached  the 
goal  of  his  long  deferred  hopes.  He  was  again  at  the 
city  where  so  many  experiences,  fruitful  for  good  and 
for  evil,  had  come  to  him.  Without  Imowing  it  himself, 
he  was  at  another  great  turning-point  in  his  career  of 
much  significance  in  history. 

The  leisureliness  of  the  last  stage  of  his  trip  may 
well  indicate  that  he  and  his  company  found  themselves, 
after  all,  in  good  season  for  the  great  feast  of  Pentecost. 
Jewish  pilgrims  from  all  parts  of  the  world  were  in 
Jerusalem.  Not  a  few  of  these  were  Paul's  bitter 
enemies;  all  were  excited  over  exaggerated  and  twisted 
reports  of  his  teachings.  From  the  standpoint  of  per- 
sonal safety  Paul  might  as  well  have  entered  a  den  of 
hungry  lions  as  the  beautiful  city  crowded  with  those 
who  had  fresh  reasons  each  year  to  regard  him  as  the 
greatest  obstacle  to  their  dreams  of  a  universal  Judaism. 

His  first  experience,  however,  was  one  of  friendship 
and  fraternity.  The  Christian  leaders  received  him  as 
one  of  themselves.  Accordingly,  on  the  day  follow- 
ing his  arrival,  Paul  and  his  whole  party  were  received 
by  James  and  the  elders.  Since  there  is  no  mention  of 
the  apostles,  it  may  bo  assumed  that  they  were  not  pres- 
ent. The  acknowledged  leader  of  the  Christian  church 
at  Jerusalem  was  James,  the  Lord's  brother,  a  very 
strict  upholder  of  the  law.  Before  him  and  the  other 
men  of  influence  Paul  gave  a  detailed  account  of  his 
ministry  in  Syria,  Galatia,  Asia,  Macedonia,  and  Greece. 
His  hearers  wore  stirred  to  enthusiasm,  and  determined, 
then  and  tbere,  to  bring  about  an  understanding  con- 


Chapter  37.    PauVs  Last  Visit  to  Jerusalem     145 

cerning  him  among  the  great  body  of  Jewish  Christians 
which  would  enable  them  to  hear  tliis  inspiring  ac- 
count of  the  progress  of  the  Gospel  among  those  who 
had  been  unbelievers. 

The  cause  for  the  persistent  hatred  toward  Paul  of 
all  partisan  Jews  was  due  to  the  report  that  he  was 
teaching,  not  Gentiles  alone  but  the  Jews  whom  he 
found  in  other  countries,  that  they  should  no  longer  re- 
gard the  Mosaic  law  as  binding.  This  idea  was  not  with- 
out justification  on  their  part,  yet  it  was  not  fair  to 
Paul.  He  taught  freely  that  the  keeping  of  the  law 
was  not  essential  to  salvation,  but  he  did  not  advise 
those  who  had  been  born  Jews  to  neglect  its  require- 
ments. However,  an  outcry  against  him  even  among 
the  Christians  was  to  be  anticipated,  and  this  the  leaders 
wished  to  avoid.  So  James  and  the  others  proposed 
that  he  make  a  demonstration  of  his  readiness  to  act  un- 
der the  law.  Paul  was  yielding  no  principle  here.  He 
had  made  a  vow  only  a  short  while  before.  The  conclu- 
sion of  that  vow  would  formally  be  in  some  ceremonial 
of  Judaism,  best  of  all  at  the  temple  at  Jerusalem.  He 
was  thus  acting  no  part  in  consenting  to  the  scheme  pro- 
posed by  the  friends.  He  was  making  a  concession,  but 
one  which  he  could  rightly  regard  as  harmless.  He  had 
but  to  join  a  party  of  Nazirites  and  pay  their  expenses 
in  order  to  manifest  his  friendliness  for  Judaism  and  to 
prove  his  patriotism.  It  was  a  prudent  course,  but  not 
an  unprincipled  one.  Paul  ran  some  risk  of  misrepre- 
sentation among  his  own  converts,  but  his  act  was  wise, 
friendly  and  Christlike. 

It  is  interesting  to  note  that,  so  far  as  the  evidence 
goes,  this  scheme  was  successful  in  impressing  the 
Christians  at  Jerusalem  with  a  conviction  of  PauFs  sin- 
cerity and  wise  leadership.  The  writer  of  the  narrative 
in  the  Book  of  Acts  evidently  regarded  the  series  of 
events  as  ordained  of  God  and  conducted  by  Him. 

The  apostle's  plan  was  interfered  with  by  the  attack 
upon  him  of  some  non-Christians  from  Asia  whose  en- 
mity he  had  escaped  not  long  before.    They  were  ready 


146 


The  Apostolic  Leaders 


to  seize  upon  any  pretext  for  attacking  him.  When  his 
week  of  purification  was  drawing  to  a  close,  these  Jews, 
who  recognized  him  as  their  enemy,  with  strong  appeals 
to  the  prejudices  of  the  Jews,  aroused  a  frenzied  mob. 

They        identified 


MHOENAAAAOrENKEIZnO 

PEYEIGAIENTOITOrnE 

PfTaEPONTPYMKTOYKA! 

HEPIBOAOYOIAANAH 

^GKEAYTQIAmOIEI 

TAIAI ATOE  ZAKOAOY 

©EINOANATON 


Soreg*'  in  tbe 


One  of  the  Ta1>lets  on  the 
Temple. 

The  "  Sorog"  was  a  low  .stone  balustrade  marking  the 
buundary  between  the  outer  and  inner  courts  in  the  tem- 
ple. On  it  were  tablets  bearing  inscriptions  in  Greek  and 
Latin  forbidding  Gentiles  to  go  witlun  it  on  pain  of  death. 
One  of  these  tablets  was  found  in  1871,  with  this  inscription 
in  Greek:  "No  man  of  alien  race  is  to  enter  within  tlie 
balustrade  or  embankment  that  goes  around  the  temple. 
If  any  one  is  caught,  let  liim  know  that  he  has  himself  to 
blame  for  the  death  that  will  follow." 


him  as  the  one 
who  went  every- 
where deriding  the 
Jewish  race  and 
the  sacred  law  and 
the  holy  temple, 
and  specifically 
charged  him  with 
the  crime  of  delib- 
erately defiling  the 
inner  temple  by 
introducing  thith- 
er those  who  were 
not  Jews.  This 
would  have  been 
in  defiance  of 
a  warning  con- 
spicuously posted 
along  the  balustrade  vrhich  separated  the  great  outer 
court  into  which  all  peoples  could  come  from  the  inner 
courts  which  only  Jews  could  enter.  Of  course  it  was  not 
true,  but  a  Jewish  mob  rarely  stopped  to  investigate.  All 
ran  together  at  the  outcry,  seized  Paul  with  the  inten- 
tion of  putting  him  to  death,  and  began  dragging  him 
out  into  the  great  outer  court  so  as  not  to  pollute  the 
temple  proper  with  his  blood.  The  temple  officers  made 
haste  to  shut  the  gates,  so  that  the  responsibility  should 
not  be  theirs. 

Meanwhile  tidings  of  the  tumult  had  come  to  the 
chiliarch  or  tribune  in  charge  of  the  soldiers  in  the 
tower  of  Antonia,  from  which  a  stairway  led  directly  in- 
to the  outer  court.  He  sent  soldiers  in  a  hurry,  who  laid 
hold  of  Paul  and  bound  him  securely,  then  sought  the 
cause  of  the  uproar.    Unable  to  determine  this  they  took 


Chapter  37.    PauVs  Last  Vmt  to  Jeincsalem     147 

Paul  to  the  castle.  So  great  was  the  pressure  of  the 
angry  crowd  that  to  reach  the  stairway  with  their 
prisoner  the  soldiers  had  to  carry  him. 

The  dignity,  self-possession  and  courage  of  Paul  at 
this  trying  juncture  were  impressive.  Bound  as  he  was 
with  chains,  covered  with  dust  and  blood,  he  demanded 
and  received  a  courtesy  which  the  cliief  captain  would 
not  commonly  concede  to  one  charged  with  crime.  He 
asked  for  permission  to  speak  to  the  multitude.  Address- 
ing the  people  in  their  own  vernacular,  he  declared  him- 
self to  be  one  of  themselves,  educated  as  a  Pharisee  and 
zealous  in  every  form  of  persecution.  He  reminded 
them  of  the  havoc  he  wrought  and  of  his  commission  to 
go  to  Damascus  for  a  similar  purpose.  Here  Jesus  had 
revealed  Himself  and  claimed  Saul  as  His  own,  and  set 
him  apart  for  service.  Later,  v/hen  at  Jerusalem,  pray- 
ing in  the  temple,  he  had  received  a  definite  commission 
for  missionary  service  among  the  Gentiles. 

These  words  were  enough  to  drive  his  excitable  audi- 
ence to  frenzy.  Apparently  the  attempt  at  conciliation 
had  been  a  disastrous  failure.  So  Paul  might  well  have 
thought.  Yet  it  had  quite  the  opposite  result.  It  led, 
to  be  sure,  to  PauFs  detention  for  some  years  in  prison, 
but  the  time  was  by  no  means  lost.  For  twenty  years 
Paul  had  been  incessantly  active.  Beyond  all  elsejie 
now  needed  time  to  think.  

A  spirit  of  compromise  which  ignores  the  principles 
upon  which  right  action  should  be  based  finds  no  real 
justification  from  Paul's  willingness  to  stand  sponsor 
for  the  Nazirites.  A  true  compromise  is  one  which  is 
born  of  courage,  not  fear,  which  unites  brethren  by  fair 
concessions  to  prejudice  or  habit,  and  which  promotes 
the  growth  and  greatness  of  the  kingdom. 


14S  The  Aposlolic  Leaders 

Chapter  38.    Paul's  Removal  to  Ctesarea.    Acts  22:23 — 
23  :35.    About  A.D.  58. 

When  the  apostle,  in  his  speech  from  the  steps  of  the 
Castle  Antonia,  referred  to  the  Gentiles,  his  appeal  to 
the  multitude  came  to  an  abrupt  conclusion,  for  the 
people  with  one  accord  cried  out,  "Away  with  such  a  fel- 
low ;  it  is  not  fit  that  he  should  live !"  They  were  so 
beside  themselves  with  wrath  that  the  chiliarch  with- 
drew Paul  into  the  castle  itself.  Taldng  for  granted 
his  wickedness  in  some  respects,  Lysias  gave  orders  that 
Paul  should  be  scourged  in  order  to  obtain  the  truth 
from  his  own  lips.  With  complete  self-possession,  be- 
fore the  cruel  lash  was  applied,  Paul  asked  the  officer  in 
whose  charge  he  was  whether  it  was  lawful  to  scourge  a 
Roman  without  due  reason  in  law.  The  knowledge  that 
he  possessed  Eoman  citizenship  led  at  once  to  consid- 
erate treatment  by  all.  It  was  a  privilege  highly  valued, 
obtained  sometimes  at  great  cost  and  always  respected. 

The  next  day  the  chiliarch  brought  Paul  before  the 
most  representative  Jewish  body,  the  Sanhedrin. 
Through  them  he  hoped  to  discover  the  nature  of  Paul's 
offense.  But  it  was  soon  evident  to  Paul  that  he  could 
hope  for  little  consideration  from  the  Sanhedrin  as  a 
body.  It  was  violently  prejudiced  against  him.  Even 
when  he  sought  in  a  conciliatory  appeal  to  arouse  their 
friendliness,  or  at  least  their  tolerance,  the  high  priest 
commanded  that  he,  as  a  prisoner,  be  smitten  on  the 
mouth  as  a  warning  to  keep  quiet.  Justly  angered  Paul 
made  a  sharp  rejoinder,  for  which  he  partly  apologized 
when  he  was  told  that  his  critic  was  the  high  priest. 
It  is  not  so  "strange  that  the  apostle  did  not  distinguish 
the  high  priest.  He  wore  on  ordinary  occasions  no  dis- 
tinctive dress,  and  may  have  been  personally  unknown 
to  Paul. 

The  council  was  not  really  there  to  render  a  real  judg- 
ment or  to  tell  the  truth,  and  Paul  well  knew  it.  Seeing 
that  his  only  way  of  averting  a  hostile  decision,  which 
under  any  circumstances  would  have  injured  his  cause 


Chapter  88.     Paul's  Removal  to  Ccesarea       149 

in  Roman  estimation,  was  to  take  shrewd  and  quick  ad- 
vantage of  tlieir  theological  differences,  the  apostle  al- 
tered the  issue  and  got  the  opposing  sects  to  warring 
over  him.  Declaring  that  he  was  a  Pharisee  born  and 
bred,  and  that  the  issue  in  his  case  related  to  the  resur- 
rection, he  cleverly  led  the  members  of  the  two  great 
parties,  with  whom  the  resurrection  was  a  frequent 
theme  for  discussion,  into  a  vigorous  wrangle  which 
turned  their  attention  away  from  Paul's  own  character 
to  this  matter  of  controversy  and  even  led  some  cf  the 
Pharisaic  scribes  to  begin  to  defend  or  excuse  him.  In 
the  end  Lysias  had  to  rescue  Paul  again  from  the  mob 
which  was  disputing  over  and  about  him. 

That  night  Paul  had  a  cheering  vision.  The  Lord 
Himself  stood  at  his  side  and  bade  him  have  cheer. 
Despite  his  courage  the  apostle  needed  the  message.  His 
future  looked  dark  indeed.  But  he  was  assured  that 
he  was  yet  to  be  a  witness-bearer  at  Eome  itself.  There 
was  to  be  the  climax  of  his  active  ministry. 

But  Paul's  enemies  were  by  no  means  daunted.  By 
the  next  morning  an  agreement  had  been  formed  by  a 
group  of  Jews  that  they  would  kill  him  before  they 
touched  food  again.  Doubtless  they  anticipated  little 
difficulty  in  accomplishing  their  purpose,  but  such  rash 
vows  were  given  absolution  without  much  difficulty. 
These  assassins  secured  the  active  co-operation  of  some 
of  the  Sanhedrists,  who  agreed  to  ask  Lysias  to  bring 
Paul  down  again  to  them  for  further  examination. 
Fortunately  for  Paul,  he  had  a  nephew  who  must  have 
been  highly  connected.  This  lad  happened  to  hear  about 
the  plot  and  told  Paul,  who  at  once  referred  him  to  the 
chiliarch,  Lysias,  who  was  deeply  impressed  by  his  nar- 
rative. 

Paul's  family  relations  are  rather  obscure.  Eamsay 
points  out  with  justice  that  this  sister's  son  cannot  have 
been  a  Christian,  and  must  have  belonged  to  some  very 
influential  coterie  among  the  leading  Jewish  families  of 
Jerusalem. 

His  finances  at  this  critical  period  ar«  of  interesi .  His 


loO 


The  Apostolic  Leaders 


status  as  a  prisoner  implies  that  he  was  regarded  as  a 
man  of  means.  Not  much  earlier,  however,  he  had  been 
glorying  over  the  recollection  of  an  independence  gained 
by  severe,  daily  labor,  which  was  made  necessary  by  un- 
questioned poverty.  In  some  way  his  condition  was 
altered.  Two  suppositions  have  been  made  to  account 
for  this.  One  is  that  of  Eamsay,  that  in  some  way, 
either  through  the  death  of  his  father  or  by  a  change  of 
attitude  within  his  own  family,  Paul  had  come  into  con- 
trol at  last  of  his  rightful  portion  of  the  family  estate. 
The  other  assumes  that  the  silence  of  Acts  regarding 
the  receipt  by  the  church  at  Jerusalem  of  the  gifts 
])rought  by  Paul  and  his  company  is  significant.  Before 
Paul  could  hand  it  over,  he  was  perhaps  seized  and  in- 


View  on  tbe  Mole,  in  Caesarea. 

Sometimes  called  tlic  prison  of  St.  Paul,  but  this  is  undoubtedly  a  mistake,  since  he 
was  confined  in  Herod's  palace  on  the  mainland.  This  building  was  probably  erected 
by  the  Crusaders. 


carcerated.  In  that  case,  how  readily  and  gladly  would 
the  donors  of  the  funds  authorize  their  trustees  to  use 
a  portion  at  least  for  the  benefit  of  their  beloved  brother 
in  Christ.  The  former  theory  is  perhaps  the  more  likely 
one. 

The  chiliarch  lost  no  time  in  placing  his  prisoner  out 
of  harm's  way.  He  ordered  at  once  a  large  escort  of 
foot-soldiers  and  horsemen  to  proceed  at  once  to 
Cajsarea,  taking  Paul  with  them  to  Felix,  the  procu- 
rator, who  dwelt  at  that  city,  rather  than  in  Jerusalem. 
Csesarea  had  l)Gen,  ever  since  the  days  of  Herod  the 


Chapter  S8.     Paul's  Removal  to  Coesarea       lol 

Great,  the  real  political  capital  of  Palestine,  and  the  fa- 
vored abode  of  the  Roman  rulers.  Felix,  the  procurator, 
had  extensive  powers.  He  could  deal  with  Paul  much  as 
he  wished.  A  man  of  low  origin,  he  was  chie%  dis- 
tinguished for  license,  severity  and  favoritism.  But 
even  so,  he  was  better  as  a  judge  than  the  Sanhedrin, 
whose  decisions  were  made  in  advance  of  the  facts. 

Lysias  forwarded  with  the  cavalcade  a  letter  which  is 
full  of  interest,  not  alone  as  indicating  the  form  of  such 
a  note  passed  between  two  men  of  standing,  but  as 
showing  how  readily  men  can  re-state  facts  in  a  light 
favorable  to  themselves  when  necessary.  Lysias  repre- 
sents himself  as  Paul's  friend  and  defender,  more  than 
ready  to  support  the  dignity  of  Rome. 

This  act  of  Lysias'  was  shrewd.  It  typified  the 
methods  by  which  the  Romans  found  it  necessary  to 
deal  with  their  Jewish  subjects  at  this  time.  The  Jew- 
ish people  wer.e  becoming  increasingly  dissatisfied  with 
existing  conditions.  They  were  a  very  impressionable 
people.  The  least  cause  was  liable  to  lead  to  a  \irtual 
insurrection  during  which  thousands  would  be  slain  and 
armies  set  in  motion.  Lysias  could  easily  see  that  Paul 
was  a  dangerous  man  to  have  in  Jerusalem.  For  some 
reason  the  Jewish  mob,  fanatical  and  unreasoning  at  all 
times,  hated  him  intensely  and  was  thrown  into  a  tem- 
pest of  rage  by  his  mere  appearance.  Lysias  could  not 
fathom  the  reason  and  had  been  unable  to  get  the  repre- 
sentatives of  the  people  to  state  it.  Finding  that  Paul 
was  one  whom  he  must  treat  with  consideration  and 
protect  at  all  hazards,  he  quickly  and  secretly  removed 
him  to  Caesarea  and  shifted  all  responsibility  to  his  su- 
perior officer,  Felix. 

How  impressive  the  power,  so  ready  to  protect  its 
own,  that  the  mere  claim  of  Roman  citizenship  con- 
verted surly  and  cruel  officers  into  those  who  were  com- 
plaisant and  courteous!  No  wonder  that  Christian 
thinking  has  been  dominated  by  the  imperial  idea. 

Paul  was  a  man  of  sound  sense.  He  would  take  a 
scourging  and  bear  it  manfully  when  occasion  arose, 


152  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

but  he  did  not  crave  martyrdom  for  its  own  sake.  A 
Christian  has  due  rights  of  which  it  is  no  less  his  duty 
than  his  privilege  to  take  advantage. 


Chapter  39.    Paul's  Qrappling  with  Paganism  and  Judaism 
Alike ;  A  Review. 

The  four  years  or  so  of  PauFs  life  between  the  begin- 
ning of  his  last  great  tour  and  the  blocking  of  his  active 
career  at  Jerusalem  were  of  supreme  importance  in  the 
history  of  the  religious  development  of  mankind.  Cir- 
cumstances forced  the  apostle  to  grapple  with  some  of 
the  greatest  problems  that  the  religious  life  raises.  He 
had  to  define  in  his  own  mind  not  alone  the  relationship 
of  pagan  religions  to  the  faith  preached  by  Jesus  and 
the  apostles,  but  even  more  sharply  the  relationship  be- 
tween that  faith  and  Judaism.  At  the  same  time  lie  was 
dealing  with  the  conditions  of  organized  paganism  in  a 
great  and  representative  city  and  with  the  life  of  an  or- 
ganized and  independent  Christian  community  in  an- 
other great  center. 

To  grade  these  great  tasks  in  the  order  of  their  im- 
portance is  manifestly  impossible.  They  were  each  but 
phases  of  the  advance  in  the  comprehension  of  the  mu- 
tual linking  of  the  grace  of  God  with  the  life  of  man 
which  Paul  himself  was  enabled  to  further  more  than 
most  men.  His  method  was  not  the  philosophical,  but 
the  practical.  He  considered  the  situation  and  acted 
upon  it  first ;  later  on  he  formulated  his  reasons. 

The  active  missionary  campaign  in  Asia,  with  head- 
quarters at  Ephesus,  was  in  itself  a  great  achievement. 
The  apostolic  leader  settled  down  in  a  thickly  populated 
and  resourceful  province  of  the  empire,  at  its  capital 
city,  the  very  heart  of  pagan  strength,  and  began  a 
course  of  organized  cvansrolization,  rarely  if  ever  sur- 
passed for  rapid  results.  Paul  himself,  according  to  the 
narrative,  remained  at  Ephesus  or  was  there  predomi- 


Chapter  39.     The  Period  of  Struggle  153 

uantly.  But  he  must  at  the  same  time  have  been  direct- 
ing and  inspiring  the  movements  of  a  number  of  helpers 
who  covered  the  surrounding  country.  Among  them  all 
the  province  was  quiclvly  stirred,  and  with  such  efficiency 
that  the  silversmiths  of  Ephesus  found  their  trade  seri- 
ously cut  down.  The  riot  at  Ephesus  was  the  best  possi- 
ble proof  of  the  success  of  Paul's  campaign,  but  an 
equally  noteworthy  and  more  lasting  evidence  was  the 
existence  in  subsequent  years  of  the  "churches  in  Asia/' 
founded  to  endure. 

Meanwhile  there  pressed  upon  him  daily  "anxiety  for 
all  the  churches."  While  actively  engaged  in  disputa- 
tion and  in  oversight  of  this  campaign  in  Asia,  he  had 
much  cause  for  solicitude  lest  his  Jewish  opponents 
should  undermine  the  confidence  reposed  in  him  by  his 
own  churches.  The  Judaizers  were  blocked  in  Galatia, 
yet  they  were  the  more  active  elsewhere.  There  is  only 
the  slight  hint  in  Philippians  3  :  2-4  to  indicate  that  the 
Macedonian  churches  were  troubled  by  the  emissaries  of 
the  partizans  in  Judea,  masquerading  as  direct  repre- 
sentatives of  James,  the  Lord's  brother,  and  the  elders  at 
Jerusalem.  But  in  Greece  and  especially  at  Corinth 
there  was  much  trouble.  Party  spirit  had  become  rife 
in  the  Christian  community,  aroused  in  large  measure 
by  the  quiet  nurture  of  a  spirit  of  independence  and  of 
opposition  to  Paul  by  those  who  were  even  more  con- 
cerned to  thwart  his  purposes  and  antagonize  his  policy 
than  they  were  to  exalt  themselves  or  their  ideas. 

Paul  was  cut  to  the  heart  again  to  find  that  any  of 
his  disciples  were  capable  of  thus  turning  against  him 
and  of  even  listening  to  such  baseless  charges  as  those 
which  were  busily  circulated.  Any  slander  which  could 
do  duty  in  breaking  down  his  hold  upon  the  Christian 
community  was  freely  used.  But,  as  in  the  case  of  the 
Galatian  churches,  he  gave  sturdy  battle  to  his  traducers, 
and,  what  is  far  more  important  for  our  purpose,  he 
stated  and  restated  his  positions,  defining  them  with  in- 
creasing clearness  until  the  Judaizing  faction  was  de- 
prived of  all  power  to  do  furtlier  harm.    When  the  out- 


154  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

come  of  such  a  contest  was  the  epistle  to  the  Romans 
wdth  its  masterly  setting  forth  of  the  adequacy  of  the 
conception  of  salvation  through  faith  in  Christ,  and  of 
the  preparatory  function  of  Judaism,  we  can  really  re- 
joice over  PauFs  tribulations.  It  needed  such  a  crisis  to 
arouse  his  greatest  powers  and  bring  these  truths  to  com- 
plete formulation. 

But  what  about  the  fortunes  of  the  individual 
churches !  Paul's  dealings  with  the  church  at  Corinth 
had  great  significance  for  the  Church  universal.  Had  it 
not  been  for  their  tendency  to  over-emphasize  the  "gift" 
of  incoherent  religious  speech,  how  could  the  apostle 
have  had  occasion  to  set  a  supreme  value  on  that  which 
upbuilds  in  speech  or  action  and  to  glorify  the  indwell- 
ing spirit  of  love.  Had  not  the  church  submitted  for 
his  judgment  a  series  of  knotty  questions,  how 
would  he  have  shown  the  true  way  of  attempting  a  solu- 
tion of  such  things  ?  The  problems  were  local,  but  his 
method  was  eternal.  "Settle  your  problems,"  he  vir- 
tually said,  "in  the  light  of  comprehending  principles. 
Do  not  ask  whether  you  may  drink  or  smoke  or  be  glut- 
tonous. Simply  remember  that  your  bodies  are  a  temple 
of  the  Holy  Spirit." 

Had  the  church  failed  to  raise  the  issues  of  morality 
and  the  standards  which  they  should  enforce  upon 
church  members,  how  would  Paul's  noble  declarations 
regarding  the  motives  which  should  control  the  acts  of 
every  man  and  the  conduct  of  every  church  have  been 
given  expression?  We  may  finally  rejoice  at  the  covert 
attacks  upon  the  apostle,  since  they  stung  him  into  a 
declaration  of  his  inner  motives  and  a  review  of  his 
eventful  life. 

Along  with  these  varied  causes  for  concern,  Paul  had 
on  his  heart  an  engrossing  desire.  He  hoped  to  be  able 
to  bring  about  a  fraternal  union  of  the  two  separated 
sections  of  the  Christian  church,  the  Christians  of  Judea, 
whose  thinking  and  practice  were  molded  by  the  Juda- 
ism of  which  they  were  a  part,  and  the  Christians  of  the 
Greek  world,  whose  complete  salvation  without  recourse 


Chapter  39.     The  Period  of  Struggle         255 

to  Judaism  Paul  had  maintained.  They  might  not  be 
made  to  agree  in  all  things,  but  they  could  regard  each 
other  as  brethren.  Paul  sought  to  bring  this  about  by 
generous  gifts  in  token  of  Christian  love  from  the  Gen- 
tile churches  to  those  in  Judea.  His  determination  led 
to  his  arrest,  and  to  a  complete  change  of  his  course  of 
ministry.  Probably  it  was  successful  or  measurably  so, 
but  of  this  there  is  no  clear-cut  proof. 

The  outcome  of  this  period  most  instructive  of  all  is 
the  fuller  opportunity  given  to  every  one  to  consider  a 
truly  great  personality.  Biography  in  the  making  is 
most  impressive.  No  one  can  read  Paul's  words  of  self- 
defense  and  refrain  from  a  sincere  and  grateful  tribute 
to  his  generosity  as  well  as  masterfulness,  to  his  consid- 
eration for  his  followers  as  well  as  wisdom  in  forming 
their  ideas,  to  his  sincere  humility  in  unimportant  mat- 
ters as  well  as  aggressiveness  in  those  which  he  deemed 
critical.  Like  his  great  Master,  he  beckoned  men  to 
follow ;  he  filled  them  with  his  spirit ;  he  conquered  them 
by  his  goodness. 


156  TJhe  Apostolic  Leaders 

Chapter  40.    Paul's  Appeal  to  Cssar.   Acts  24  : 1—25  :  12. 
About  A.  D.  58-60, 

With  the  admission  of  the  great  apostle  within  the 
walls  of  the  splendid  palace  of  Herod  at  Csesaroa,  the 
official  residence  of  the  Koman  procurators,  a  period  of 
his  life  began  which  was  of  momentous  significance  for 
the  Christian  church.  To  his  followers  this  long  incar- 
ceration m,ust  have  seem  an  unrelieved  calamity  for  all 
concerned;  they  would  have  been  thinking  of  the  sud- 
den stoppage  of  a  career  of  fruitful  missionary  activity. 
No  doubt  his  own  restless,  ardent  spirit  chafed  sorely 
over  the  enforced  idleness,  at  a  time  when  he  was  hop- 
ing to  enter  upon  a  campaign  at  Rome  and  throughout 
the  little-known  West.  He  needed  the  assurance  of 
God's  purpose,  which  his  vision  at  Jerusalem  would 
have  given  him,  in  order  to  submit  with  patience  and 
resignation  to  the  delay. 

And  yet  this  detention  in  prison  was  really  a  most 
beneficent  circumstance  alike  to  Paul,  to  his  churches, 
and  to  Christendom.  He  had  been  for  twenty  years 
keeping  up  a  rapid  pace  of  evangelization.  The  re- 
sponsibility for  entering  new  regions  and  for  minister- 
ing to  the  churches  thus  organized  pressed  upon  his 
heart.  He  had  no  such  experience  as  leisure.  His 
productiveness  had  been  forced  upon  him  by  these  very 
responsibilities.  Every  single  letter  of  the  six  already 
written  to  the  churches,  excepting,  possibly,  that  to  the 
Romans,  had  been  written  to  meet  some  emergency, 
little  or  large,  personal  or  social,  casual  or  important, 
among  these  churches.  Even  that  latest  and  most  for- 
mal letter  had  been  called  out  by  the  desire  to  antici- 
pate his  coming  work  at  Rome  and  to  make  an  explicit 
presentation  of  his  "Gospel." 

The  first  value  of  his  leisure  was  in  the  relief  from 
the  immediate  pressure  of  this  insistent  probltm  of 
church  extension  and  development.  Unable  to  respond 
to  any  calls,  Paul  could  think  of  the  church  at  large,  of 
its  strength  or  weakness,  its  triumphs  and  perils,  its 


Chapter  40.     Paul's  Appeal  to  Ccesar         lo7 

past  and  future.  He  was,  in  the  second  place,  enabled 
to  deal  more  effectively  with  the  current  problems  of 
the  church.  It  is  not  unreasonable  to  suppose  that, 
during  this  long  waiting  at  Csesarea,  with  its  large 
measure  of  freedom  of  intercourse,  Paul  received  nmny 
a  delegation  from  his  own  churches  and  from  the  more 
liberal  ones  of  Palestine;  that  he  was  able  to  cement  in 
some  degree  by  conference  with  the  leaders  of  the  church 
at  Jerusalem  the  friendly  union  of  the  Palestinian  and 
Gentile  sections  of  the  Christian  church,  on  which  he 
had  set  his  heart;  and  that  he  encouraged  Luke,  who 
was  afterward  his  fellow-voyager  to  Eome,  to  begin  that 
work  of  research  in  Palestine  which  made  possible, 
years  later,  the  noble  gospel  which  sets  forth  the  Christ 
as  one  who  belonged,  not  to  Judea  or  to  the  Jewish  race, 
but  to  the  whole  inhabited  world,  the  Saviour  of  man- 
kind. But  the  largest  value  of  this  detention,  after  all, 
to  the  church  was  in  the  opportunity  given  to  Paul  to 
think  through  the  questions  which  were  troubling  the 
growing  churches,  and  to  give  a  formulation  to  them 
which  was  relatively  permanent.  The  wonderful  let- 
ters to  the  Ephesians,  Colossians,  and  Philippians 
could  scarcely  have  been  written  without  this  interven- 
ing period  of  quiet  meditation.  True  the  two  years  at 
Caesarea  were  far  from  being  wasted  years. 

A  thoughtful  reader  of  the  Book  of  Acts  wonders  to 
himself  at  the  relative  preponderance  given  to  the  de- 
tails of  PauPs  arrest,  the  various  trials  and  the  voyage 
to  Eome.  They  occupy  what  seems,  at  first,  a  dispro- 
portioned  number  of  chapters.  The  answer  cannot  be 
the  mere  possession,  on  the  part  of  the  writer,  of  an 
abundance  of  first-hand  information  regarding  this  pe- 
riod. The  narrative  of  Acts  is  far  too  skilfully  devel- 
oped to  be  thus  explained.  The  compiler  was  in  full 
control  of  his  m^aterial,  and  shaped  its  development  in 
accordance  with  his  own  purpose.  In  view  of  this  fact 
the  space  accorded  to  the  trials,  at  Caesarea  and  else- 
where is  significant,  and  the  view  of  Ramsay,  Bartlet  and 
others  is  reasonable.     It  is  that  one  great  purpose  of 


158  The  Apoetolic  Leaders 

the  author  of  Acts  was  to  demonstrate  the  approval  on 
the  part  of  the  Eoman  authorities  of  the  spirit  and  acts 
of  early  Christianity  and  their  repeated  deliverance  of 
Paul  from  hostile  Jewish  attack. 

Be  that  as  it  may,  there  is  a  particular  interest  in 
the  details  of  this  trial  before  Felix.  It  was  not  Paul's 
first  appearance  before  a  Eoman  tribunal  at  the  in- 
stance of  Jewish  enemies,  but  it  was  more  of  a  crisis 
than  usual.  His  accusers  were  the  mc£t  representative 
men  at  Jerusalem.  They  had  engaged  an  eloquent  ad- 
vocate. They  were  determined  to  compass  his  death. 
Only  the  fact  that  Paul  had  in  some  way  impressed 
both  Lysias  and  Felix  with  a  sense  of  his  real  impor- 
tance saved  him  from  being  yielded  to  his  foes  as  an 
easy  method  of  quieting  their  turbulence. 

The  advocate  made  a  specious  plea,  embellished  and 
introduced  with  oratorical  art.  He  claimed  that  Paul 
was  a  fomenter  of  sedition,  a  ringleader  of  a  pestilent 
sect  and  a  profaner  of  the  temple,  and  cited  all  who 
had  accompanied  him  in  support  of  these  charges. 

But  Felix  was  not  a  man  to  be  readily  deceived.  He 
had  had  long  experience  in  dealing  with  dangerous  men. 
He  knew,  almost  by  instinct,  that  Paul  was  neither  a 
revolutionist  nor  a  traitor,  and  that  the  trouble  was 
some  technical  matter  of  Judaism,  in  relation  to  which, 
like  all  Eomans,  his  ignorance  was  only  exceeded  by  his 
contempt.  His  judgment  was  supported  by  Paul's  calm 
and  convincing  denial.  He  had  been  in  Jerusalem,  he 
said,  but  a  few  days,  at  most,  had  ])een  making  no  tu- 
mult, and  had  acted  only  in  reverent  fashion  while  at 
the  temple.  He  admitted  being  a  Christian,  but  de- 
clared that  it  was  no  crime  in  Eoman  jurisprudence. 

Felix  availed  himself  of  an  opportunity  to  defer  the 
case  and  have  further  contact  with  tliis  interesting  per- 
sonality. With  his  Jewish  wife,  Drusilla,  he  repeatedly 
listened  to  Paul's  discourse.  With  his  accustomed 
earnestness  the  apostle  argued  regarding  the  true  God. 
human  responsibility  to  men  and  to  Him,  and  the  time 
of  reckoning  soon  to  come.     He  fairly  overawed  the 


Chapter  Jfl.    Paul's  Defense  before  Agripija    159 

hardened  procurator  who  had  a  long  roll  of  crimes  to 
atone  for,  but  to  little  effect.  The  greed  of  gain  had 
taken  such  possession  of  Felix  that  he  looked  on  office 
only  as  a  means  of  plunder.  Hoping  that  Paul  would 
pay  liberally  to  be  freed,  Felix  detained  him  until  he 
himself  was  supplanted  by  Festus,  and  then  left  him  a 
prisoner  as  a  sop  to  Jewish  sentiment. 

The  new  procurator  was  inclined  to  use  Paul  as  a 
means  of  making  himself  popular  with  the  Jews  by  let- 
ting their  great  council  decide  his  case.  Consequently 
Paul  appealed,  as  a  Eoman  citizen  of  standing,  to  the 
emperor.  In  consequence  of  Paul's  demand,  he  ulti- 
mately went  to  Rome. 

Paul's  submission  to  circumstances  savored  of  com- 
mon sense.  He  held  to  his  rights  tenaciously,  and  did 
his  utmost  to  order  his  life  as  he  conceived  it  should 
develop. 


Chapter  4 1 .   Paul' s  Defense  before  Agrippa.   Acts  25 : 1 3— 
26 :  32.    About  A.  D.  60. 

Paul  was  eminently  a  fair  adversary.  He  was  a  for- 
midable antagonist,  as  many  who  sought  to  oppose  him 
found  to  their  cost,  yet  he  met  men  on  their  own 
ground.  It  is  not  unreasonable  to  suppose  that  he  had 
cherished  the  hope  that  from  Festus  he  would  receive 
the  proper  treatment  of  his  case.  The  procurator's  in- 
tentions may  have  been  good  (Acts  25  :  20),  but  Luke's 
interpretation  (25  : 9)  of  his  governing  motive  seems 
dependable.  He  cared  nothing  about  Paul  as  an  indi- 
vidual ;  and  judged  it  better  to  sacrifice  one  man,  if,  by 
doing  so,  he  could  bring  under  his  influence  a  turbulent 
and  unreasonable  race.  But  Festus  underestimated 
Paul.  His  was  a  case  which  could  not  be  settled  in  the 
manner  so  often  practised  in  the  provinces.  He  knew 
his  rights  as  a  Roman  citizen  and  was  able  through  his 
friends  to  have  them  sustained. 


160  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

To  appeal  to  the  emperor  at  Rome  was  by  no  means 
a  simple  matter  in  that  day.  Any  governor  could  re- 
fuse to  entertain  such  an  appeal,  if  he  ventured  to  meet 
the  consequences  of  an  error  of  judgment  on  his  own 
part  in  the  matter.  He  was  no  mere  executive  automa- 
ton. He  would  send  to  the  emperor  only  important 
cases.  Moreover,  the  expense  attendant  upon  such  ap- 
peals was  formidable,  even  as  in  our  own  court  pro- 
cedure to-day.  Paul  must  have  deliberately  made  up  his 
mind  that,  unless  Festus  gave  signs  of  dealing  with  him 
fairly  and  promptly,  he  would  appeal. 

It  is  an  open  question  whether  or  not  he  made  a  mis- 
take in  so  doing.  The  emperor  then  on  the  throne  was 
Nero.  He  was  young  and  frivolous  and  careless  alike  of 
justice  or  mercy,  yet  had  been  guided  in  matters  of 
state  by  older  and  wiser  counsellors.  When  Paul's  case 
came  to  its  long  deferred  trial,  all  this  had  altered.  Not 
only  had  Nero  broken  loose  from  all  restraint,  but  had 
been  induced  to  charge  against  the  sect  of  Christians 
the  responsibility  for  the  crimes  which  he  and  his 
satellites  had  committed.  We  may  possibly  explain  the 
strange  absence  of  definite  information  at  the  close  of 
the  Acts  regarding  Paul  by  regarding  the  silence  as  sig- 
nificant, not  of  a  continuing  third  volume  of  history, 
as  Ramsay  suggests,  but  of  the  disastrous  result  of  the 
solemn  appeal  to  Caesar,  and  of  the  fulfilment  of  Paul's 
earlier  forebodings. 

Not  long  after  Festus  and  his  council  had  determined 
that  Paul's  appeal  would  be  allowed.  King  Herod 
Agrippa  came  to  make  the  procurator  an  official  visit. 
This  Agrippa  was  the  son  of  the  Herod,  also  called 
Agrippa,  referred  to  in  Acts,  ch.  12,  who  had  died  a 
loathsome  death  in  a.  d.  44,  He  had  been  brought  up 
at  Rome,  and  was  an  intimate  friend  of  emperors  and 
courtiers  alike.  Consequently  his  career  had  been  one 
of  rapid  promotion.  About  eight  years  before  the  time 
of  this  incident  he  had  been  given  the  territory  for- 
mally ruled  by  Herod  Philip  (Luke  3:1)  with  the 
coveted  title  of  king.    Three  years  later  the  greater  part 


Chapter  If.1.     Paul's  Defense  before  Agripya    161 

of  Galilee  was  added  to  his  domain,  leaving  only  Judea 
and  Samaria  under  the  direct  control  of  the  procurators. 
He  was  thus  a  sovereign  of  marked  dignity  and  im- 
portance, and  conducted  himself  so  shrewdly  that  he 
was  liked  both  by  the  Roman  overlords  and  by  the  Jew- 
ish nation.  Like  all  of  the  Herodian  family,  however, 
his  grace  of  manner  masked  a  corrupt  and  selfish  heart. 
He  was  a  real  friend  to  no  one. 

The  arrival  of  King  Agrippa  led  Festus  to  seek  his 
advice  regarding  Paul,  w^hose  case  seemed  very  puzzling 
to  the  procurator.  It  turned  on  matters  of  technical 
religious  importance,  wholly  out  of  his  range  of  cxperi- 


A  Roman  EaU  of  Justice. 

Showing  the  raised  platform  on  which  the  judges  sat,  with  the  lictors  carrying  the 
fasces,  the  emblem  of  authority,  on  either  side.  These  basilicas,  which  were  thelargest 
Roman  halls  of  meeting,  are  said  to  have  been  copied  by  the  early  Christians  foi  their 
churches,  many  of  which  are  still  called  basilicas. 


ence  or  interest.  He  had  determined  to  send  his 
prisoner  to  Rome,  as  soon  as  opportunity  should  offier, 
but  was  at  a  loss  to  know  how  to  draw  up  a  set  of 
charges  which  would  not  expose  himself  to  ridicule  or 
rebuke  from  his  superior  authorities.  Agrippa,  he 
thought,  would  be  able,  after  hearing  Paul's  own  decla- 
rations, to  assist  him  in  preparing  the  official  transcript 
of  the  case.  A  brilliant  gathering  was  convened,  the 
very  next  day,  in  the  hall  of  judgment.  The  king  and 
his  consort,  with  those  whose  importance  gave  them  a 
place  in  what  was  really  a  social  function  rather  than  a 
trial,  made  an  impressive  spectacle.     Before  them  was 


162  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

brought  the  prisoner,  to  whose  versatile  mind  the  occa- 
sion seemed  an  opportunity. 

The  two  charges  made  by  his  accusers  which  Paul  ad- 
mitted were  that  he  was  a  Christian;  and  a  leader  of 
Christians.  He  addressed  a  man  of  the  world,  yet  one 
who  well  knew  the  ingrained  beliefs  of  his  Jewish  sub- 
jects and  others  who  quite  possibly  shared  them.  Barely 
within  the  limits  of  Palestine  could  Paul  have  such  an 
audience,  rivalling  in  dignity  and  official  significance, 
the  circle  that  had  faced  him  that  last  day  at  Jerusalem. 

His  address  was  intended  for  those  of  Jewish  train- 
ing. It  elaborated  an  absolute  excuse  for  such  a  course 
as  he  had  taken.  Every  loyal  Jew  admitted  that  the 
evident  command  of  God  would  be  binding  upon  the 
conscience  and  the  activity  of  every  son  of  Israel  to  the 
setting  aside  of  whatever  stood  in  the  way. 

Beginning,  therefore,  with  a  courteous  expression  of 
his  recognition  of  the  insight  and  sympathy  which  he 
might  fairly  count  upon,  in  view  of  Agrippa's  acquaint- 
ance with  Judaism  and  of  his  sense  of  justice,  the 
apostle  appealed  to  the  general  knowledge  of  the  fact 
that  he  had  been  brought  up  a  zealous  and  scrupulous 
Pharisee  and  declared  that  his  present  plight  was  due  to 
his  desire  to  witness  concerning  the  fulfilment  of  the 
promise  which  a  Pharisee  existed  to  secure.  At  the  out- 
set of  his  career,  as  every  one  knew,  he  had  been  a  leader 
of  the  bitter  and  determined  persecution  of  the  Chris- 
tian sect.  He  had  even  planned  to  punish  its  adherents 
wherever  found.  Commissioned  to  this  end  by  the  au- 
thorities of  Judaism  he  had  journeyed  to  Damascus, 
and  on  the  way,  at  mid-day,  had  suddenly  seen  a  vision 
and  heard  a  voice  which  interpreted  to  him  his  inmost 
thought.  Responding  to  what  he  knew  to  be  a  Divine 
manifestation,  he  had  been  claimed  by  God  from  that 
day  as  his  witness-bearer  and  appointed  for  apostleship. 

According  to  Paul's  words,  as  reported  in  this  con- 
nection, he  was  active  from  the  first  as  an  apostle  to  the 
Gentiles.  We  would  naturally  infer  that  he  was  con- 
scious of  this  commission  from  the  time  of  the  vision. 


Chapter  J^l.    Paul's  Defense  before  Agrippa   163 

but  such  a  conclusion  is  not  obligatory.  Paul's  words 
surely  imply  that  his  work  for  the  Gentiles  was  iu  God's 
mind  when  the  vision  was  granted,  and  that  he  had 
himself  no  more  than  fairly  interpreted  the  Old  Testa* 
ment  Scriptures. 

When  the  eloquent  prisoner  ceased  to  relate  his  thrill- 
ing experience  and  talked  of  Moses  and  a  Christ  and 
resurrection,  Festus  thought  he  was  becoming  in- 
coherent, alid  said,  to  use  Earn  say's  clever  phrase, 
"Paul,  Paul,  you  are  a  great  philosopher,  but  you  have 
no  common  sense."  But  Paul  seized  this  half-con- 
temptuous remark  as  a  basis  for  an  appeal  to  Agrippa 
to  recognize  the  reality  and  importance  of  that  which 
Paul  had  been  saying.  Agrippa  was  not  taken  off  his 
guard.  "The  first  I  know  you  will  make  me  out  a  Chris- 
tian," he  easily  replied.  Paul  had  no  satisfaction  from 
him,  but  closed  the  interview  with  his  customary  dig- 
nity and  earnestness.  "Would  to  God  that  in  any  fashion 
I  might  bring  all  who  hear  me  to  my  position,  except 
these  bonds." 

A  great-souled  hero,  true  to  his  best  self  in  the  face 
of  patronage  or  ridicule  or  hostility  or  any  other 
attitude  on  the  part  of  great  or  small  was  the 
apostle  Paul.  Always  ready  with  his  testimony  to  what 
he  held  to  be  the  truth,  he  was  also  courteously  fair  to 
any  other  new  point,  a  true  "Christian  gentleman." 


164  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

Chapter  42,    The  Voyage  to  Rome.    Acts  27  :  1—28 :  15, 
About  A.D.  61,  62. 

The  narrative  of  the  long  voyage  to  Rome  with  its 
delays  and  perplexities,  its  dangers  and  triumphs,  has 
justly  been  termed  one  of  the  most  vivid  and  striking 
stories  pieserved  in  the  New  Testament.  It  abounds 
with  details  which  bespeak  the  eyewitness  as  well  as  the 
friendly  biographer.  Yet  the  one  who  penned  it  was 
not  thinking  so  much  of  making  a  diary  of  the  voyage 
as  of  enhancing  the  apostle's  repute  for  courage,  self- 
control,  good  sense  and  sincere  faith. 

The  narrative  has  met  the  test  of  expert  critical  inves- 
tigation and  is  everywhere  admitted  to  be  a  first-hand 
account  of  the  events  described,  of  great  value  geograph- 
ically and  religiously.  It  adds  the  completing  touch  to 
the  portraiture  of  the  hero  of  the  apostolic  age,  while 
being  "the  most  valuable  record  of  navigation  which  has 
come  to  us  from  ancient  times." 

A  true  hero  Paul  showed  himself  to  be  amid  the 
scenes  of  peril  and  disaster.  His  was  the  personality 
around  whom  all  others  gathered,  whose  calmness  and 
force  gave  every  one  courage  and  energy.  Christianity 
had  no  more  effective  witness  than  the  great-souled  and 
stout-hearted  apostle,  whose  confidence  in  God  was  un- 
shakable and  unfailing. 

The  interesting  details  of  the  voyage  from  Cassarea 
to  Malta  have  been  exhaustingly  discussed  in  Smithes 
famous  monograph,  ''The  Voyage  and  Shipwreclc  of  St. 
Paul/'  and  by  Eamsay,  in  ''St.  Paul  the  Traveller.** 
Not  all  authorities  agree  as  to  minor  details;  but  con- 
cerning the  voyage  as  a  whole  there  is  little  difference 
of  opinion. 

The  "we"  of  the  first  verse  included  Paul,  Luke  and 
Aristarchus.  Eamsay  argues  that  they  must  have  gone 
with  Paul  as  his  slaves,  passing  as  such.  His  reasons 
for  80  thinking  are  that  they  would  not  have  been  al- 
lowed to  accompany  Paul  as  his  friends,  and  that  Paul 
was  treated  with  the  deference  and  courtesy  -^h'ch  im- 


Chapter  4^.     The  Voyage  to  Borne  J 65 

plied  his  tecognition  as  a  man  of  importance.  If  tHe 
vessel  was,  as  Eamsay  holds,  an  imperial  ship,  belong- 
ing to  the  Alexandrian  transport  service,  PauFs  friends 
may  not  have  had  the  status  of  passengers ;  if,  as  Wendt 
thinks,  it  was  a  privately  owned  vessel,  made  nse  of  as 
a  convenience  by  the  centurion,  they  may  havo  been 
able  to  take  independent  passage.  We  may  be  sure,  in 
any  event,  that  Luke  and  Aristarchus  would  have  ac- 
cepted any  status,  however  menial,  in  order  to  accom- 
pany and  minister  to  their  beloved  leader. 

Paul  was  in  the  charge  of  a  high-minded  centurion 
named  Julius,  who  dealt  with  him  courteously  and  with 
consideration.  He  belonged,  according  to  our  narra- 
tive, to  the  "Augustan  cohort,"  which  means  that  he 
was  either  an  officer  of  one  of  the  auxiliary  or  provincial 
companies,  or,  as  Eamsay  conjectures,  that  he  was  a 
legionary  centurion  on  detached  service  for  communica- 
tion between  the  emperor  and  his  armies  in  the  prov- 
inces. He  had  other  prisoners  under  his  charge  and  a 
considerable  number  of  soldiers. 

They  embarked  on  an  Adramyttian  coaster  which  was 
bound  homeward,  there  being  probably  no  available 
vessel  ready  to  sail  for  Rome.  Stopping  one  by  one  in 
the  harbors  of  the  Syrian  coast  or  of  Asia,  they  were 
likely  to  pick  up  such  a  vessel  as  they  needed.  On  the 
second  day  out  from  Caesarea  the  ship  touched  at  Sidon, 
where  Paul  received  permission  to  go  ashore  and  meet 
the  Christian  community.  It  must  have  been  to  him 
a  precious  privilege  to  mingle  freely  once  more  among 
those  who  loved  and  venerated  him.  It  was  all  over  too 
soon.  Probably  it  was  their  last  sight  of  the  great- 
hearted apostle  and  his  last  experience  of  the  region 
at  once  so  dear  to  him  and  so  hostile. 

Continuing  the  ship  worked  its  way  along  east  of 
Cyprus  until  it  reached  the  Cilician  coast  and  then 
from  point  to  point,  until  it  came  to  Myra,  one  of  the 
notable  ports  for  the  traffic  of  the  Mediterranean.  Ships 
bound  to  and  from  Egypt  invariably  called  at  this  port, 
from  which  under  a  favoring  breeze  they  could  sail 


166  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

straight  to  Alexandria,  and  to  which  they  could  beat 
their  way  up  the  coast  from  Egypt.  Egypt  was  a 
granary  for  Rome  and  the  grain  trade  between  the  two 
countries  was  of  great  magnitude  and  importance.  The 
ship  which  the  centurion  found  at  Myra  was  one  of  the 
vessels  engaged  in  this  sort  of  commerce.  It  was 
loaded  with  wheat  and  bound  for  Eome.  From  the 
fact  that  it  could  carry  two  hundred  and  seventy-eight 
passengers  we  may  infer  that  it  was  of  considerable  size. 
Conybeare  and  Howson  estimate  it  at  five  hundred  tons 
burden. 

The  second  voyage  progressed  rather  slowly,  and  they 
were  forced  at  last  to  find  shelter  on  the  south  shore 
of  Crete  in  the  harbor  of  Fair  Havens.  Here  for  some 
time  they  lay  weatherbound,  until  the  dangerous  season 
for  navigation  had  well  begun.  Paul  advised  wintering 
at  Fair  Havens,  but  the  centurion,  whose  decision 
seemed  preponderant,  not  unnaturally  preferred  to  fol- 
low the  advice  of  the  sailing-master  and  the  captain, 
who  desired  to  make  every  effort  to  reach  a  better 
harbor. 

A  moderate  breeze  arising  from  the  south,  the  captain 
seized  the  chance  to  make  the  desired  harbor,  only 
forty  miles  away.  But  a  sudden,  eddying  squall  blew 
down  with  tremendous  force  from  the  towering  moun- 
tains which  lined  the  coast,  and  drove  the  ship  before 
it.  Sheltered  slightly  behind  the  little  island  of  Cauda, 
it  was  possible  to  haul  in  and  make  fast  the  boat,  to 
undergird  the  badly  strained  vessel  with  cables  and  to 
shorten  sail,  leaving  just  enough  spread  to  keep  the 
sliip  from  helpless  drifting.  Their  great  danger  was 
lliat  the  ship  would  founder  under  such  a  continual 
."-train.  The  sailors  therefore  began  to  throw  overboard 
the  cargo  and  the  fittings  of  the  vessel,  so  as  to  lighten 
it.  Day  after  day  the  storm  continued.  Sailors  and 
]iassengers  alike  lost  hope.  But  at  this  emergency  Paul 
came  as  ever  to  the  rescue.  With  calmness  and  the 
courage  born  of  conviction  he  assured  them  that  in  a 
vision  ho  liad  been  told  that  all  would  escape. 


Chapter  J^2.     The  Voyage  to  Rome 


167 


Oa  the  fourteenth  night  the  sailors  became  certain 
that  the  ship  was  drawing  near  to  land.  Fearing  a 
rocky  coast  they  cast  out  four  anchors  and  waited  for 
daylight.  Meanwhile  some  of  the  sailors  attempted  to 
desert  but  were  prevented  by  PauFs  keenness  and  vig- 
ilance. At  this  moment  of  anxiety  and  uncertainty 
Paul  with  supreme  common  sense,  alive  to  the  fact  that 
they  needed  strength  for  the  struggle  of  the  morrow, 
encouraged  all  to  take  food,  setting  an  example  himself. 

When  daylight  came  they  saw  that  the  coast  was  un- 
familiar but  noted  a  sandy  beach  onto  which  they 
hoped  to  drive  the  vessel.     Making  for  this  the  vessel 


Piiteoli,   Paid's  Landing-place  in  Italy. 

grounded  unexpectedly  and  began  to  be  broken  by  the 
violence  of  the  waves.  At  this  juncture  the  soldiers  de- 
sired to  kill  the  prisoners,  for  whom  they,  not  the 
sailors,  were  responsible,  but  Julius,  with  a  lively  sense 
of  their  obligations  to  Paul,  commanded  that  every  one 
should  be  allowed  to  get  to  shore. 

The  island  on  which  they  had  been  wrecked  was 
rvfalta.  The  inhabitants  were  barbarous  only  in  the 
sense  of  being  unable  to  speak  Greek.  They  treated  the 
shipwrecked  company  with  kindness  and  generosity  as 
long  as  they  remained  on  the  island.  This  kindness 
Paul  fully  repaid  by  healing  the  father  of  the  chief 
magistrate  and  many  others  who  were  diseased. 

At  last,  however,  another  grain  ship  was  found  which 
was  ready  to  sail  for  Rome.    Tt  quickly  reached  Pnteoli, 


168  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

whence  the  remainder  of  the  journey  would  be  over- 
land. Both  there  and  nearer  Eome  Paul  came  into 
such  friendly  and  unexpected  contact  with  the  Christian 
brethren  that  it  gave  him  new  courage  and  confidence 
for  the  trial  which  awaited  him. 

By  his  calm  courage,  his  thoughtful  good  sense  and 
his  absolute  reliance  upon  God,  Paul  had  been  a  real 
savior  of  those  with  whom  he  voyaged.  His  was  the 
privilege  of  every  true  Christian,  to  exhibit  the  "power 
of  an  endless  life." 


Chapter  43,    Paul  a  Prisoner  at  Rome.    Acts  28  :  16-31; 
Rom.  ch.  16;  Phil.  1:12-26,    About  A.D.  61-63. 

The  hearty  welcome  which  he  received  from  repre- 
sentatives of  the  Christian  churches  at  Puteoli  and  at 
Rome  gave  gladness  of  heart  and  encouragement  to 
Paul.  Again  he  was  among  his  friends  and  well- 
wishers,  those  with  whom  he  could  have  fellowship  and 
through  whom  he  could  work.  It  is  idle  to  ask  whether 
this  friendly  reception  grew  out  of  the  letter  sent  from 
Corinth  two  or  more  years  before  or  rested  upon  the 
admiration  and  confidence  which  all  Gentile  Christians 
must  have  felt  toward  the  apostle.  If  the  sixteenth 
chapter  of  the  letter  to  the  Romans  is  a  genuine  part  of 
the  letter,  as  the  majority  of  students  find  no  difficulty 
in  believing,  then  Paul  found  among  those  who  came  to 
greet  him  some  at  least  whom  he  had  known  in  his 
missionary  journeyings  in  Asia  and  Greece.  If  Phoebe, 
who  had  been  such  a  valued  friend,  and  Prisca  and 
Aquila,  his  trusted  fellow-workers,  and  Epaenetus,  his 
first  convert  in  Asia,  were  still  at  Rome,  with  what  over- 
flowing joy  the  apostle  would  have  greeted  them!  If 
the  rest  of  those  saluted  in  that  chapter  by  name  or  any 
portion  of  them  were  among  the  (rroup  which  walked 
out  forty  miles  to  meet  him  ai  the  Market  of  Appius,  or 
ten  miles  nearer,  at  the  Three  Taverns,  there  is  no  occa- 


Chapter  43.    Paul  a  Prisoner  at  Rome        169 


sion  for  surprise  at  the  warmth  of  Paul's  reception  or  at 
the  good  effect  of  it  upon  him.  The  presence  of  loyal 
friends,  who  loved  him  for  his  own  sake  and  were  eager 
to  join  with  him  in  sacrificial  service,  was  a  balm  which 
quickly  healed  the  apostle's  distress  and  gave  him  cheer. 

The  centurion,  Julius,  must  have  testified  strongly  to 
the  character  of  Paul,  and  to  his  own  conviction  of  his 
innocence,  for  the  latter  was  treated,  from  the  Eoman 
point  of  view,  with  great  leniency.  The  stern  spirit  of 
justice,  which  pervaded  the 
administration  of  Roman 
law,  led  that  people  to  be 
slow  to  overlook  offenses  as 
well  as  prompt  in  dealing 
with  them.  Paul  was  under 
serious  charges  and,  despite 
his  evident  nobleness  and 
probable  freedom  from 
guilt,  was  to  be  closely 
guarded  until  properly 
acquitted.  He  was  evi- 
dently given  permission  to 
live  in  lodgings  of  his 
own,  although  kept  under 
the  unceasingly  vigilant 
surveillance  of  a  soldier 
to  whom  he  was  fastened  by  a  light  wrist-chain.  At 
his  own  house  he  was  free  to  receive  whom  he  chose  and 
to  do  as  he  would,  subject  only  to  the  presence  and  the 
w^hims  of  the  soldier.  So  courteous  and  companionable 
a  man  as  Paul  soon  made  subjection  of  his  guards,  so 
that  they  hindered  him  in  th?  least  possible  degree.  He 
thus  converted  a  trying  situation  into  an  opportunity. 

On  the  third  or  fourth  day  after  his  arrival  Paul 
invited  the  leaders  amons:  the  Jews  to  meet  him.  He 
doubtless  wipbed,  if  possible,  to  conciliate  them  and  to 
anticipate  the  false  reports  which  were  sure  to  come 
from  Judea  at  the  earliest  possible  moment.  It  is  sur- 
prising to  note  that  they  declared  themselves  unaware 


Traditional  Hoase  of  St.  Faol,  in 
Rome. 


170  Tlie  Apostolic  Leaders 

of  the  case  against  Paul,  and  in  the  dark  as  to  the  nature 
of  the  Christian  sect  of  whose  existence  and  bad  name 
among  the  Jews  they  were  fully  informed.  Doubtless 
with  them  as  with  the  leaders  in  Jerusalem  at  the  first, 
Christianity  had  simply  been  recognized  as  a  fanatical 
movement  or  new  sect  of  Judaism.  Of  this  sort  of 
thing  Judaism  was  fairly  tolerant.  Its  leaders  could 
calmly  ignore  such  developments,  so  long  as  the  adher- 
ents of  these  sects  were  loyal  to  the  general  principles 
of  Judaism. 

This  personal  meeting  led  to  another  at  which  Paul 
presented  his  Gospel  to  a  large  assembly.  All  day  long 
he  set  forth  his  views  of  the  fulfilment  through  Jesus 
of  the  hopes  of  the  prophets.  Some  of  his  hearers 
believed;  many  were  indifferent.  There  was  much  fruit- 
less discussion  and  at  last  Paul  dismissed  them  with 
the  declaration  that  Isaiah's  prophetic  word  regarding 
his  practically  ineffective  mission  to  the  men  of  Judah 
was  finding  a  continuing  fulfilment  in  them.  They 
were  unwilling  to  consider  God's  message  with  unpreju- 
diced minds.  Hence  it  would  be  set  before  the  Gentiles 
who  were  ready  to  listen  to  it.  His  last  words  carried 
a  note  of  assurance  and  triumph,  "They  will  also  hear.'* 
Paul  was  not  disheartened  by  the  unwillingness  cf  his 
Jewish  brethren  to  listen  to  his  words,  for  he  knew  that 
by  the  grace  of  God  the  message  had  been  received 
before  and  had  full  confidence  that  it  would  be  the 
means  of  bringing  men  and  women  to  a  loving  accept- 
ance of  Christ  as  their  Saviour  in  the  days  to  come. 

How  Paul  measured  those  days  we  can  only  con- 
jecture. Probably  he  had  hoped  for  a  speedy  trial  and 
confidently  expected  a  release.  The  reasons  for  the 
long  delay  are  nowhere  stated.  Bartlet  calls  attention 
to  the  probability  that  the  "first  five  years"  of  Nero's 
reign,  during  which  tliat  young  prince  was  much  under 
the  guidance  of  Seneca,  his  old  tutor,  and  of  Burrus, 
the  noble-minded  praetorian  prefect,  were  now  passed. 
Burrus  died  in  a.  d.  62,  and  was  succeeded  by  Tigelli- 
nus,  one  of  Nero's  most  profligate  and  worthless  associ- 


Chapter  43.    Paul  a  Prisoner  at  Rome         171 

ates,  a  man  incapable,  save  by  accident,  of  acting  from 
motives  of  justice.  Under  their  joint  regime  anything 
might  happen. 

Toward  the  end  of  Paul's  stay  in  Kome  he  wrote  the 
beautiful  letter  of  thankful  acknowledgment  of  their 
generous  friendship  which  we  know  as  his  letter  to  the 
Philippians.  From  the  allusions  in  this  letter  to  his 
experiences  we  gain  some  light  upon  the  events  of  these 
two  years.  As  the  closing  verse  of  Acts  declares,  he  had 
been  able  to  preach  the  Gospel  with  boldness  and  suc- 
cess, "unhindered."  His  apparent  misfortunes  had  only 
served  to  advance  his  purposes.  Even  throughout  the 
praetorian  guard,  to  which  his  soldier  companions  be- 
longed, he  had  made  Christianity  honored.  His  example 
of  courage  and  zeal  had  stimulated  his  Christian  breth- 
ren, so  that  they  were  likewise  zealous  in  preaching. 
Even  his  enemies,  in  their  desire  to  give  him  trouble, 
only  aided  in  making  Christian  ideas  known  far  and 
wide. 

These  two  years  were  not,  therefore,  unfruitful,  nor 
were  they  years  of  unhappiness.  Paul  believed  in  mak- 
ing use  for  noble  ends  of  any  situation  in  which  he 
found  himself.  He  would  not  be  controlled  by  it,  but 
became  its  master.  The  Christian  is  continually  placed 
where  he  feels  himself  circumscribed  and  hindered. 
Like  Paul,  he  may  discover  therein  a  new  opportunity. 


172 


TJie  Apostolic  Leaders 


Chapter  44.  Paul's  Letter  to  the  Church  at  Philippi. 
Selections  from  Philippians.  Written  from  prison 
between  A,  D.  61  and  63. 

While  Paul  was  in  prison  at  Caesarea  and  at  Eome  he 
had  found  much  time  for  careful  meditation.  For 
twenty  years  previous  his  life  had  been  one  of  constant 
activity  as  an  evangelist  and  overseer  of  the  churches. 
Such  letters  as  he  wrote,  with  the  single  exception  of 
the  epistle  to  the  Eomans,  were  emergency  letters, 
aimed  at  specific  troubles,  and  made  of  permanent  value 
because  they  gave  expression  to  the  mind  of  Christ  and 
dealt  with  even  petty  problems  in  a  noble,  far-reaching, 
Christ-like  way. 

During  these  months  of  enforced  inactivity  or  rela- 
tive leisure  the  great  apostle  had  come  more  and  more 


From  a  pkotograph. 

Rains  of  the  Palace  of  tlie  Ctesars.  li  Rome. 


clearly  to  see  that  the  great  Christian  remedy  for  all 
manner  of  evil  was  to  cultivate  Christlikeness,  and 
that  so  to  do  was  to  enter  into  the  religious  inheritance 
of  the  ages,  since  Christ  was  the  summation  of  all  which 
they  had  helped  to  reveal  regarding  God. 

The  controversy  regarding  the  value  of  circumcision 
and  literal  obedience  to  the  Mosaic  law  had  pa&spd  by. 
The  Judaizers  were  no  longer  formidable,  although  not 
wholly  eliminated.  There  was  a  growing  sense  of  the 
unity  of  the  church  as  a  whole  over  which  t'le  apostolic 
leader  could  rejoice.     Tlic  personal  opposition  to  him- 


Chapter  44.     PaiiVs  Letter  to  the  Philippians     173 

self  had  ceased  to  be  dangerous.  But  there  was  a  new 
tendency,  prevailing  especially  in  the  churches  centering 
near  Ephesus,  toward  ascetic  practices  as  aids  to  holi- 
ness, and  toward  philosophical  speculation  with  regard 
to  the  person  of  Christ,  with  which  it  was  needful  for 
him  to  deal.  He  avoided  direct  attack  and  adopted  the 
vastly  more  effective  method  of  urging  upon  his  dis- 
ciples a  conception  of  Christ  and  a  pattern  of  life  which 
would  of  themselves  set  aside  or  obscure  the  specula- 
tions and  the  practices.  Paul's  method  is  more  obvious 
in  his  letters  sent  directly  to  the  churches  of  Asia,  viz., 
Colossians  and  Ephesians,  than  in  the  letter  he  wrote  to 
his  Philippian  friends. 

The  letter  to  Philippi  was  first  of  all  a  friendly  let- 
ter, written  to  express  Paul's  gratitude  toward  the 
church  which  had  so  unfailingly  and  ungrudgingly 
come  to  his  help  in  times  of  need,  not  because  of  any 
appeal  on  his  part,  but  out  of  an  overflowing  heart  of 
affectionate  love.  It  is  therefore  a  letter  of  recognition 
and  encouragement,  rather  than  a  discussion  of  contro- 
verted matters.  Tt  is  dominated  by  the  glorious  thought 
of  the  headship  of  Christ  and  refers  to  speculative  mat- 
ters only  in  an  individual  way.  Tt  is  beyond  question 
such  a  letter  that  no  church  receiving  it  would  ever  per- 
mit it  to  be  lost.  It  reveal?  the  apostle's  noble  self, 
his  responsiveness,  his  deep  affection,  his  generosity,  his 
modesty  and  his  wonderful  courage.  It  shows  also  the 
growing  simplicity  and  directness  of  his  creed.  "Have 
this  mind  in  you,  which  was  also  in  Christ  Jesus." 

The  epistle  explains  itself.  It  was  probably  written 
after  the  other  three  of  this  group  of  letters  of  the  im- 
prisonment at  Pome.  It  was  evidently  occasioned 
(2 :  25)  by  the  return  of  Epaphroditus  to  Philippi  from 
Rome.  The  church  had  sent  him  to  Rome  to  bear  a 
generous  gift  to  their  beloved  but  imprisoned  leader. 
Paul  had  detained  him  in  Rome  (2:25)  to  assist  in 
evangelistic  work.  In  the  course  of  this  he  was  infected 
with  some  disease  (2:30)  and  became  desperately  ill. 
His  convalescence  was  retarded   (2:26)   by  his  hom.e- 


174  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

sickness  and  anxiety  lest  the  church  should  be  disturbed 
over  the  news  of  his  illness.  Paul,  therefore,  thought 
best  to  despatch  him  to  Philippi  without  delay  (3:25) 
and  sent  along  this  model  of  friendly  letters  of  acknowl- 
edgment, which  gathers  up,  not  only  this  last  evidence 
of  the  generous  thoughtfulness  of  the  Philippians,  but 
the  many  earlier  testimonials  (e.  g.  2  Cor.  11:9)  of 
their  love. 

It  begins,  as  his  letters  usually  do,  with  a  salutation, 
which  is  unique,  however,  in  containing  a  reference  to 
officers  of  the  church.  It  is  the  earliest  reference  in 
first  hand  New  Testament  writings  to  bishops  or 
deacons. 

The  thanksgiving  is  noteworthy.  There  is  nothing 
perfunctory  in  it.  Paul  gives  expression  to  the  joy  with 
which  he  recurs  in  thankfu]  prayer  to  their  continuing 
fellowship  in  things  spiritual  from  the  very  beginning, 
and  to  the  tender  love  with  which  his  heart  is  fillerl,  and 
to  the  hope  that  they  may  so  advance  in  sound  Christian 
character  and  in  insight  and  in  goodness  that  their  lives 
will  abound  in  all  manaer  of  Christian  fruitfubiess 
(1:3-11). 

Referring  in  passing  to  his  situation  as  a  prisoner, 
regarding  which  they  would  be  anxious,  Paul  declares 
(1:12-18)  that  his  imprisonment  had  resulted  in  pro- 
moting the  preaching  of  Christ  among  the  soldiers  and 
in  encouraging  other  Christians  to  boldness  of  speech. 
Not  all  were  single-minded  even  among  those  who 
preached  Christ,  some  so  doing  it  as  to  embarrass  Paul. 
But  after  all,  in  one  way  or  another,  Christ  was  pro- 
claimed. 

Such  proclamation  could  but  result  in  good  so  long 
as  the  apostle  was  sincere  and  brave.  Whether  he  lived 
or  died  was  immaterial.  To  die  and  be  with  the  blessed 
Master,  this  was  his  preference;  but  yet,  he  would 
gladly  live,  if  by  living  he  could  contribute  to  their  re- 
ligious growth  (1:  19-26).  It  was  for  them  to  be  con- 
tented with  nothing  less  than  the  finest  and  noblest  type 
of  life,  to  be  (steadfast  and  courageous  under  persecu- 


Chapter  44-    Paul's  Letter  to  the  PhiUppians     175 

lion,  transforming  it  into  an  assurance  of  fellowship 
with  Christ  (1:27-30). 

Then  follows  an  affectionate  appeal  (2:1-5),  in  view 
of  such  spiritual  blessings,  to  cultivate  oneness  of  spirit 
and  that  glorious  unselfishness  which  characterized 
Christ,  who  through  putting  Himself  into  the  limita- 
tions of  humanity  and  living  a  life  of  service  made 
possible  His  exaltation  and  universal  recognition 
(2 :  6-11).  They  were  to  be  zealous  in  works  of  right- 
eousness, recognizing  the  help  of  God,  and  to  avoid  be- 
ing disputatious,  in  order  to  wield  a  strong  influence 
among  men. 

Paul  paused  to  pay  a  beautiful  tribute  to  Timothy 
for  his  genuinely  unselfish  serviceableness,  and  to 
Epaphroditus,  their  messenger,  who  had  proved  himself 
a  brave  and  zealous  co-worker  with  Paul,  who  had  been 
dangerously  ill,  but  had  been  providentially  spared  to 
them  and  to  him.  Paul  bade  them  receive  him  gMly 
and  with  every  token  of  appreciation  of  his  courageous 
friendship  (2:19-30). 

The  apostle  then  touches  upon  matters  which  require 
a  little  friendly  advice.  He  bids  them  beware  of  Juda- 
izers  and  their  boasts.  Whates^er  they  boasted  about, 
Paul  could  claim  in  greater  measure  (3:1-6).  But 
matters  of  this  sort  he  counted  as  of  minor  importance, 
not  to  be  compared  with  the  value  of  a  real  knowledge 
of  Christ,  a  knowledge  of  His  personality,  of  His  sacri- 
ficial spirit,  an  insight  by  experience  into  the  suffering 
He  must  have  undergone  (3:  7-11).  This  supreme  at- 
tainment not  even  he  could  claim,  but  he  was  eagerly 
and  constantly  pressing  toward  it  (3:12-16). 

This  spirit  Paul  would  commend,  warning  his  dis- 
ciples to  beware  of  the  example  of  some  who  had  given 
themselves  over  to  self-indulgence.  The  life  of  the 
Christian  must  be  in  the  heavens,  then  his  Lord  will 
make  his  body  sometime  to  correspond   (3:17 — 4:1). 

With  a  personal  word  for  some  members  of  the 
church,  Paul,  in  separate  sentences,  urges  his  friends  to 
tejoice,  to  be  gentle,  to  thankfully  rest  on  God  (4:  2-7), 


176  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

and,  in  unforgettable  words,  proclaims  tke  ideals  of  life 
for  which  he  has  always  stood  (4:  8,  9). 

The  closing  paragraph  is  another  beautiful  expression 
of  his  gratitude  and  joy  over  their  generosity.  Not  be- 
cause his  need  was  relieved,  for,  if  need  be,  he  could  en- 
dure privation  cheerfully,  but  because  it  laid  bare  their 
loving  hearts  and  their  true  faith  in  God.  His  last  wish 
was  that  God  would  freely  supply  their  spiritual  needs 
out  of  the  riches  of  His  grace. 

So  gracefully  and  tenderly  closes  this  friendly  letter 
of  thanks.  Paul  expressed  his  gratitude  by  trying  to 
take  them  out  upon  the  mountain  top  with  him,  and  to 
give  them  a  vision  of  the  glorious  kingdom  of  which 
they  were  all  citizens.  They  who  gained  "the  mind  of 
Christ'^  would  not  be  readily  tempted  by  the  petty 
thoughts  of  those  who  never  knew  Him. 


Chapter  45.  Paul's  Piea  to  Philemon  on  Behalf  of 
Onesimus.  Philemon.  Written  between  A.D.  61 
and  63. 

Some  one  lias  said  with  reference  to  the  letter  of  Paul 
to  the  Philippians  that  it  is  "in  his  happiest  mood,  the 
noblest  reflection  of  his  personal  character."  Quite  pos- 
sibly the  careful  reader  of  his  exquisite  note  to  Phile- 
mon would  challenge  the  superlative.  Where  could  he 
find  a  friendly  plea  more  fitly  framed,  more  delicately 
yet  definitely  urged  and  on  a  broader  basis?  How  could 
the  greatness  and  gentleness  and  personal  friendliness 
of  the  apostle  be  made  more  apparent! 

The  note  to  Philemon,  which  we  find  tucked  away  at 
the  end  of  the  collection  of  epistles  supposed  io  be 
Pauline,  as  if  it  were  both  the  shortest  and  the  least 
important,  must  have  been  sent  to  Colosse  along  with 
the  letter  to  that  church  and  the  one  intended  for 
Laodicea  (Col.  4 :  16).    It  alludes  to  the  same  set  of  fel- 


Chapter  JfO.     Paul's  Plea  to  Philemon        177 

low  workers  (Philem.  vss.  23,  24;  cf.  Col.  4: 10, 12,  14) 
and  salutes  as  a  member  of  Philemon's  household  an 
Archippns,  who  is  probably  the  very  one  given  a 
friendly  warning  at  the  end  of  the  letter  to  the  church 
at  Colosse  (Col.  4:17). 

It  is  a  private  letter  to  one  whom  Paul  had  converted 
to  Christianity  (vs.  19)  and  with  whom  he  stood  in 
close  and  friendly  relations.  Philemon  must  have  been 
a  man  of  prominence  and  substance.  The  church 
gathers  weekly  at  his  house  (vs.  2).  His  son,  Archip- 
pus,  if  we  are  warranted  in  so  placing  the  one  thus 
named,  is  an  evangelist,  a  fellow  soldier,  with  (Col. 
4: 17)  a  great  opportunity  before  him. 

The  student  of  the  writings  of  Paul  comes  to  realize 
that  we  are  by  no  means  in  possession  of  all  that  Paul 
wrote.  The  epistles  to  the  Corinthians  should  be  multi- 
plied by  two  in  order  to  represent  the  letters  sent  from 
him  to  them.  There  is  much  probability  that  he  wrote 
more  than  two  to  the  Thessalonians.  It  is  scarcely 
credible  that  he  never  made  written  acknowledgment 
of  the  repeated  gifts  of  the  church  at  Philippi  to  him 
until  the  very  end  of  his  life.  Moreover  with  his  wide 
acquaintance  and  restless  energy  and  constant  interest 
in  churches  and  individuals  it  seems  not  unreasonable 
to  suppose  that  he  put  forth  during  the  twenty  years  or 
so  of  his  busy  ministry  a  really  voluminous  correspond- 
ence, of  which  we  have  only  a  portion  extant.  This 
genial,  affectionate,  tactful  note  represents  in  all  prob- 
ability many  others  with  which  he  delighted  and 
inspired  his  faithful  followers.  Why  it  should  have 
been  spared  from  the  oblivion  which  overtook  the  others 
we  can  only  conjecture.  When  Paul  wrote  at  all,  he 
probably  wrote  in  some  such  way  as  this,  never  foolishly 
or  weakly.  It  is  fortunate  that  one  of  his  notes  was 
preserved,  that  we  might  see  a  model  of  what  a  Chris- 
tian letter  may  be. 

The  purpose  of  Paul  in  writing  was  to  intercede  on 
behalf  of  Onesimus,  a  former  slave  of  Philemon,  who 
had  run  away  from  his  master  and  drifted  to  Rome? 


i 78  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

where  he  had  been  converted  under  Paul's  preaching. 
He  had  shown  his  gratitude  by  zealously  devoting  him- 
self to  Paul's  personal  service,  and  the  apostle  came  to 
have  a  sincere  regard  for  him.  As  a  matter  of  princi- 
ple, however,  Paul  felt  that  Onesimus  ought  to  return 
to  his  master,  whose  lawful  property  he  was.  He 
despatches  him  along  with  Tychicus,  carrying  this  per- 
sonal note  to  his  master. 

And  how  could  Philemon  resist  its  seductiveness! 
San  any  one  question  the  probability  that  Onesimus 
went  back  to  a  relationship  which  was  far  different  from 
the  old  bond  service  from  which  he  had  fled!  He 
served  once  more,  no  doubt,  but  with  pride  in  doing 
his  best  for  conscience'  sake  and  with  friendly  recog- 
nition on  his  master's  part.  From  Paul's  play  on  the 
name  of  the  slave  (vs.  11)  we  may  perhaps  infer  that 
Onesimus  had  been  a  problem  to  his  owner  and  may 
have  needed  discipline. 

Paul's  salutation  is  comprehensive  and  yet  direct. 
Uniting  Timothy,  who  was  well  known  among  the 
churches  of  Asia,  with  him  in  it,  he  addresses  Philemon 
as  an  old  and  valued  associate,  Apphia,  a  lady  who  was 
probably  his  wife,  and  Archippus,  the  evangelist  also 
mentioned  in  the  letter  to  the  church,  probably  his  son, 
and  finally  the  church  which  was  accustomed  to  meet 
at  his  house.  The  time  of  stately  edifices  of  worship 
had  not  come  as  yet.  Christians  met  for  their  "Lord's 
day"  services  in  private  houses,  in  the  open  air  at  some 
secluded  spot,  wherever  they  might  be  undisturbed. 
I'hey  were  very  few  and  often  very  poor. 

The  thanksgiving  is  tactful  but  sincere.  Paul  had 
probably  met  Philemon  at  Ephesus  but  had  not  seen 
him  for  years.  He  alludes  to  the  thankfulness  ever  in 
his  heart  over  Philemon's  course  of  life,  liis  sturdy  faith, 
his  generous  spirit  of  love,  and  declares  that  his  con- 
stant prayer  is  that  Philemon's  Christian  experience 
may  ripen  into  an  aboundins:  in  everything  that  inakes 
for  Christian  perfection.  Above  all  Paul  rejoiced  in 
his  hospitality  and  helpfulness  to  his  Christian  brethren. 


Chapter  J^o.     Paul' a  Plea  to  Philemon        179 

Here  again  we  find  an  incidental  reference  to  the  sense 
of  fellowship  and  mutual  obligation  which  was  so 
characteristic  of  early  Christianity  in  its  best  phapes. 

Now  Paul  comes  to  the  point.  Although  as  an 
acknowledged  apostle  and  leader  of  the  Christian 
brotherhood  he  might  command,  he  rather  prefers  to 
ask  as  a  favor,  in  view  of  his  years  of  hard  service,  his 
gray  hairs  and  his  present  duress  on  behalf  of  the 
faith,  that  Onesimus,  the  runaway  slave,  once 
"Unprofitable"  but  now  again  truly  "Profitable" — 
punning  on  the  meaning  of  the  name  Onesimus,  "Help- 
ful"— be  received  back  with  forgiveness  and  cons:  dera- 
tion. Paul  adds  that  Onesimus  had  become  so  helpful 
that  he  could  hardly  bear  to  send  him  away.  He  begged 
Philemon  to  treat  him,  not  as  a  slave  without  rights, 
but  as  a  Christian  brother.  If  Onesimus  had  a  debt 
remembered  against  him,  let  it  be  wiped  out.  Paul 
would  gladly  pay  for  it. 

PauFs  last  appeal  was  that  he  should  do  what  Christ 
would  have  him  do.  "Show  me  that  you  have  the  mind 
of  Christ."  He  closes  with  an  expression  of  his  confi- 
dence that  his  release  would  soon  come,  and  bespeaks 
Philemon's  hospitality. 

A  delightful  letter  in  every  way,  but  noteworthy 
because  of  the  way  in  which  it  dealt  with  an  important 
social  problem.  Slavery  was  a  universal  fact  of  Paul's 
day,  all  forms  of  labor  being  carried  on  by  slaves.  Some 
were  very  degraded ;  many  were  intelligent ;  a  few  were 
cultured.     They  were  at  the  mercy  of  their  masters, 

Christianity  and  slavery  could  not  always  coexist. 
The  very  essence  of  Christianity  was  self-determination, 
freedom,  responsibility.  The  slaves  listened  eagerly  to 
the  teachings  of  the  evangelists  and  apostles  and  entered 
the  Christian  brotherhood.  They  naturally  chafed 
under  the  galling  yoke  of  servitude  in  proportion  as 
they  realized  the  true  significance  and  opportunity  of 
manhood. 

Paul  dealt  tactfully  and  wisely  with  this  delicate 
situation.     The  recognition  of  their  standing  as  Chris- 


180  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

tian  brethren  was  the  sure  starting-point  of  permanent 
emancipation.  But  he  ever  counseled  slaves  to  be  zeal- 
ous to  do  their  recognized  duty.  As  if  to  help  take  away 
the  sting  of  the  word,  Paul,  at  this  period,  delights  to 
call  himself  "the  slave  of  Jesus  Christ,"  as  if  to  say, 
servitude  is  no  disgrace  in  itself,  but  may  be  made  hon- 
orable and  noble.  He  deals  with  the  relations  of  slaves 
and  masters  in  Colossians,  Ephesians,  First  Timothy 
and  Titus.  The  keynote  of  what  he  says  is,  '^e  serve 
the  Lord  Christ,  not  merely  your  human  master.  Let 
this  glorify  and  irradiate  your  hard  toil."  To  the  mas- 
ters he  said,  "Make  these  Christian  slaves  your  partners, 
treat  them  as  devoted  brethren."  Under  such  princi- 
ples of  action  slavery  was  doomed. 


Chapter  46.  Paul's  Letters  to  the  Churches  of  Asia. 
Selections  from  Ephesians  and  Colossians.  Written 
between  A.  D.  58—63. 

With  the  friendly  note  to  Philemon  of  Colosse  went 
at  least  two  other  letters  of  supreme  importance  to 
Christendom,  representing,  as  they  do,  Paul's  ripest 
thought  and  most  impressive  presentation  of  his  funda- 
mental Gospel.  Through  them  he  enabled  his  devoted 
followers  to  meet  with  confidence  a  form  of  belief  far 
more  subtle  and  dangerous  than  that  for  which  the 
Judaizers  were  sponsors,  perilous  to  faith  because  of  its 
apparent  simplicity  and  philosophical  reasonableness,  a 
danger  only  to  be  set  aside  by  clear  thinking  and 
by  the  grasp  of  the  fundamental  conceptions  of 
Christianity. 

One  of  these  letters  was  addressed  to  the  church  at 
Colosse,  a  Phrygian  city  of  the  Eoman  province  of  Asia, 
one  of  the  three  situated  in  the  beautiful  Lycus  valley. 
It  was  of  little  importance,  commercially  far  inferior  to 
either  Laodicea  or  Hierapolis,  its  neighbors.  Paul  had 
not  founded  the  church  at  Colosse,  except  by  indirec- 


Cho^pter  Jf.6,     The  Letters  to  the  Churches  of  Asia  ISl 

tion;  at  least  he  had  never  visited  it  (Col.  2:1). 
Epaphras,  who  at  the  writing  was  with  Paul  (Col.  4: 
12,  13),  had  been  the  evangelist  under  whom  the  Colos- 
sian  church  came  into  being  (Col.  1:7).  This  doubt- 
less happened  while  Paul  was  conducting  his  great  cam- 
paign at  Ephesus. 

From  the  reference  in  Colossians  4:16  we  may  infer 
that  another  letter  given  into  the  charge  of  Tychicus  was 
intended  first  of  all  for  the  church  at  Laodicea.  Each 
letter  was  to  be  passed  along  to  the  others  of  the  larger 
group  of  churches  to  which  they  belonged.  Whether 
this  Laodicean  letter  is,  as  many  suppose,  the  letter  to 
the  Ephesians  or  was  a  letter,  otherwise  unknown,  sent 
along  at  this  time  with  the  two  well-known  epistles, 
cannot  be  surely  determined. 

Une  who  closely  examines  the  letter  to  the  Ephesians 
clearly  notes  that  it  is  a  general  letter,  adapted  to  a 
group  of  sister-churches  rather  than  a  specific  letter  to 
some  particular  church.  The  words  "at  Ephesus"  in 
verse  1  are  wanting  in  the  two  best  manuscripts,  and  are 
ignored  by  some  of  the  earliest  commentators.  Prob- 
ably, therefore,  the  epistle  was  intended  by  the  apostle 
to  be  a  circular  letter  for  the  instruction  and  stimulus  of 
the  group  of  churches  for  which  Ephesus  was  a  center. 
Like  Colossians  it  deals  with  the  speculative  problems 
which  seem  to  have  been  rife  among  these  churches, 
asserting  by  way  of  greater  and  clearer  spiritual  uplift 
the  glorious  supremacy  of  Christ  over  the  universal 
church  and  the  entire  adequacy  of  His  power  in  heaven 
and  on  earth. 

The  inhabitants  of  the  Lycus  vslley,  Jews  and  pagans 
alike,  were  full  of  ideas  which  made  their  appearance  in 
Christian  thinking.  The  members  of  these  churches, 
while  sincere  Christians  at  heart,  found  it  hard  to 
emancipate  themselves  from  bondage  to  these  ideas,  so 
natural  to  them.  They  set  a  hi^h  value  on  asceticism. 
They  often  forgot  that  salvation  is  a  moral  and  spiritual 
emancipation,  and  strove  to  attain  to  it  by  some  form 
of  enlightenment   or  by   correct    conduct  which  was 


182  The  ApostoliG  Leaders 

ordered  by  rules.  Of  such  attainment  they  were  very 
proud.     It  elevated  its  disciples  above  the  masses. 

By  these  speculations  the  sense  of  close  relationship 
of  the  Christian  with  Christ  was  obscured  and  likewise 
the  sense  of  the  necessity  of  His  redemptive  power.  God 
became  a  being  so  removed  in  character  from  sinful  men 
that  a  working  connection  between  Him  and  them  could 
only  be  maintained  through  various  grades  of  angelic 
beings,  partly  divine,  partly  human.  Paul  dealt  with 
these  aberrations  in  his  characteristic  fashion,  not  so 
much  by  direct  attack  as  by  setting  forth  a  clearer  and 
simpler  religious  philosophy.  They  had  been  redeemed 
solely  through  Christ,  through  whom  therefore  they 
would  reach  complete  salvation.  In  view  of  His  exalted 
power  there  is  no  need  of  intermediate  beings.  Through 
Him  they  had  become  dead  to  their  old  world  and  born 
again  into  a  new  life  with  renewed  and  sanctified  wills. 
By  the  earnest  exercise  of  this  new  lif(3  they  would  come 
to  realize  its  possibilities  of  character  and  knowledge. 

The  two  letters,  to  the  Colossians  and  to  the  Ephe- 
sians,  are  very  similar.  They  must  have  been  written 
at  the  same  time.  The  former  centers  attention  upon 
the  unique  divinity  of  Christ  in  contrast  to  any  other 
so-called  heavenly  beings;  the  latter  emphasizes  the 
majesty  of  the  church  of  which  Christ  is  the  Head. 

Colossians  begins,  like  the  other  epistles,  with  a  salu- 
tation and  an  expression  of  thankfulness  for  the  fruit- 
fulness  of  their  lives  (1:1-8).  Paul  then  declares  his 
passionate  desire  that  they  should  pattern  after  Christ, 
the  Head  of  the  church,  the  summation  of  all  things, 
Eeconciler  of  the  world  to  God.  This  "mystery''  it  was 
his  privilege  to  preach  that  all  men  might  lay  hold  on 
God.  For  its  realization  by  men  he  longed  (2:1-5). 
He  warns  them  against  a  false  philosophy,  declaring  that 
through  Christ  men  are  born  into  a  new  life  (2 :  G-15). 
Over  such  a  life  ordinances  can  have  no  influence  (2: 
16-23).  The  Christian  should  seek  heavenly  things,  as 
those  risen  with  Christ  (3:1-4).  Sensuality,  malice 
and  the  like  should  be  put  away  and  the  full  Christian 


Chapter  46.     The  Letters  to  the  Churches  of  Asia  183 

life  be  lived  (3:5-17).  Prayerfulness,  practical  good 
sense  and  grace  of  speech  are  worth  cultivating 
(4:3-6). 

The  letter  to  the  Ephesians  takes  as  its  keynote 
association  with  Christ  "in  the  heavenlies."  The  salu- 
tation is  from  Paul  alone.  The  latter  begins  with  a 
stately  invocation  to  God  who  has  adopted  us  as  chil- 
dren, redeemed  us  through  the  Son,  and  sealed  us 
through  the  Spirit.  For  those  who  are  loyal  to  Christ 
there  ought  to  be  a  steady  enlightenment  until  they 
realize  the  greatness  of  His  power  and  His  real  place  in 
the  moral  universe  (ch.  1).  Made  alive  again  by  Him 
the  Christian  should  rise  to  live  with  Him,  a  citizen  of 
heaven,  a  part  of  God's  holy  temple.  That  Gentiles 
have  this  possibility  is  the  real  "mystery"  of  the  ages, 
now  known  to  all  (3:1-13).  In  view  of  these  things 
let  every  Christian  crave  a  knowledge  of  Christ's  love 
and  a  religious  life  with  dimensions  (3: 14-21).  There 
is  a  loving  unity  which  is  made  up  of  variety,  the  body 
composed  of  different  members.  Let  each  member  do 
its  proper  part.  Put  away  heathen  vices  and  put  on  the 
"new  man"  (4:17-24).  This  means  right  relations 
with  those  with  whom  one  deals  (4:25-32).  He  who 
follows  after  Christ  abhors  immorality  or  covetousness. 
He  is  a  child  of  the  light  (5:1-14).  He  makes  wise 
use  of  the  world;  his  heart  is  full  of  praise  and  rever- 
ence (5:15-21).  The  relation  of  husband  and  wives, 
of  children  and  parents,  of  slaves  and  masters,  should 
be  conditioned  on  their  common  relationship  to  Christ 
(5  :  22 — 6  :  9).  In  the  earnest  fight  against  evil  which 
every  one  must  wage,  let  the  Christian  make  use  of  every 
spiritual  weapon  and  go  on  to  victory  (6:10-20). 

The  great  ideas  of  these  letters  are  the  unquestionable 
supremacy  of  Christ  over  all  creation,  material  as  well' 
as  spiritual,  the  unity  of  the  church  with  Christ  as  its 
Head,  the  importance  of  remaining  with  Him  "in  the 
heavenlies,"  and  the  desirableness  of  aiming  at  fulness 
of  experience  and  all-roundedness  of  attainment. 


1S4  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

Chapter  47.  Paul's  Missionary  Career,  as  Told  by  Him- 
self. Selections  from  PiiElippians,  written  about 
A.D.  62;  and  from  1  Timothy,  written  about  A.D.  66. 

There  are  not  a  few  scholars  who  think  that  Paul 
was  never  set  free  from  the  first  Eoman  imprisonment. 
More  take  the  view  that  the  second  letter  to  Timothy 
was  written  from  Eome  during  a  second  short  im- 
prisonment following  several  years  of  freedom.  The 
question  is  perplexing,  and  may  never  be  laid  at  rest, 
in  the  absence  of  decisive  data.  In  either  case  Paul's 
effective  missionary  career  terminated  with  his  incar- 
ceration at  Eome  for  the  first  time,  and  we  may  ap- 
propriately review  that  course  of  development,  aided 
by  his  own  declarations. 

The  great  apostle  was  notable  for  delicacy  of  feel- 
ing and  self-forgetfulness.  Nothing  was  less  natural 
to  him  than  to  review  his  own  achievements.  But  he 
was  also  a  man  who  demanded  fair  play.  Traduced 
by  his  cowardly  opponents,  who  delighted  to  decry  and 
accuse  him  behind  his  back,  he  was  led,  at  various 
times,  to  defend  his  own  good  name  by  recounting 
the  labors  and  perils  which  had  been  his.  Not  infre- 
quently, like  every  good  leader,  he  surveyed  the  re- 
sults of  his  unselfish  warfare  as  a  good  soldier  of  Jesus 
Christ.  More  often  still  he  alluded  in  passing  to  the 
methods  and  motives,  the  obstacles  and  joys  of  his 
career.  From  these  we  can  reconstruct  with  assur- 
ance the  principles  of  his  active  ministry. 

His  apostolate.  he  repeatedly  declared,  originated 
with  the  Lord  Jesus,  who  had  appeared  unto  him  (1 
Cor.  15:8),  had  commissioned  him  to  his  apostolic 
work  (Gal.  1:1;  Eom.  1:5)  and  liad  revealed  to  him 
his  Gospel  (Gal.  1:12).  Bidden  to  work  among  the 
Gentiles  (Gal.  1:16;  Eom.  1:5;  15:16;  Eph.  3:8;  1 
Tim.  2:7),  not  alone  by  God  (Acts  26:16-20),  but 
also  by  the  Three  (Gal.  2:9),  he  carried  on  for  up- 
wards of  twenty  yeaTs  with  noteworthy  success  an 
evangelizing    campaign    in     Syria,     Cilicia,     Galatia, 


Chapter  Jf7.     Paul's  Missionary  Career        185 

Macedonia,  Greece  and  Asia,  which  had  resulted  in 
the  founding  of  Christian  churches  in  all  these  re- 
gions (Eom.  15:18,  19). 

Paul  was  a  natural  pioneer.  He  was  attracted  by 
the  problem  of  organizing  and  developing  churches  in 
new  communities.  He  aimed  to  go  to  unevangelized 
regions  (Rom.  15:20)  where  he  might  lay  broad 
foundations  (1  Cor.  3:6,10;  Eom.  15:23).  It  seemed 
to  him  when  he  wrote  at  Corinth  to  the  church  at 
Rome  that  he  had  actually  completed  the  work  which 
he  could  best  do  in  the  countries  bordering  the  eastern 
end  of  the  Mediterranean  (Rom.  15:23).  Paul  had 
unbounded  faith  in  the  self-sustaining  and  self-prop- 
agating power  of  Christianity  when  once  established. 
He  therefore  bent  his  energies  toward  making  strong 
beginnings. 

He  did  not,  however,  neglect  these  churches,  when 
once  they  were  founded.  He  carried  them,  individu- 
ally and  collectively,  on  his  heart  (2  Cor.  11:28).  He 
received  letters  from  them  and  wrote  carefully  in  re- 
turn. He  kept  close  watch  of  their  growth,  and  main- 
tained relations  of  deep  affection  with  their  leaders. 

When  we  heed  his  own  words  regarding  himself,  we 
would  not  rate  him  as  a  learned  or  eloquent  speaker, 
although  an  impressive  one  (1  Cor.  2:1,4;  8  Cor. 
10:10).  His  personal  presence  was,  perhaps,  inferior 
(2  Cor.  10 :1, 10) .  It  was  his  capacity,  his  great  en- 
thusiasm, his  deep  earnestness,  his  sjonpathy  and  re- 
sourcefulness, that  gave  him  such  power  over  men. 
He  was  ready  of  speech,  beyond  question,  and  perhaps 
over  modest  in  referring  to  his  own  oratorical  powers. 

It  was  a  matter  of  principle  with  Paul  to  identify 
himself  with  all  types  of  men,  to  reach  them,  as  far  as 
he  could  consistently  do  so,  at  their  level  (1  Cor. 
9:20-23;  10:32,33).  Yet  he  could  boast  on  occasion 
of  a  splendid  lineage  (2  Cor.  11:22;  Phil.  3:4-6). 
He  was  a  Hebrew  of  the  Hebrews,  a  cultured  aristo- 
crat. But  his  proudest  boast  was,  after  all,  tbat  in 
course  of  time  God  drew  him  from  that  life  of  holy 


1S6  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

selfishness  on  which  he  had  embarked,  and  made  him 
a  preacher  of  the  "mystery^'  of  Christ.  In  compari- 
son with  this  no  other  experience  seemed  a  privilege. 
He  bent  his  energies  to  the  work  of  preaching,  leaving 
details  of  church  procedure  or  of  the  instruction  of 
the  converts  whom  he  made  to  others  (1  Cor.  1:17). 
His  ministry  was  frank  and  outspoken.  He  dealt 
with  his  converts  as  a  father  (1  Cor.  4:15;  1  Thes. 
2:7,10-12)  might,  with  all  gentleness  and  considera- 
tion, and  yet  with  authority.  He  seems  to  have  taught 
them  rules  of  right  conduct  (1  Cor.  11:2),  and  dis- 
cussed the  proprieties  of  many  habits.  Inasmuch  as 
his  converts  came  in  large  proportion  from  among  the 
poor  and  ignorant,  not  a  few  being  slaves,  who  were 
not  credited  with  even  a  rudimental  morality,  such 
instruction  was  necessary  (1  Thes.  4:1).  Paul  never 
hesitated  to  declare  plainly  what  he  felt  the  situation 
demanded  (1  Thes.  2:4-6;  2  Cor.  4:2). 

Paul's  career  had  not  been  an  easy  one.  From  the 
first  day  he  met  with  trouble  (Acts  9:23).  As  an 
evangelist  he  passed  through  experiences  which  would 
have  broken  down  or  silenced  any  ordinary  man  (1 
Cor.  15:32;  16:9;  2  Cor.  7:5),  but  they  seemed  to  a 
man  of  his  splendid  idealism  but  incentives  to  more 
incessant  endeavor  (2  Cor.  4:8,9,16-18).  With  the 
utmost  difficulty  was  he  forced  to  mention  them.  They 
read  like  the  adventurous  experiences  of  intrepid  pio- 
neers. Paul  constantly  ventured  on  behalf  of  the  Gos- 
pel all  that  men  have  ever  been  willing  to  hazard  for 
the  heaping  up  of  treasure  or  for  the  gratification  of 
lust.  The  long  roll  which  in  various  connections  he 
rehearses  (1  Thes.  2:2;  1  Cor.  4:11-13;  2  Cor.  1:8,9; 
6:4-10;  11:23-28;  2  Tim.  2:9;  3:10,11;  4:7)  merely 
gives  us  a  glimpse  of  his  hardihood,  persistence,  cour- 
age and  faith. 

It  was  like  Paul  to  wish  to  be  beholden  to  no  one. 
He  never  would  levy  on  a  community,  as  some  of  Iris 
contemporaries  did.  Gifts  for  his  personal  use,  which 
came  under  the  promptings  of  love  and  not  as  salary 


Chapter  ^7.     Paul's  Missiotmry  Career        187 

he  did  not  refuse  (2  Cor.  11;8,9;  Phil.  1:5;  4:15, 
16),  but  he  wished  to  have  the  independence  and  the 
satisfaction  involved  in  paying  his  own  way  (2  Thes. 
3:7,8;  1  Cor.  9:15). 

The  apostle  had  so  sane  and  well-balanced  a  mind 
that  his  declarations  about  the  revelations  which  he 
had  received  (3  Cor.  12:1-4)  arouse  a  sort  of  sur- 
prise. We  agree  with  him  that  the  "thorn"  (Gal.  4: 
13;  6:17;  2  Cor.  12:7)  was  well  bestowed.  At  all 
costs  so  great  and  noble,  so  sweet  and  fine  a  soul  must 
be  kept  humble. 

Paul's  strength  lay  in  his  absolute  loyalty  to  Christ. 
Every  power  was  controlled  and  subordinated  to  His 
service.  With  whole-heartedness  he  did  his  work, 
with  resistless  and  incessant  energy.  In  this  work 
God  gradually  gave  him  such  a  revelation  of  Himself 
as  few  men  can  gain.  It  will  be  ever  true  that  the 
real  disciple  finds  power  and  vision,  as  Paul  found  it, 
in  self-forgetting  zeal  for  God. 


188  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

Chapter  48.  The  Close  of  Paul's  Career.  Selections 
from  1  and  2  Timothy  and  Titus.  About  A.  D. 
64—68. 

The  details  of  Paul's  last  days  are  very  obscure  and 
concerning  them  there  is  no  unanimity  of  opinion.  The 
majority  of  interpreters  in  the  past  have  followed  the 
lead  of  Lightfoot  in  attributing  the  Pastoral  Epistles  to 
a  period  subsequent  to  the  two  years  in  confinement  at 
liome  of  which  the  Book  of  Acts  speaks  (28:  30).  The 
few  allusions  to  persons  and  places  in  these  epistles  then 
suggest  a  release  from  imprisonment,  a  year  or  two  of 
visitation  of  churches  and  a  second  arrest  and  imprison- 
ment at  Rome,  this  time  terminating  fatally.  There  are 
scholars  of  good  judgment,  such  as  Bartlet,  who  regard 
First  Timothy  and  Titus  as  having  been  written  prior  to 
the  imprisonment  mentioned  in  Acts,  and  deny  that  they 
furnish  any  evidence  regarding  Paul's  movements  in 
later  years.  The  allusions  in  Second  Timothy  would  fit 
into  either  scheme. 

Other  arguments  are  singularly  inconclusive  in  rela- 
tion to  this  matter.  The  Book  of  Acts  as  a  whole,  in  the 
decisions  or  declarations  of  Lysias,  Felix,  Festus  and 
Agrippa,  that  Paul  was  not  worthy  of  death  or  of  bonds, 
would  seem  to  anticipate  his  release  from  the  charge 
made  against  him.  Yet  his  words  at  Miletus  (Acts 
20: 17  ff.)  imply  also  that  he  was  not  to  look  upon  his 
friends  at  Ephesus  again.  Paul's  great  confidence  that 
he  was  to  be  quickly  released,  given  expression  near  the 
close  of  the  two  years  of  imprisonment  (Philemon  22; 
Phil.  1 :  25 ;  2  :  24),  counts  for  something  as  an  indica- 
tion of  the  course  of  events;  yet  a  great  and  sudden 
surprise  would  not  have  seemed  a  strange  happening  at 
that  time. 

The  reference  in  the  First  Epistle  of  Clement  of  Rome 
to  the  Corinthians,  dated  about  a  generation  after  Paul's 
death,  which  declares  that  he  "reached  the  goal  of  the 
West,"  is  too  obscure  to  be  regarded  as  valuable  evidence 
m  regard  to  liis  movomentR.     Tt  may  bo  merely  rhetoric 


Chapter  48.     The  Close  of  Paul's  Career      189 

or  it  may  refer,  iu  its  context,  merely  to  Rome.  It  is 
necessary,  therefore,  that  no  dogmatic  assertions  be  made. 

For  all  practical  purposes  Paul's  life  was  over.  Even 
if  he  was  released  and  returned  to  the  East  he  made  no 
protracted  stay  in  any  place.  Possibly  he  went  at  once 
to  Spain,  as  Zahn  conjectures.  Probably  he  would  have 
spent  some  time  at  and  near  Ephesus  and  with  the 
churches  near  Colosse.  Surely  he  would  not  have  over- 
looked the  Macedonian  churches,  for  which  he  had  such 
an  affection.  The  church  at  Corinth  would,  perhaps, 
have  been  the  very  first  of  all  to  be  visited,  ^^^lile  thus 
renewing  the  faith  and  stimulating  the  courage  of  these 
beloved  communities  in  Christian  fellowship,  he  must 
have  been  once  more  apprehended  and  taken  to  Eome  for 
the  last  time. 

The  uncertainty  whether  the  great  apostle  was 
beheaded  about  a.  d.  62  or  63,  or  several  years  later 
does  not  prevent  our  having  a  fairly  vivid  idea  of  the 
circumstances  under  which  his  last  days  were  spent.  We 
may  be  sure  that  he  maintained  his  courage  to  th^  very 
last.  The  long  imprisonment  at  Eome  was  a  bitter  dis- 
appointment to  him.  The  emperor  Nero  in  the  earlier 
part  of  his  reign  w^as  regarded  by  his  far  distant  sub- 
jects in  the  East  as  a  model  ruler.  The  palace  intrigues 
and  family  murders  of  which  we  hear  hardly  affected 
their  interests,  which  were  directed  in  large  measure  by 
Seneca  and  Burrus.  Probably  Paul,  Avhen  he  appealed 
to  Cfpsar^  expected  to  receive  quick  and  genuine  justice. 
He  knew  that  the  flimsy  character  of  the  charges  against 
liim  would  be  evident  to  any  impartial  judge  of  last 
resort,  and  expected  a  prompt  decision  in  his  favor.  On 
the  supposition  that  the  letter  to  Titus  was  written  by 
him  on  the  voyage  to  Rome  after  leaving  Crete,  perhaps 
from  Malta,  Paul's  expectation  (Titus  3: 12)  of  spend- 
ing the  next  winter  at  Nicopolis  would  indicate  his  sup- 
position that  his  trial  would  be  speedy  and  favorable. 
After  his  usual  fashion  he  made  good  use  of  the  oppor- 
tunities afforded  by  his  contact  witli  the  guards  and  by 
Ills  freedom   of  intercourse  witli  citizens.     Yet  as  tho 


190 


21l€  Apostolic  Leaders 


months  went  by  there  was  a  growing  sense  of  injustice 
and  danger  which  would  have  sapped  the  energies  of  a 
less  heroic  personality.  To  the  last  he  was  the  most 
dependable  of  all. 

So  strong  was  his  faith,  and  so  keenly  did  he  feel  the 
continuing  need  of  his  presence  among  his  followers,  that 
he  could  say  to  the  Philippians,  "And  having  this  confi- 
dence, I  know  that  I  shall  abide,  yea,  and  abide  with  you 
all,  for  your  progress  and  joy  in  the  faith."  He  had  so 
many  plans,  and  could  meet  so  many  emergencies  and  so 


The  Three  Fonntaiiis. 


From  a  photograph. 


The  Church  of  the  Three  FonntsJns  is  said  to  mark  the  spot  where  Paul  was  executed. 
The  tradition  is  th«t  when  his  head  was  sti-icken  from  his  body  it  bounded  twice,  thus 
striking  the  ground  in  three  places,  at  each  of  which  a  fountain  of  water  appeared. 
These  fountains  are  under  the  altars  in  tlie  cut.  At  the  right  is  seen  the  executioner's 
block  on  which  the  a;reat  apostle  is  said  to  have  been  executed.  Few  of  the  places  shown 
in  Rome  as  memorials  of  Paul  have  anj'  nistorical  basis.  The  fact  that  thev  should  be 
visited  in  reverent  interest  by  thousands  of  people  every  year  shows  the  wonoerful  influ- 
ence which  this  greatest  of  Christian  disciples  still  exerts  in  the  world. 

much  land  still  remained  to  be  possessed  that  he  could 
not  bring  himself  to  feel  until  the  very  end  that  his  life 
was  actually  over. 

How  he  carried  the  burden  of  the  churches  is  evinced 
by  the  character  of  the  letters  written  at  this  last  stage 
of  his  life.  The  letters  to  the  Colossians,  to  the 
Ephesians,  to  the  Philippians  and  the  Pastorals,  are 
essentially  letters  to  the  church  at  large,  dealing  with  its 
insistent  problems,  inculcating  the  true  principles  of 
Christian  faith  and  life,  breathing  tender  yet  inspiring 
messages  of  assurance  and  comfort  and  conviction. 
Through  these  marvelous  letters  Paul  did  the  culminat- 
ing work  of  his  long  ancl  active  career.     In  a  trne  sense 


Chapter  48.     The  Close  of  Paul's  Career      19] 

the  determination  of  the  question  of  one  imprisonment 
at  Eome  or  two  may  be  regarded  as  unimportant.  His 
work  had  really  come  to  a  fitting  end. 

There  came  a  sudden  turn  in  his  fortunes.  His  last 
hope  of  justice  fled.  He  knew  that  he  had  no  longer 
any  hope  of  deliverance.  That  presentation  to  God  of 
the  Gentile  world  as  inheritors  of  His  gracious  promises, 
which  was  the  great  task  of  his  life,  was  now,  as  he 
wrote  to  his  beloved  Timothy,  to  be  accompanied  as  a 
sacrificial  gift  by  his  own  blood  "poured  out  as  a  liba- 
tion" (Phil.  2: 17  in  anticipation;  2  Tim.  4:6). 

But  with  what  superb  self-command  he  awaited  the 
lictor's  axe.  It  was  "for  the  testimony  of  Jesus"  (Rev. 
20:4)  and  thus  to  die  was  gain  (Phil.  1:21).  His 
death  was  triumphant.  No  emperor^s  decree  could  set 
aside  the  crown  of  righteousness  which  the  Lord,  the 
righteous  judge,  would  grant  him.  He  had  fought  a 
good  fight ;  he  had  kept  the  faith. 

Paul's  life  has  been  a  continuing  inspiration  to  all  who 
seek  to  make  the  utmost  use  in  the  Lord's  service  of  such 
powers  as  they  possess.  Clement  of  Rome,  about  95 
A.  D.^  referred  to  Paul,  who  by  his  example  pointed  out 
the  prize  of  patient  endurance.  After  that  he  had  been 
seven  times  in  bonds,  had  been  driven  into  exile,  had 
been  stoned,  had  preached  in  the  East  and  in  the  West, 
he  won  the  noble  renown  which  was  the  reward  of  his 
faith,  having  taught  righteousness  unto  the  whole  world 
and  borne  testimony  before  the  rulers.  The  lesson 
which  we  draw  to-day  is  not  dissimilar.  Paul  succeeded 
against  great  disadvantages  because  of  his  singleminded- 
ness,  his  devotion  and  his  faith.  He  was  truly  "God's 
man.'' 


192 


The  Apostolic  Leaders 


Chapter  49.  The  Last  Words  of  Peter  on  Behalf  of  the 
Church.  Selections  from  1  and  2  Peter.  Dates 
uncertain. 

It  is  with,  a  sense  of  loss  that  the  student  of  early 
Christian  history  comes  to  realize  that  so  little  is 
recorded  in  the  New  Testament  regarding  the  last 
fifteen  years  or  so  of  the  active  life  of  the  apostle  Peter. 
That  he  was  not  in  retirement  may  be  taken  for 
granted,  not  merely  because  of  his  temperament,  but  as 
evidenced  by  the  allusion  made  by  Paul  to  his  journey- 
ings  in  First  Corinthians  9:5.  It  must  have  been  his 
custom  to  make  long  tours  of  apostolic  visitation  and 
presumably  in  Asia  Minor. 

Even  before  the  conference  at  Jerusalem  (not  far 
from  50  A.  D.)    James  had  become  the  acknowledged 

head  of  the  church  in 
Judea,  so  that  Peter's 
duty  no  less  than  his  nat- 
ural bent  would  have 
taken  him  out  among  the 
churches.  It  had  doubt- 
less seemed  to  him  and 
to  the  others  at  that  time 
(Gal.  2:9)  that  a  nat- 
ural distribution  of  ener- 
gy would  send  Paul  to 
those  who  were  distinct- 
ively Gentiles,  and  Peter 
to  those  who  were  by 
birth  and  training  Jews. 
As  years  went  by,  how- 
ever, we  cannot  imagine 

r.njn'RoVi^'""^"^'''"^"'"^'''^'"'^*'''"^"'''  ^^^^^  ^^  coutinuing  on  a 

narrow  basis.  He  was 
"ever  sensitive,"  as  Bartlet  remarks,  "to  the  teaching 
of  divine  facts,"  and  the  unquestioned  success  of  the 
work  of  Paul  and  the  rapid  growth  of  the  churches 
under  his  inspiring  leadership  would  have  quickly  ovi- 


st. Piter. 


Chapter  49.     The  Last  Words  of  Peter        193 

denced  to  Peter  the  real  breadth  of  the  Messianic 
kingdom-to-be.  Tradition  connects  Peter  rather  with 
Pauline  than  Vvith  later  Palestinian  Christianity. 

Where  Peter  labored  all  these  years  must  be  a  matter 
of  conjecture.  Doubtless  he  worked  in  Palestine  and 
Syria  and  perhaps  up  through  Asia  Minor  as  far  as 
Pontus  and  Bithynia.  He  was  surely  well  known  in 
the  other  Christian  centers,  at  least  Paul  refers  famil- 
iarly to  him,  when  writing  to  his  own  churches. 

The  evidence  of  the  First  Epistle  of  Peter  as  well 
as  that  of  tradition  makes  it  probable  that  Peter  came 
to  Eome  after  Paul's  martyrdom  and  was  there  be- 
headed. Whether  he  was  at  Rome  only  a  year  or  two, 
and  wrote  First  Peter  not  far  from  80  a.  d.  must  ever 
remain  one  of  the  perplexities  of  interpretation.  One 
who  reads  the  epistle  carefully  recognizes  the  stamp  of 
a  first-rate  personality.  No  other  book,  not  written  by 
Paul,  so  nearly  resembles  his  writings.  It  is  wholly 
worthy  of  the  other  great  pillar  of  Christianity,  and 
may  be  with  strong  probability  ascribed  to  him. 

First  Peter  was  written  from  "Babylon,"  probably 
meaning  the  Rome  which  had  begun  to  persecute  the 
church.  It  was  addressed  to  the  Christian  communi- 
ties of  Asia  Minor  north  of  the  Taurus  range,  because 
a  similar  sort  of  persecuting  policy  had  been  begun 
among  them.  The  apostle  sought  to  send  them  a  mes- 
sage of  comfort  and  cheer,  as  a  stimulus  to  their  courage 
and  a  stay  to  their  faith.  He  addresses  independent 
communities,  each  with  its  elders  (5:1),  its  sense  of 
brotherhood  (4: 10),  its  personal  freedom  (4: 11),  and 
puts  his  plea  on  the  broad  ground  of  the  wisdom  of 
righteous  and  sincere  lives. 

We  know  but  little  about  the  churches  addressed,  and 
the  way  in  which  they  came  to  be  organized.  Ramsay 
makes  it  an  argument  for  the  relatively  late  date  of  the 
first  epistle  that  Christianity  could  not  well  have  got- 
ten a  strong  hold  of  the  region  of  Pontus  and  Bithynia 
as  early  as  a.  d.  64.  We  hear  of  the  region  many  years 
later  through  the  interesting  rescript  of  Pliny  to  the 


194  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

emperor  Trajan.  Pliny  was  proprietor  of  these  prov- 
inces between  a.  d.  103  and  a.  d.  105.  He  had  to 
deal  with  Christians  and  asked  ihe  emperor  for  advice. 
Incidentally  his  letter  proves  that  Christianity  had  at 
that  time  made  great  progress,  including  "many  of 
every  age,  of  every  rank,  of  both  sex,es  also  ...  in 
country  towns  and  rural  districts"  as  well  as  cities,  so 
that  the  temples,  once  thronged,  were  almost  deserted. 

First  Peter  was  probably  directed  to  the  converts  of 
a  generation  earlier.  It  is  addressed  in  figurative  fash- 
ion to  the  "elect  who  are  sojourners  of  the  Dispersion," 
identifying  thus  these  Christian  believers  with  the  true 
Israel  of  God,  and  suggests  that  they  are  elected  to 
complete  holiness  and  purity  of  life.  Then  follows  a 
thanksgiving  (1:3-5)  for  the  heavenly  inheritance 
reserved  for  those  who  have  triumphant  faith.  Such 
faith  (1:6-9),  even  though  tested  severely,  is  sustained 
by  love  for  the  unseen  Christ,  whose  sufferings  and 
glory  (1 :  10-12)  prophets  foretold.  As  those  redeemed 
by  the  blood  of  Christ  unto  a  new  spiritual  life  ( 1 :  13- 
25)  may  you  all  with  soberness  aim  to  live  holy  lives. 
Put  away  everything  which  will  retard  your  growth 
(2:1,2),  or  make  you  unfit  to  fashion  with  Christ  a 
holy  temple   (2:3-10). 

This  glorious  introduction  leads  the  way  to  a  series 
of  exhortations  to  duty.  As  true  pilgrims  (2:11,12) 
they  were  to  avoid  all  impurity  or  cause  for  criticism. 
As  loyal  subjects  of  the  government  (2:13-17)  they 
were  to  be  obedient  and  thus  put  calumniators 
to  silence.  Slaves  (2:18-20)  were  to  be  obe- 
dient and  patient  even  under  wrong,  in  imitation 
of  the  wonderful  patience  (2:21-25)  of  Christ.  Wives 
were  not  to  use  their  Christian  freedom  as  an  excuse 
for  discontent  or  extravagance  (3:1-6).  Husbands 
were  to  love  and  honor  their  wives  (3:7).  All  should 
seek  to  exhibit  the  qualities  which  make  for  brother- 
hood and  blessing  (3:8-12).  If  tribulation  seemed 
imminent,  let  it  be  for  righteousness  and  never 
deserved     (3:13-17).     Christ    Himself    was    not    free 


Chapter  49.     The  Last  Words  of  Peter        195 

from  suffering,  but  it  was  because  of  the  sins  of  others 
and  for  their  salvation  (3: 18-20).  Through  His  res- 
urrection and  ascension  all  obtain  a  right  relationship 
with  God  (3:21,22).  As  sharers  then  with  Christ  in 
sufferings,  share  with  Him  the  life  of  God  and  abandon 
the  old  heathenish  practices  (4:1-6).  In  view  of  the 
approaching  end  of  the  age,  let  all  give  themselves 
soberly  and  reverently  to  prayer  and  mutual  friendli- 
ness and  helpful  deeds,  each  one  contributing  his  best 
(4:7-11). 

The  writer  now  reaches  the  real  reason  for  his  writing. 
His  readers  were  not  to  wonder  at  the  trials  they  were 
experiencing,  nor  to  resent  them,  but  rather  to  rejoice 
at  suffering  with  Christ,  and  exalting  His  precious 
name.  To  suffer  as  a  criminal  would  be  scandalous; 
to  suffer  as  a  Christian  would  be  glorious  (4:12-17). 

He  closes  with  a  few  charges.  First  the  elders  of  the 
church  (5 : 1-4)  are  to  take  great  pains  to  be  good  pas- 
tors and  leaders.  Again  the  younger  members  (5:5) 
are  to  be  obedient  and  helpful.  iVnd  all  are  to  exhibit 
the  virtues  of  humility,  alertness,  trust,  soberness  and 
steadfastness  (5:6-9).  God  Himself  would  help  them 
to  a  perfect  development  (5: 10, 11). 

It  is  interesting  to  note  the  emphasis  laid  upon  the 
sufferings  of  Jesus  in  this  epistle,  doubtless  because  it 
was  addressed  to  those  who  were  in  the  midst  of  serious 
trouble.  He  urges  that  their  sufferings,  like  those  of 
the  Master,  make  for  redemption.  To  be  worthy  of  the 
rich  inheritance  which  is  theirs  is  their  privilege  and 
duty. 

Second  Peter  is  a  much  disputed  epistle,  and  a  truly 
remarkable  one.  It  differs  much  from  First  Peter  in 
style  and  in  thought,  but  seems  to  have  incorporated 
Jude  almost  entire.  Many  question  the  Petrine  author- 
ship, yet  the  unknowTi  author  was  a  remarkable  man. 
It  begins  with  an  appeal  for  progress  in  acquiring 
Christian  virtues  (1:3-11)  and  a  noble  declaration  of 
the  truth  of  Christian  teaching  (1:12-21).  The  sec- 
ond chapter  sets  forth  the  evil  practices  of  the  false 


1^6  The  ■Apostolic  Leade 


rs 


prophets.  Tlic  closing  one  eirtends  a  rebuke  to  those 
who  disbelieve  in  the  final  judgment  and  declares  that 
the  coming  of  the  Lord  will  be  sudden  and  sweeping. 
Consequently  all' are  urged  to  be  patient,  diligent,  and 
full*  of  sincerity. 

We  cannot*  go  far  afield  if  we  think  of  Peter  as  the 
true  spiritual  successor  of  Paul,  for  a  while  at  least. 
He  was  quite  possibly  the  chief  administrator  in  the 
western  church ;  he  surely  became,  like  Paul,  a  cheerful 
martyr  to  the  faith.  As  Clement  of  Eome  says,  "He 
endured,  not  one  or  two,  but  many  labors,  and  liaving 
borne  his  testimony,  went  to  his  appointed  place  of 
glory/' 


Chapter  50.     The  Apocalyptic  Vision  of  the  Triumphant 
Christ.^  Rev,  chs.  4,5;  7:9—17.    About  A.  D.  68. 

It  is  rather  strange  that  there  are  so  few  examples  of 
apocalypse  in  the  Bible,  and  particularly  in  the  New 
Testament,  when  it  was  such  a  frequent  and  favorite 
type  of  literature  during  the  centuries  just  preceding 
and  that  including  the  early  days  of  Christianity. 
Among  the  books  which  Christians  read,  apocalypses 
were  often  found,  such  as  the  Book  of  Enoch,  or  the 
Apocalypse  of  Peter.  They  were  always  couched  in 
strange,  symbolic  language,  and  purported  to  unveil  the 
mysteries  of  the  past  or  future.  They  were  a  revival  of 
prophecy  but  not  of  the  old  sort.  They  looked  for  a 
judgment,  not  upon  Israel  but  upon  the  foreign  nations, 
her  enemies ;  they  paid  little  or  no  attention  to  the  life 
of  their  time,  but  directed  it  toward  the  universe  at 
large;  they  described  the  Messianic  or  ideal  future  as 
something  not  to  be  realized  in  this  sphere  but  in  a 
heavenly  world;  they  paid  scant  attention  to  Israel  the 
nation,  and  much  to  the  individual  inheritor  of  God's 
promises. 

Apocalyptical  writings  are  really  aids  to  robust  faith. 


Ckapter  50.     The  Apocalyptic  Vivien         29\ 


They  arise  in  times  of  clanger,  ^vlien  active  persecution 
threatens  to  cause  widespread  apostasy,  when  heathenism 
is  rampant  and  all  believers  must  get  together.  They 
make  for  encouragement  and  lor  hopefulness  by  empha- 
sizing the  factors  which 
stand  for  righteousness 
and  by  asserting  that 
these  will  be  made  man- 
ifest. 

The  least  profitable 
method  of  studying  an 
apocalypse  is  to  dwell 
upon  the  details  of  its 
bold  imagery.  It  is 
full  of  figurative  repre- 
sentations of  spiritual 
realities.  The  faith  and 
hope  behind  them  are 
important,  rather  than 
the  symbols  themselves. 
Its  interpretation  is  in 
the  large  rather  than 
minutely. 

The  book  of  Revelation  predicts  the  speedy  coming 
of  God  as  judge,  to  divide  true  Christians  from  the  false. 
"Rome  will  fall  and  Satan,  whose  power  Rome  em- 
bodies, will  first  be  bound  and  then  destroyed."  All 
believers  will  finally  live  with  God  and  Christ  in  eternal 
blessedness.  Amidst  the  profusion  of  figxirative  expres- 
sion, it  is  clear  that  two  definite  declarations  are  made : 
that  the  Roman  empire  is  to  fall,  and  that  the  faithful 
Christian  will  receive  a  power  and  blessedness  far 
beyond  any  conception  of  human  experience. 

Its  great  themes  are  the  transcendence  of  God  and  the 
certainty  that  His  purposes  ^vill  prevail  in  the  history 
of  the  world.  Through  the  risen  and  enthroned  Christ 
He  overcomes  and  redeems. 

The  first  chapter  is  introductory.  The  superscription 
(1:1-3)  ascribes  the  revelation  to  Christ  and  declares 


St.  Jolin. 

From  a  statue  by  Thorwtldsen. 


t9S  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

that  its  contents  are  of  high  importance.  The  intro- 
duction (1:4-8)  asserts  the  coming  of  Christ  as  the 
theme  of  the  book,  which  goes  on  to  describe  the  com- 
mission of  the  prophet,  given  by  the  eternal  Christ  Him- 
self, to  write  down  what  was  revealed  unto  him 
(1:9-20).  Then  follow,  still  by  way  of  preliminary, 
the  well-known  letters  to  the  seven  churches  of  Asia,  to 
Ephesus,  Smyrna,  Pergamum,,  Thyatira,  Sardis,  Phila- 
delphia, and  Laodicea.  Each  receives  approval,  recog- 
nition or  reproach  according  to  its  desert.  They  are 
really  addressed,  in  all  probability,  to  a  wider  circle, 
perhaps  to  the  Christian  world  of  that  day.  It  is 
unlikely  that  these  churches  ever  actually  received  them 
individually.  The  writer's  purpose  seems  to  be  ideal. 
The  letters  form  an  appropriate  introduction  to  the  book 
as  a  whole.  These  letters  give  a  vivid  picture  of  the 
Christian  church  of  that  day,  its  victories  and  defeats. 
The  church  at  Ephesus  was  a  firm  upholder  of  the 
faith,  but  had  lost  some  of  its  early  spirit  of  brotherly 
love.  Those  at  Smyrna  and  Pergamum  v.ere  praised 
for  fidelity  in  the  face  of  persecution  and  difficulty.  At 
Thyatira  was  a  church  exhibiting  Christian  growth  but 
blamed  for  permitting  the  presence  of  a  false  prophetess. 
Sardis  was  mainly  dead.  Philadelphia  was  faithful 
and  would  be  rewarded.  Laodicea  abounded  in  wealth 
but  was  really  in  spiritual  want.  Those  churches  needed 
a  stirring  message  to  arouse  them  to  confidence  in  God. 

Chapter  4  exhibits  God  upon  His  throne,  surrounded 
by  the  heavenly  chorus,  and  worshiped  by  the  angelic 
leaders  as  the  Supreme  Creator  and  Euler  of  the  universe. 
Chapter  5  introduces  the  Christ,  who  is  able  to  unlock 
the  secrets  of  heaven  and  earth,  in  whose  praise  the 
whole  creation  joins.  Thus  these  two  chapters  describe 
the  heavenly  scene  of  the  visions. 

The  next  three  chapters  introduce  a  vision  of  the 
judgments  to  come.  The  destroying  power  of  war. 
famine,  pestilence,  earthquake,  all  portend  the  day  of  the 
Lord  (ch.  6).  The  seventh  is  the  worst  of  all,  but 
before  it  are  two  comforting  visions  of  the  safety  and 


Chapter  50.     The  Apocalyptic  Vision  lUO 

blessedness  of  those  who  are  faithful.  Some  are  kept 
from  the  evil  (7:1-8);  others  come  through  it  trium- 
phantly (7:  9-17).  This  last  passage  anticipates  chap- 
ter 21,  but  prevents  dismay.  The  seventh  seal  involves 
a  series  of  preliminary  judgments.  One-third  of  the 
earth  is  destroyed  and  one-third  of  mankind  (chs.  8,  9). 

With  chapter  10  the  prophet  is  given  a  new  commis- 
sion to  prophesy  in  place  of  the  description  of  the  result 
of  the  seventh  trumpet.  This  account  is  followed  by  a 
short  and  obscure  passage  of  comfort  for  those  who  keep 
the  faith  (11:3-13),  which  is  followed  by  a  heavenly 
song  of  anticipated  victory  (11:16-19). 

The  powers  of  evil  against  whom  these  forces  are  to 
wage  successful  war  are  then  introduced.  First  is  Satan 
himself,  the  personification  of  all  wickedness,  desirous 
of  destroying  the  Messiah-child,  but  when  foiled  turn- 
ing with  renewed  fury  against  the  faithful  Christians 
who  were  His  followers  (ch.  12).  Satan  gives  his 
malign  authority  to  a  beast,  which  exercise  offensive 
and  oppressive  dominion  over  men  and  especially  over 
believers  (13:3-10).  A  second  beast  appears  which 
compels  all  men  to  worship  the  first  (13: 11-18).  By 
these  beasts  sober  minded  interpreters  understand  the 
Roman  empire  of  the  days  of  Domitian  and  the  system 
of  emperor-worship,  which  constituted  Christianity's 
great  danger.  Over  against  these  foes  stands  a  com- 
forting vision  of  Christ  and  His  great  array  of  pure- 
minded  followers.  To  further  stay  the  courage  of  those 
who  were  to  pass  through  fiery  trials  a  series  of  warn- 
ings are  uttered  by  heavenly  messengers  who  proclaim 
the  glory  and  supremacy  of  God  the  Creator  (1-1:  6,  7), 
the  fall  of  Rome  (14:  8,)  the  doom  of  those  who  yield 
to  Rome's  behest  (14:9-12),  the  blessedness  of  the 
faithful  dead  (14:13),  and  the  certain  judgments  to 
come   (14:14-20). 

Then  is  poured  out  the  seven-fold  wrath  of  God  (chs. 
15, 16),  preceded  as  before  by  a  glimpse  of  the  heavenly 
blessedness  of  the  redeemed  who  have  shown  their  fidel- 
itv   (15:2-4).     The  wrath  of  God  is  in  seven  bowls. 


200  TliQ  Apostolic  Leaders 

which  are  poured  out  one  by  one,  against  the  eartli,  tlie 
sea,  the  fresh  waters,  the  sun,  the  throne  of  the  beasl, 
the  Euphrates,  and  the  air. 

These  outpourings  of  wrath  prepare  the  way  for  the 
overthrow  of  the  powers  of  evil.  First  of  all  is  Rome, 
the  harlot-city,  red  with  the  blood  of  martyrs,  seated 
on  her  seven  hills,  doomed  to  destruction  from  within 
(ch.  17).  Angels  announce  her  destruction  and  desola- 
tion, because  of  her  sins  (18:1-8).  Those  who  traf- 
ficked with  her  are  overwhelmed  with  grief  (18:  9-19). 
but  saints  will  rejoice  at  her  w^ell-deserved  downfall 
(18:  20-24).  And  in  heaven  and  on  earth  there  is  one 
loud  acclaim  of  praise  to  God  because  of  the  overthrow 
(19  :  1-10).  Then  the  warrior  Messiah  in  blood-red  gar- 
ments executes  the  wrath  of  God  and  puts  a  final  end  to 
tlue  beasts  and  to  all  who  followed  them  (19:11-21), 
i.  e.y  to  the  Roman  empire  and  its  godless  worship. 

With  the  fall  of  the  wicked  empire,  his  tool,  Satan  is, 
as  it  were,  deprived  of  freedom  for  a  time  (20:1-3). 
During  it  the  resurrected  martyrs  share  with  Christ  in 
Ruling  the  world  (20:4-6).  Wlien  loosed  Satan  will 
vainly  gather  his  hosts.  They  shall  be  consumed  and 
he  doomed  eternally  along  with  the  two  beasts  (20: 
7-10).  Then  will  come  the  final  judgment  of  all  man- 
kind (20:11-15). 

For  those  who  have  been  worthy,  who  have  persevered 
amidst  temptations  and  persecutions,  a  new  and  blessed 
life  now  begins.  The  heaven  and  earth  becomes  new 
(21:1,2).  God  and  man  dwell  together  (21:3,4). 
The  heavenly  city,  the  abode  of  the  blest,  is  inconceiv- 
ably beautiful,  ])right  and  pure.  Life  there  is  joyful 
beyond  expression  (21 :  9 — 22  :  5.  God  is  always  there, 
and  His  people  will  be  in  fellowship  with  Him. 

The  closing  verses  emphasize  the  importance  and  the 
certainty  of  the  visions  of  the  book. 

Revelation  is  a  wonderful  book.  Its  imagery  is  almost 
confusing  when  studied  in  close  detail,  but  very  effective 
when  interpreted  broadly.  Its  message  of  assurance 
bases  itself  on  the  power  and   wisdom   of  God.  whose 


Chapter  51.     Last  Messages  of  the  Apostolic  Age    201 

plans  for  the  universe  must  finally  prevail.  Its  prom- 
ises are  to  those  who  are  spiritually  faithful  and  worthy. 
Those  who  seek  to  find  in  its  words  an  unveiling  of 
the  details  of  the  historical  or  even  spiritual  future  will 
be  disappointed.  Those  who  look  for  encouragement  in 
the  sturdy  resistance  of  all  forms  of  evil,  in  the  main- 
tenance of  a  serene  faith  in  God,  in  the  conquest  of  self, 
and  in  the  acceptance,  if  need  be,  of  martyrdom  rather 
than  apostasy,  find  an  eternal  message. 


Chapter  51.  The  Last  Messages  of  the  Apostolic  Age. 
Selections  from  1  John.  Written  apparently  between 
A.D.  80  and  100. 

There  can  be  no  question  that  the  writings  ascribed 
by  common  consent  to  the  aged  apostle  John  belong 
to  the  very  last  decade  of  the  first  century  of  our 
era.  In  what  exact  proportion,  if  at  all,  others  than  the 
apostle  shared  in  these  writings  will  always  be  a  theme 
of  scholarly  discussion,  but  of  comparatively  small 
importance.  It  is  certain  that  for  all  practical  pur- 
poses these  noble  writings  represent  the  thoughts  and 
utterances  of  that  aged  saint  of  Ephesus,  whose  whole 
life  had  been  given  to  the  bearing  of  witness  to  the 
Word  whom  he  had  seen  and  known,  had  loved  and 
served. 

The  closing  decade  of  the  century  was  a  time  of 
comparative  peace  for  the  Christian  congregations. 
The  persecuting  movement  of  Domitian's  early  reign 
had  spent  itself.  The  dangers  to  which  the  leaders 
of  the  church  were  alive  came  from  within  the  church 
rather  than  from  the  outside.  There  were  serious 
forms  of  unbelief  or  speculative  heresy  which  had  be- 
gun to  gain  ground.  Prominent  among  these  was 
the  Cerinthian  view  of  the  person  of  Jesus  Christ. 
Claiming  that  cliviuiiy  and  humanity  were  so  opposite 


202 


TJw  Apostolic  Leaders 


in  substance  that  no  one  could  possibly  be  God  and 
man  at  the  same  time,  Cerinthus,  who  accepted  the  cur- 
rent traditions  regarding  the  active  life  of  Jesus,  ex- 
plained the  supernatural  element  in  that  life  by  the 
hypothesis  that  the  man  Jesus  was  taken  possession  of 
at  the  baptism  by  the  spiritual  Christ,  who  remained 
v.'ith  Him  until  the  cross.     This  spiritual  Christ,  not 

being  corporeal  or  hu- 
man, could  not  suffer, 
and  had  no  part  in  the 
agony  of  the  cross. 

This  ingenious  theory 
had  the  practical  result 
of  absolutely  denying  the 
divinity  of  Jesus  Christ. 
It  roused  the  aged  apostle 
to  the  necessity  for  a  de- 
liberate and  comprehen- 
sive reply.  This  we  have 
from  one  point  of  view 
in  the  first  epistle  of 
John  and  from  another 
in  the  fourth  Gospel. 
They  are  impressive 
presentations  of  the  personality  and  the  work  of  Jesus 
Christ. 

The  first  epistle  of  John  contains  the  substance  of 
every  important  declaration  in  the  other  two.  It  be- 
gins with  an  impressive  formulation  (1:1-4)  of  the 
theme  which  he  wished  to  treat,  viz.,  tlic  reality  of 
the  living  Word  and  His  possible  continuing  relation- 
ship with  men.  Fellowship  with  Him  means  (1:  5-10) 
walking  in  the  light  and  confessing  one's  sins.  Jesus 
delivers  from  sin  those  who  strive  constantly  to  fol- 
low Him  (2  : 1-6).  He  who  loves  God  loves  his  brother 
man  (3  :  7-11),  and  ranks  God  above  all  else  (2  :  12-17). 
As  our  Lord  declared  and  as  Paul  said  also,  these  men 
wliom  w(  know,  who  are  denying  that  Jesus  was  th'> 
Christ,  the  Son  of  God.  these  antichrists  ar*^  onh-  fore- 


st. John,  the  Last  of  the  AposUes. 


Chapter  51.     Last  Messages  of  the  Apostolic  Age   208 

lunners  of  the  day  of  His  appearing.  Kemain  faithful 
to  Him  and  thus  show  that  you  are  indeed  His  children 
(2: 18-29).  As  children,  let  us  be  pure  and  righteous 
and  loving  (3 : 1-12).  Loving  one  another  in  truth,  let 
us  believe  on  Jesus  (3:13-24).  The  spirit  of  anti- 
christ is  worldly  (lil-G);  the  spirit  which  God  in- 
spires is  a  spirit  of  love  (4:  7-21).  He  who  knows  and 
follows  Christ  is  a  true  child  of  God  (5: 1-12).  These 
things  we  know  (5:13-21). 

The  letter  is  a  testimony  to  the  reality  and  power 
of  the  fundamental  facts  of  the  Gospel  message. 
These  facts,  however,  are  set  forth  with  much  greater 
fulness  in  the  Gospel  of  John.  Whether  this  Gospel 
was  written  before  or  after  the  first  epistle  is  un- 
certain, but  it  looks  at  Christ's  life  from  the  same 
point  of  view,  and  was  probably  one  of  the  latest  of 
the  New  Testament  writings.  Its  purpose  was  not 
evangelistic,  like  that  of  the  other  Gospels,  but  like 
John's  epistles,  was  for  the  establishment  and  con- 
firmation of  Christians  in  the  faith. 

This  Gospel  is  an  interpretation  rather  tlian  a  record 
of  the  life  of  Jesus.  So  far  as  it  is  a  narrative,  it 
details  the  self-revelation  of  Jesus — to  His  compan- 
ions, to  the  people,  to  the  Eleven  in  the  upper  room, 
and  finally  to  human-kind.  It  sets  forth  the  inner 
life  and  the  genuine  spirit  of  Jesus  as  exhibited  in 
His  dealings  with  men  and  His  declarations  to  them. 
Just  as  Matthew  lays  great  stress  upon  the  year  of 
gradual  self-disclosure  between  the  choosing  of  the 
Twelve  and  the  affirmation  by  Peter  on  their  behalf 
that  Jesus  was  the  Christ,  the  Son  of  the  Living  God, 
so  the  fourth  Gospel  details  the  less  obvious,  more 
gradual  self-disclosure  of  the  life  as  a  whole.  It  be- 
gins by  setting  forth  Christ's  eternal  nature  as  the 
Word  made  flesh,  the  true  Light  of  the  world,  the  One 
who  revealed  God  unto  men  by  exhibiting  in  Himself 
at  once  the  perfection  of  human  nature  and  the  sub- 
stance of  the  divine  nature.  It  then  shows  how  Christ 
presented    Himself   to   the   nation,   claiming   over   and 


204  TJie  Apostolic  Leaders 

over  again  His  divine  sonship,  and  affording  the  most 
complete  proof  of  the  truth  of  what  He  said,  notmth- 
standing  which  He  was  utterly  rejected  by  the  Jews. 
Beginning  with  the  thirteenth  chapter,  it  describes 
Christ's  unreserved  revelation  of  Himself  to  the  inner 
circle  of  disciples  who  were  now  prepared  for  the 
})recious  message.  The  book  closes  with  tlie  account 
of  His  crucifixion  and  burial,  and  His  triumphant 
resurrection  through  which  His  disciples  were  made 
certain  of  His  real  character. 

It  was  thus  a  noble  message  to  be  given  to  tbe 
church  as  its  particular  Gospel,  a  fitting  word  for  the 
close  of  the  New  Testament  age,  a  cure  for  those  who 
had  begun  to  be  affected  by  doubts  regarding  the  true 
divinity  of  our  Lord,  or  whose  faith  was  formal,  un- 
vital,  chilly.  For  all  these  centuries  it  has  served  to 
quicken,  to  cheer,  to  assure,  to  deepen  and  to  estab- 
lish the  spiritual  life  of  every  earnest  servant  of  God. 
In  writing  it  the  beloved  apostle  rendered  the  church 
a  service  of  inconceivable  value. 


Chapter  52.     The  Later  Apostolic  Age         205 
Chapter  52.    The  Later  Apostolic  Age.    A  Review. 

The  imprisonment  of  the  apostle  Paul  at  Caesarea 
marked  the  beginning  of  the  second  Christian  genera- 
tion. It  was  far  more  of  ai  turning  point  in  Christian 
history  than  has  been  commonly  supposed.  The  first 
thirty  years  of  Christian  history  were  years  of  activity 
and  movement^  of  pioneering  and  organization^  of  the 
discovery  or  awakening  of  needs  rather  than  of  their 
satisfaction.  Paul's  long  imprisonment  not  only  gave 
him  an  opportunity  for  reflection,  and  a  consequent 
maturing  of  his  thought,  but  it  accentuated  the  feeling 
all  over  the  Christian  world  that  the  earlier  era  had 
come  to  a  close  and  that  the  second  generation  had 
begun. 

The  next  three  decades  registered  a  great  advance 
for  Christianity.  During  the  first  of  these  Jerusalem 
rapidly  approached  its  doom.  The  relations  of  peo- 
ple and  procurators  grew  less  and  less  endurable  on 
either  side;  the  signs  of  a  revolt  became  increasingly 
definite.  At  last,  after  several  years  of  tumult  and  tor- 
ture, the  sacred  city  of  Jewry  was  captured,  the  tem- 
ple destroyed,  and  the  people  scattered.  The  strength 
of  Judaism  was  broken. 

Meanwhile  Christianity  had  sufiered  and  achieved. 
Paul,  in  prison,  had  written  those  matchless  epistles, 
which  forever  uphold  the  supremacy  and  the  satisfy- 
ing character  of  Christ,  and  declare  His  significance. 
Later  on  He  had  laid  down  His  noble  life  in  martyr- 
dom. But  He  had  first  inspired  a  church  to  heroism 
and  faithfulness.  There  was  rapid  progress  every- 
where. Churches  sprang  up  on  every  hand;  they  en- 
dured and  even  flourished  in  spite  of  danger.  Not 
even  the  bitter  persecution  encouraged  by  the  emperor, 
ISTero,  was  a  check  to  the  Christian  church;  it 
rather  became  a  stimulus.  The  disaster  of  A.  D.  70 
did  .not  hinder  Christianity,  although  it  was  deeply 
mourned  by  many  Christians  who  had  been  born  Jews. 

Not  long  before  the  fall  of  Jerusalem  the  Gospel  of 


^06  The.  Aposifolic  Leaders 

Mark  was  written,  it  represented  most  closely  the 
sifted  tradition  regarding  the  active  life  of  Jesus. 
Either  shortly  before  or  after  that  notable  date  the 
Gospel  of  Matthew  likewise  appeared,  at  least  in  sub- 
stance. It  was  such  a  Gospel  as  was  greatly  needed 
at  that  juncture,  when  such  a  multitude  of  Jews  had 
been  shaken  to  the  very  foundation  of  their  faith  by 
the  terrible  disasters  which  they  had  endured  and  by 
the  fate  of  the  temple  which  seemed  to  them  the  very 
abode  of  God.  Such  minds  had  rejected  Jesus  because 
He  had  not  proven  Himself  to  be  of  the  Messianic 
type  for  which  they  had  looked.  The  Gospel  ap- 
pealed to  such  men.  It  traced  the  actual  fulfilment 
of  Messianic  expectation  as  seen  in  the  life  of  Jesus. 
It  reported  His  repeated  declaration  that  suffering  and 
sympathy  were  essential  elements  in  Messiahship.  It 
emphasized  the  glory  and  the  triumph  of  the  cross  and 
the  sublime  range  of  His  last  command.  Such  an 
epistle  as  that  to  the  Hebrews  reinforced  the  thought 
of  Matthew  by  showing  that  the  New  Testament  re- 
ality far  outvalued  the  Old  Testament  practice,  while 
embodying  all  in  it  that  was  truly  valuable. 

These  writings  were  the  products  of  the  second  gen- 
eration of  thinking.  They  represent  a  more  reflective 
age  and  a  maturity  of  judgment  which  gave  to  them 
increased  value.  The  Lukan  writings,  which  prob- 
ably appeared  about  80  a.  d.,  are  fine  examples  of  this 
maturity.  As  Bruce  has  remarked,  it  is  not  the  active 
Jesus  who  is  the  theme  of  the  third  Gospel,  but  the 
Lord  Jesus  Cbrist.  By  this  he  means  that  Luke  at- 
tempted to  sketch  the  life  of  Jesus  in  its  permanent 
rather  than  its  passing  aspects.  It  is  certainly  true, 
as  the  careful  reader  does  not  fail  to  realize,  that  the 
book  of  Acts  is  anything  but  a  record  of  current 
events.  Such  a  diary  was  among  its  sources  but  the 
book  itself  is  a  well  digested,  carefully  arranged  ex- 
ample of  literature  written  with  a  dominant  purpose 
and  using  liistorical  facts  for  its  illustrations.  Wlielher 
First  Peter  and  Eevelation  belons:  to  the  era  between 


Chapter  52.     The  Later  AiJOstoUc  Age        207 


60  and  80  a.  d.^  or  to  a  later  time,  must  be  uncer- 
tain. Very  likely  First  Peter  is  relatively  early  and 
Hevelation  relatively  late,  but  the  determination  is  un- 
important. Each  belonged  to  the  literature  of  encour- 
agement and  comfort,  of  which  there  was  sore 
need,  both  in  the  days  of  Nero  and  in  the  days  of 
Domitian. 

The  work  of  Paul  for  each  generation,  that  which 
witnessed  the  founding  of  the  church  and  that  which 
formulated  the  place  of  the  church  and  its  work,  was 
equally  important.  He  was  one  of  the  personalities 
which  grow  greater  as  they  are  the  more  clearly  un- 
derstood. The  deliberateness  of  his  heroism,  the 
clearness  of  his  intellect,  the  greatness  of  his  soul,  the 
sincerity  of  his  judgments,  the  extent  of  his  influence, 
and  its  helpfulness — 
these  qualities  become 
increasingly  impres- 
sive to  the  student  of 
Paul's  career.  He  tri- 
umphed by  a  won- 
derful combination  of 
genius  and  straight- 
forward sincerity  over 
obstacles  which  would 
have  baffled  ordinary 
great  men.  He  was  a 
leader  among  men  of 
strength,  not  merely 
in  default  of  other  ag- 
gressive personalities. 
He  was  not  free  from 
mistakes ;      he      laid 

stress  on  some  matters  with  regard  to  which  the 
Christian  thought  of  to-day  is  at  variance;  he  cer- 
tainly used  many  arguments  which  were  good  when 
h.e  used  them,  but  are  unconvincing  now,  yet  he 
laid  broad,  strong  and  square  the  essential  founda- 
tion for  a  w^orking  Christianity  which  should  be  truly 


St.  Paul. 


St.  Peter. 


From  ft  medallion  in  the  Vatican  library  at  Rome, 
which  is  siipposcd  to  date  from  about  200  A.D.,  and 
probably  presents  the  earliest  existing  portraits  of 
these  two  great  apostles. 


208  The  Apostolic  Leaders 

universal.  No  other  one  personality  was  so  impor- 
tant as  his  in  the  history  of  the  early  church. 

The  work  of  Peter  was  hardly  less  useful.  In  say- 
ing this  we  must  trust  in  part  to  tradition,  for  our  New 
Testament  records  follow  the  work  of  Paul  rather  than 
of  Peter.  The  latest  Gospels  sketch,  however,  a  Peter 
who  would  surely  be  at  the  forefront  of  the  apostolic 
care  of  the  churches.  Despite  the  rebuke  administered 
by  Paul  to  his  colleague  because  of  his  vacillation 
at  Antioch  (Gal.  ch.  2),  there  was  ever  a  cordial  and 
fraternal  feeling  on  Paul's  part  for  Peter.  When  the 
barriers  between  the  Gentile  portion  of  the  church  and 
the  Judaistic  portion  had  broken  down,  we  may  fairly 
suppose  that  Peter  was  active  in  the  superintendency 
and  visitation  of  the  churches  at  large.  The  tradition 
which  credits  him  during  the  silent  years  with  active 
work  in  Asia  Minor  is  wholly  probable.  The  tradi- 
tion which  declares  that  his  closing  years  were  spent 
at  Rome,  strengthening  and  developing  the  church  in 
that  region  and  serving  as  the  generally  acknowledged 
leader  of  the  church  in  all  the  world  is  exaggerated, 
but  based  on  probability.  There  can  be  little  doubt 
that  he  died  at  Rome,  and  that  he  was  influential  over 
a  wide  area.  That  he  became  a  virtual  pope  is  with- 
out any  historical  confirmation. 

He  could  not  have  wielded  any  universal  authority, 
derived  upon  a  general  organization  of  the  church  into 
a  unity.  The  early  church  followed  its  leaders,  but 
it  was  sectional.  At  a  comparatively  early  period  in 
the  second  century  the  churches  of  Alexandria,  Syria, 
Asia  Minor,  Greece,  Northern  Africa,  and  Rome, 
were  distinguishable.  Each  group  cherished  its  in- 
dependence, and  followed  its  particular  group  of  prel- 
ates or  scholars.  This  independence  was  inJierent  in 
the  conditions  under  which  the  churches  were  founded, 
and  affected  the  history  of  the  church  from  earliest 
times. 

Within  the  first  century  it  only  remains  to  notice  the 
L'lnco  occupied  by   the  venerable  apostle   John.     Lon^? 


Chapter  5^,     The  Later  Apostolic  Age        209 

after  the  others  had  passed  away,  he  remained  a  living 
link  between  the  days  of  the  Lord's  active  ministry  and 
the  rapidly  growing  Christian  church.  We  can  but 
faintly  conjecture  the  pride  and  affection  and  respect 
which  he  inspired.  It  was  of  no  little  significance  to 
the  church  that  he  was  spared  to  say  the  last  word  of 
the  eye  witnesses  of  the  events  and  ideas  which  lie 
at  the  basis  of  all  Christian  faith.  No  other  testi- 
mony could  have  been  as  powerful  on  behalf  of  Chris- 
tian certitude,  obedience,  character  and  ideals.  Xo 
other  human  being  could  have  made  such  a  permanent 
contribution  to  our  understanding  of  the  real  personal- 
ity of  Jesus.  No  one  could  have  so  decisively  spoken 
the  needed  message  for  a  church  beset  by  doubts  en- 
gendered by  philosophical  skepticism  and  by  unem- 
phatic  morality.  The  aged  yet  clear-minded  compan- 
ion of  Jesus  was  privileged  to  render  his  beloved  Mas- 
ter the  greatest  service  of  all. 

Thus  the  apostolic  age  came  to  a  well-rounded  end. 
The  factors  were  not  wanting  to  complete  the  record 
of  the  revelation  of  God  through  the  Lord  Jesus 
Christ,  so  that  it  should  be  adequate  for  every  age. 
Through  all  these  writings  runs  a  golden  thread  of 
anticipation,  a  looking  forward  to  the  glad  consumma- 
tion of  the  age-long  purposes  of  God.  The  "com- 
ing," as  they  hoped  for  it,  has  not  yet  taken  place. 
Their  message  to  us,  as  to  their  own  generation  is  an 
exhortation  to  be  alert  and  faithful,  prepared  in  every 
way  to  welcome  the  Lord,  should  He  appear.  A  great 
work  yet  remains  before  the  knowledge  of  the  Lord  shall 
cover  the  whole  earth,  and  all  nations  shall  reverently 
call  upon  His  name.  These  glorious  men  of  Goicl 
appeal  to  us,  every  one,  each  in  our  appointed  way,  to 
bend  our  energies  ta  the  hasteuiug  of  this  end, 


'''Ammmui'llXl  5™"'ary  Libraries 


1    1012  01178   0469 


DATE 

DUE 

GAYLORD 

PRINTED  IN  U.S.A 

